Home

Cajun M770 version 2.3 User`s Guide

1. ILMI Inactive Signalling stacktype PNNI 1 0 Signalling profile Net M15 155 VPI range 0 7 M15 155 VCI range 32 4095 M15 155 Signalling VPCI range 0 7 M3 622 VPI range 0 15 M3 622 VCI range 32 4095 M3 622 Signalling VPCI range 0 15 Default port configurations parameters per module configurations M15 155 VPI bits 3 M15 155 VCI bits 12 M3 622 VPI bits 4 M3 622 VCI bits 12 Default PNNI parameters Level 56 Node ID Derived from ATM address Peer Group ID Derived from ATM address Summary Derived from ATM address Admin weight 5040 268 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide AppendixB Using BOOT Loader This appendix describes the commands that are available in the BOOT Loader interface Start up Process During the normal boot up process the Avaya M770 ATM Switch monitors the hardware for non critical faults If no problems are detected then the BOOT Loader will not be activated If a fault is detected then the BOOT Loader is enabled Note The status indicators on the front panel of the Avaya M770 ATM Switch will indicate any fault that has occurred during the start up process For more information about the start up test refer to the Modules Installation Guides Getting connected to the BOOT Loader The BOOT Loader program will only be executed by the Avaya M770 ATM Switch if one of the following occurs e a fault is detec
2. Table 8 5 Output from the td show command Field Description SRC Indicates the source of the traffic descriptor Internal traffic descriptors created internally by the switch Auto traffic descriptors created automatically when setting up SVCs User traffic descriptors created manually for setting up PVCs Quality of The service category of the traffic descriptor as well as the PCR Service SCR and MBS values where applicable 116 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 9 Managing Static Routing This chapter describes how to use the command line interface to setup and manage static routes in an Avaya M770 ATM Switch For information about how to access and use the Avaya M770 ATM Switch command line interface see Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface Setting up routing entries This chapter describes the commands that allow you to configure static routes in the routing table in the Avaya M770 ATM Switch For more examples about setting up routing entries for an attached device see Routing Configuration on page 13 Static routing is needed when connecting to an ATM host which does not support ILMI and when connecting to another switch which supports only ISP and not PNNI Adding a new routing entry to the routing table To add a new routing entry to the routing table enter a partial prefix followed by one or more virtual ports A 19 byte ATM address i
3. Timer Expired e Cause 102 received e Any network timer expiry e Local timer expiries Counters of signals sent to received from SSCS including retransmissions Counts the messages send to received from SSCS Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 85 Managing Virtual Ports Table 6 6 All protocol statistics displayed by the vport sig stats all command Field Description Count of currently active calls and parties Active Incoming Point to Point Calls The number of incoming Point to Point VCs on this virtual port Active Outcoming Point to Point Calls The number of outgoing Point to Point VCs on this virtual port Active Incoming Point to Multipoint Calls The number of incoming Point to Multipoint VCs on this virtual port Active Outcoming Point to Multipoint Calls The number of outgoing Point to Multipoint VCs on this virtual port Active Point to Multipoint Leaves The number of Point to Multipoint leaves on this virtual port AAL Resets Counts of Signalling AAL resets AAL Releases Counts of Signalling AAL releases Status Mismatches Count of number of ATG_STATUS messages received with incompatible call states Message Type Sequence Errors Count of number of messages received in an invalid state Endpoint Reference Errors Counts of number of endpoint reference errors Unknown Call Reference on RELEASE CO
4. 60 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports The vport show status command displays the information described in Table 6 3 Table 6 3 Output from the vport show status command Field Description Virtual Port Id The virtual port This is displayed in the format lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt Admin State The administrative state of the virtual port If the state is UP then this virtual port is enabled If the state is DOWN then this virtual port is disabled This will occur when you disable the virtual port using the command line interface or the Avaya M770 ATM Switch Manager Oper State The operational state of the virtual port If the state is UP then this virtual port is functional If the state is DOWN then this virtual port is not functional This could be due to a problem with ILMI or ILMI has been disabled due to a problem with the physical connection Stacktype The type of signalling used This can be UNI 3 0 UNI 3 1 UNI 4 0 IISP 3 0 IISP 3 1 or PNNI 1 0 User Net The signalling profile of the virtual port This can be either user or network For more information on which signalling profile should be used refer to ATM Port Configuration in Chapter 2 Getting Started Q SAAL State The state of the signalling data link layer SAAL Q 2931 State The state of the signalling layer Q 2931 ILMI Ver The version of
5. Admin State The administrative state of the virtual port If the state is UP then this virtual port is enabled If the state is DOWN then this virtual port is disabled This will occur when you disable the virtual port using the command line interface or via Management Oper State The operational state of the virtual port If the state is UP then this virtual port is functional If the state is DOWN then this virtual port is not functional This could be due to a problem with ILMI or ILMI has been disabled due to a problem with the physical connection ILMI Enabled Whether or not ILMI is enabled on the virtual port Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 59 Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Table 6 2 Output from the vport show config command Field Description Poll Mode ILMI polling is used to verify that the same end station remains attached at a given port There are two methods that can be used e check the ESI has not changed This is referred to as Port ESI e check that the system up time has not changed by a significant amount This is referred to as SysUpTime Multi Reg This specifies whether multiple ILMI registration is enabled or not on the virtual port Strict AAL This specifies whether the translation of the AAL parameter Trans that is between UNI 3 0 IISP 3 0 UNI 3 1 and IISP 3 1 should be OFF Normal or Strict Sig SSCOP This parameter is reserved for
6. Admin Status Up Oper Status Down Restricted Transit No Node ID 30 00 39 04 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 2 3x00 Atm Addr 39 04 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 23 82 PgId 28 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Level Scope 40 Admin Status Down Oper Status Down Restricted Transit No Node ID 28 00 39 04 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 2 3 00 Atm Addr 39 04 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 23 83 PgId 28 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Level Scope 32 Admin Status Down Oper Status Down Restricted Transit No Node ID 20 00 39 04 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 2 3 06 Atm Addr 39 04 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 23 84 PgId 28 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Level Scope 24 Admin Status Down Oper Status Down Restricted Transit No Node ID 18 00 39 04 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 2 3 00 Atm Addr 39 04 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 23 8 PgId 28 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 143 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Due to the internal PNNI implementation in Avaya M770 ATM switch the Master Agent module has the role of PDC PNNI Designated Card The PDC is the module that advertises the switch Nodal Information PTSE and in hierarchical PNNI this is the module that acts as PGL LGN in case the s
7. Alias apping NO Use specified ELAN Reject i losed ELA Reject request due to incomplete information Reject request due to insufficient information When a LEC contacts the LECS the LECS will search its mappings database If more than one mapping matches the LEC the first of each mapping type is considered If there are still multiple matches the order of precedence is e MAC mapping e Alias mapping e ATM mapping If there are no matches then the ELAN name in the LEC request message is used to match to a known ELAN e Ifa matching ELAN is found and it is an open ELAN then this ELAN is used If it is a secure closed ELAN the LEC request is rejected e If the ELAN is not known then the LEC request is rejected due to incomplete information 218 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 16 Managing an ELAN Creating an ELAN client mapping When you create a new ELAN client mapping to a specific ELAN first you must decide whether it is a single LEC or a group of LECs that is to be mapped You must then decide what type of ELAN mapping to use Possible mapping types are e An ATM address the mappings refer to a specific LEC or a group of LECs e Analias ELAN name the mappings refer to a specific LEC or a group of LECs e A MAC address the mappings always refer to a specific LEC To create a new client mapping fora LEC ATM address use the lane elan client create atm command Comm
8. GMT GMT GMT GMT GMT GMT GMT TELNET TELNET TELNET TELNET TELNET TELNET conso conso conso conso conso conso e Connection e Connection e Connection e Connection e Connection e Connection LES suraya ELAN activated TELNET TELNET conso conso e Connection e Connection accepted opened from from 194 32 220 154 accepted opened from from 194 32 220 154 accepted opened from LEC joined ELAN successfully LEC failed to connect to LECS LECS activated You can remove all entries from the events log To clear logged events use the event clear command Command M 15 155s8 gt event clear Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 239 Chapter 18 Managing Events 240 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 19 Upgrading Avaya M770 ATM Switch Software This chapter describes how to use the command line interface to upgrade the software on a module For information about how to access and use the Avaya M770 ATM Switch command line interface see Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface Managing Switch Software The M770 ATM Switch is designed as a software upgradable product Therefore you can expand the functionality of the switch by downloading new microcode The M770 ATM Switch has flash memory that contains the run time software To find out whether you are running the latest software release you can view the release
9. the index of the timer to set all timers type all This request will set value for SVCC timers according to the index parameter Changes will take effect immediately Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 159 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Set PNNI SVCC timers Use the following command to set the PNNI node SVCC timers Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config svcc set lt level gt lt index gt lt value gt Parameters lt level gt internal PNNI level number 1 is the physical node lt index gt the index of the timer to set all timers type all lt value gt the value that the selected timer will receive Note This request will set value for SVCC timers according to the index parameter Changes will take effect immediately PNNI Timers Show PNNI node timers Use the following command to show the PNNI node timers Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config timers show lt level gt Examples Timers Name Index Current Default Value Value Range Units PtseHoldDown 1 10 10 600 100ms HelloHoldDown 2 10 10 600 100ms HelloInterval 3 15 15 600 secs HelloInactivityFactor 4 5 5 20 fotr HlinkInactivityTime 5 120 120 600 secs PtseRefreshInterval 6 1800 1800 60 3600 secs PtseLifeTimeFactor 7 200 200 100 500 Rxmt Interval 8 5 5 60 secs RDelayedAckInterval 9 10 10 600 100ms AvcrPm 10 50 50 99 AvcrMt 11 3 3 99 CdvPm 12 25 25 99 CtdPm 1 3 50 50 99 The
10. Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports bandwidth assigned for a vport is 104268 CPS divided by 8 However if we were using PLCP the default bandwidth would be 95990 CPS divided by 8 Deleting a virtual port To delete a virtual port use the vport delete command Command M15 155s8 gt vport delete lt vport id gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport delete 8 1 4 Parameter lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt Disabling a virtual port Before any virtual port parameters can be changed or reset you will have to disable the virtual port To disable a virtual port use the vport disable command Command M15 155s8 gt vport disable lt vport id gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport disable 8 1 0 Parameter lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt Enabling a virtual port To enable a virtual port use the vport enable command Command M15 155s8 gt vport enable lt vport id gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport enable 8 1 0 Parameter lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 65 Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Managing ILMI Disabling ILMI on a virtual port If an attached device does not support ILMI you will need to disable ILMI on the virtual port Note that if the remo
11. Setting Address Prefixes to Match Hierarchical PNNI for more details about prefix assignment Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 155 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Here you can see all summaries that were defined either manually or by default i e the switch prefix Field Description Type Indicates whether this summary applies to Internal Reachable Addresses or to Exterior Reachable Addresses An Internal RA is an address that is internal to the PNNI domain while an Exterior RA is an address that does not resides in the PNNI domain It may be manually configured or via a proprietary protocol and may be reached over a non PNNI link Len The length of the summary in bits Prefix The Len bits long address prefix to be advertised if there are RAs that fall under this prefix Suppress This can be either true or false If it is true this means that the summary would not be advertised and therefore all addresses that fall under this summary would not be known in the PNNI domain If it is false it means that the summary would be advertised State Indicates whether the summary is currently being advertised It may be either advertising suppressing or inactive RowStatus Indicates the status of this row in the MIB table All values other than active indicates that this row is not active Local Ra Provides a list of local reachable a
12. Syntax Description Characters surrounded by square brackets denote optional arguments Characters surrounded with braces denote a selection list When there are several argument selections surrounded by braces and separated by a vertical bar then one of the arguments must be included in the command lt gt Characters surrounded by angle brackets denote information that you must provide 24 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface Using the on line help On line help is always available and can be obtained at any time by typing help The following information will be displayed e All commands and functional groups available at the current position in the hierarchy in alphabetical order e The universal commands These are commands that are independent of the hierarchy They can be executed irrespective of where you are in the hierarchy The help output from the root is shown below Command M15 155s8 gt help Output Commands access address cac event flash hardware ilmi ip lane password pport pvc route script snmp summary system ta terminal version vport Display or Access other modules in the switch master agent option only ATM address info Connection Admission Control CAC management master agent option only Event message commands Flash management commands Hardware commands
13. To determine which td_id is available type td show to display all defined Traffic Descriptors Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 295 Appendix D Creating PVPs 296 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Appendix E Components in LANE Services This chapter gives a basic overview on the components of LANE Services LAN Emulation The principles of LAN Emulation LAN Emulation LANE enables legacy LAN applications to use an ATM transport medium transparently Therefore end stations on existing Token Ring and Ethernet LANs can communicate with ATM end stations Components of LAN Emulation LAN Emulation Client LEC Every device on an ELAN has one or more LECs This interfaces with the ATM network and performs most of the work of LAN emulation LAN Emulation Server LES There is at least one active LES which may be a part of a distributed LES allocated to each Emulated LAN ELAN The LES maintains a list containing both the LAN address MAC address and or the route descriptor and the ATM address for every LEC that is active on the ELAN Broadcast Unknown Server BUS There is only one active BUS which may be a part of a distributed BUS on an ELAN The BUS is normally part of the same software module as the LES and provides the ELAN with broadcast and multicast facilities It has direct connections to every LEC on the ELAN LAN Emulation Configuration Server LECS There is only one active LECS howev
14. ccccccc cece eeeeeeseneneeees 17 Support for LUNI 2 0 issih inate beatin habits 19 How to Use the Command line Interface cccccccccccsecsecssessecsscnscesseseeenees 21 Getting Connected ic sil iaar aean ee ona sce Aa Dales Sova Aa ta Rania 21 How the Command line Interface Works c ccccccceesscessecsseeesseeseeessecesseens 22 Master Agent and Sub Agent Commands 0 eee 23 Command hierarchy dersi i ieat ai ar e S eni 23 Conventions used to describe commands csccesseescetseeseeeeseesseeeee 24 Using the on line help sscessresrernrinseriiiiise ieii 25 Managing Miscellaneous Commands cccseccceeeetsieeseeteteteseecesesesesnenenes 27 Setting passwords for local remote connections 00 eee estes 27 Todelete a passwotd siscvesccsissiacassheies uns i eaa 27 Managing the Sub Agent secs ee ceesseesesseeessnesesessseseeeseseseneeeeees 28 Switch Summary Information cseseseesessssssseseseesseseseseenseseseees 29 Configuring the Avaya M770 ATM Switch Address Information 31 Setting the Avaya M770 ATM Switch IP address subnet mask AMA ALC WAY pior a ri aa aa a ES 31 Viewing Avaya M770 ATM Switch IP address information 32 Viewing the End System Identifier ESI esse eeseeeeeeees 32 Viewing or changing the switch prefix oo eee ee seeeeeeeeees 33 Resetting the saved switch prefix ccccccsecesescsceseseseeneneesesneeneseees 34 Setting the switch prefix to its default value 0 0 eee 34 Viewing o
15. cece eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 175 Removing a manager from the list ccccecceceseee cesses eeeees 175 Secure Group Commands eseisto iiir ieir aei Ian a iaaa aE aie 176 Listing the status of the SNMP security ss ssssssssssssesitssisrstrsssesstssee 176 Viewing or changing secure current table row timeout 177 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide vii Contents Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Listing all current NMS s accessing the Avaya M770 AT Ms SWithiy s iccczeissatstiaceotondes A E E E NAE E NA 177 Configuring Authorized Managers ssssssssessisssessessssteressessesnieriesessess 178 Listing all authorized managers ss ssesseessssississesssesiesteseesreseeseeseess 178 Setting up an authorized manager entry ss sessssssssissstertsrssesstessees 178 Deleting an authorized destination station s sssss ssesssessesseseeesese 179 Disabling the authorized managers table 0 teens 179 Enabling the authorized managers table eee 179 LANE SCRVICES 220s a ce cscasenc ds Meds von A Ea letaceces a es 181 LANE Components in an Avaya M770 ATM Switch ccccccseeeeteseeees 181 LANE configuration file config data ccccccc eect eens 181 LANE 2 Capability sse morethan eiae a ae dete dove karaii Anie EEEa 182 The LECS in an Avaya M770 ATM Switch ssssssssessessssssesessiesesssesiseessess 182 Proprietary resilient LECS ninani een ia OE eas e A 183 Changing the priority of a resili
16. e All commands and functional groups available at the current position in the hierarchy in alphabetical order e The universal commands These are commands that are independent of the hierarchy They can be executed irrespective of where you are in the hierarchy The help output from the root is shown below Command M15 155s8 gt help Output Commands flash Flash management commands hardware Hardware commands system System wide commands terminal Terminal settings version Display build version number Universal commands exit help retstatus top up 272 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Appendix B Using BOOT Loader Help is also available for individual commands To obtain help on a command type help followed immediately by the full command As an example the help output for the system download xmodem command is Command M15 155s8 gt help system download xmodem Output Syntax download xmodem lt baud_rate gt valid baud rates are 4800 9600 19200 38400 baud rate defaults to 9600 Note If there is a discrepancy between the information in the on line help and the information in this manual always follow the advice in the on line help as it is the most current information available Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 273 Appendix B Using BOOT Loader Managing the Flash Filing system The following commands enable you to manage the flash memory bank Con
17. lt incoming The filter s direction applicable to incoming outgoing gt or outgoing calls Deleting a template Command M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity filter remove lt vport gt lt priority gt lt incoming outgoing gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity filter remove 9 1 0 10 incoming Parameters lt vport gt The filter s vport lt priority gt The filter s priority 1 16 lt incoming The filter s direction applicable to incoming outgoing gt or outgoing calls Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 255 Chapter 20 Signaling Security Access Control Commands Virtual Port s Security Mode Virtual port s security mode A vport can be either in a secured mode or unsecured mode When a vport is in an unsecured mode no access control is applied to call setups passing through it When a vport is secured every call setup passing through it is tested in terms of access control Setting a vport to secured mode Command M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity filter enable vport lt vport gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity filter enable vport 9 1 0 Parameters lt vport gt The filter s vport Setting a vport to unsecured mode Command M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity filter disable vport lt vport gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity filter disable vport 9 1 0 Parameters lt vport gt The filter s vport Testing vport s Security configuration by sim
18. 0 32 1023 0 8 3 0 0 7 0 7 32 1023 0 8 4 0 0 7 0 7 32 1023 0 The vport show vpivciranges command displays the information described in Table 6 4 Table 6 4 Output from the vport show vpivciranges command Field Description Virtual Port Id The virtual port This is displayed in the format lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt VPI Range The VPI range assigned to the virtual port Sig VPCI Range The signalling VPCI range assigned to the virtual port Sig VCI Range The signalling VCI range assigned to the virtual port Sig VPCI Base The signalling VPCI base on a non root virtual port 62 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Listing bandwidth information for all virtual ports To view bandwidth information for all virtual ports on a module use the vport show bandwidth command DS3 modules use traffic shaping on virtual ports Traffic is shaped based on the total bandwidth assigned to each virtual port The bandwidth assigned can be seen as Total BW For more information see Traffic shaping for DS3 virtual ports on page 64 On non DS3 modules there is no rate limit shaping Therefore the maximum transmit rate for a vport is limited by the capacity of the physical port and not by the total bandwidth assigned to the vport Command 4 DS3s8 gt vport show bandwidth status cells sec Output Virtual Port Bandwid
19. Caribbean and Latin America Region 05 317 xiv Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide List of Commands in the Command line Interface O Note Commands marked are available in the Master Agent module only A access 28 address default 34 address esi 32 address prefix 33 address reset 34 C cac pcr 38 cac sgcac 38 cac show 38 E event clear 239 event log 237 event show 239 event trap 238 F flash config 247 flash config disable 247 flash default 245 flash delete 248 flash directory 245 flash loader 246 flash rename 248 H hardware clock show 95 hardware packetdiscard 97 hardware serial speed 98 hardware vpivcibits 98 hardware wipe 278 help 25 l ilmi show 91 ip address 31 ip arpcache delete 36 ip arpcache show 36 ip gateway 31 ip ping 35 ip routecache 37 ip show 32 ip timeserver 34 L lane elan autovers 215 lane elan dient create alias 220 lane elan dient create atm 219 lane elan dient create mac 220 lane elan client delete 222 lane elan dient show 221 lane elan create 213 lane elan delete 213 lane elan les 215 lane elan lesaddress 223 lane elan maxles 224 225 lane elan rename 214 lane elan security 216 lane elan show 212 lane lec arpcache 167 lane lec elan 165 lane lec laa 166 lane lec restart 167 lane lec show 164 lane lec statistics 168 lane lecs default 197 lane lecs location 190 Avaya M7
20. Chapter 7 Managing Module Hardware Note Under normal circumstances the early packet discard threshold should not be changed Before attempting to change the thresholds contact Avaya Technical Support The Cell Loss Priority CLP mechanism allows low priority cells with CLP set to 1 to be discarded first The CLP threshold cannot be set by the user Displaying the packet discard threshold for modules To display the current packet discard thresholds for all modules use the hardware packetdiscard command Command M15 155s8 gt hardware packetdiscard Output EPD 80 The information displayed is the percentage threshold that is currently set for Early Packet Discard EPD The default EPD threshold is 80 When the switch s buffers are more full than the EPD threshold then the switch module will discard NEW AALS5 frames on UBR circuits Changing the packet discard thresholds for modules You can change the default thresholds for packet discard e Decreasing the percentage will cause packets to be discarded at an earlier stage during congestion e Increasing the percentage will cause the congestion to reach a higher level before the packet discard threshold is reached and packets are discarded e To disable packet discard enter 0 for EPD Note Under normal circumstances the packet discard thresholds should not be changed Before attempting to change the thresholds contact Avaya Technical Support To change
21. Disabling th pager rset tes eitis teveel te ensei 233 Viewing the number of lines sssssssssssssssessesissssssissessessessesresnesneesees 233 Setting the number of lines ssssssssssesssssssssesesstesenssesieseessesnesneseennees 234 Viewing the terminal Width ssssssssssssssessesssssssressesssssissessesnesseenees 234 Setting the terminal Width 0 0 cece ceeee cesses cececeeeeeneteneneees 234 Viewing the Wordwrap Status ccceccsccscsesesesceseeseecscssseseeceesees 234 Setting the wordwrap 0 ccccccssesesecsessesesesesesesescscseseseseecsesssnseeceesees 234 Viewing the linewrap Status oo cee cseseeee este neseeeeeneseseeesees 234 Setting the line wraps cbsc scents sees en a eaae l aoas reri eakas 235 Viewing the prompt sressrsaineiiieiii iiei iein 235 Changing the prompt ccccccesesesssssesesesceesesesescseseseecscsssnseeceeeees 235 Managing Everits isisisi ninen eizi eas niaaa a aaiae staak 237 Assigning an Event Priority Level ssssssssssssesssssessessestersississesnesiesesses 237 Displaying or setting the event logging priority level 0 237 Displaying or setting the event trap priority level 0 0 0 238 Displaying logged events oo ccc eee ceceeeeeneteceeeeeeenetesenenenes 239 Resetting logged events oo ccceeeeecscseseseeceescssenenesssenenes 239 Upgrading Avaya M770 ATM Switch Software ccccseseeseseneseeeeees 241 Managing Switch Software cee cssssessesesssssssss
22. For common information related to the CLI see Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface What CLI Scripts Are Until version 2 1 of the Avaya M770 ATM Switch there were several ways to access the Command line interface of the M770 ATM Switch These methods include e Direct connection via serial port of the module e Telnet connection combined with the access command e The MSP X menu CLI scripts now allow yet another way to access CLI commands A CLI script is a plain ASCII file which contains set of almost any usual CLI commands and may be prepared using any text editor that is capable to store its output files in ASCII only format Windows Word Notepad or WordPad or UNIX s vi or emacs are examples of such editors The scripts are downloaded to the M770 ATM switch using usual tftp download procedure and run using special command see below During the script running the switch executes commands consecutively as they appear in the script Output of the commands is stored in temporary log or alternatively displayed on the console terminal The script may be run on a single module or on multiple modules simultaneously if started from the Master Agent module Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 259 Chapter 21 Command Line Interface Scripts Structure of the CLI Script File A CLI script consists of two parts the Script File Header and the Command List The Script File Header must be located at the be
23. ID To create a PVP connection use the pvp setup command Command 15 155s6 gt pvp setup lt vpllindex gt lt vpl2index gt lt tdl gt lt td2 gt Example 1 Setting up a PVP between two ports on the same module with default traffic descriptors M15 155s6 gt pvp setup 6 2 8 6 3 8 Example 2 Setting up a PVP between 2 ports on different modules on the same switch with traffic descriptors M15 155s6 gt pvp setup 6 3 7 9 1 7 3 M15 155s9 gt pvp setup 6 3 7 9 1 7 3 Parameters lt vpllindex gt The first VPL for the PVP connection in the format lt slot port number vpi gt lt vp12index gt The first VPL for the PVP connection in the format lt slot port number vpi gt tdl Index of rx td for vpl1 tx td for vpl2 td2 lt td2 gt index of tx td for vpl1 rx td for vpl2 110 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 8 Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs Freeing a PVP connection To free a PVP connection use the pvp free command Command M15 155s8 gt pvp free lt pvp id gt all Parameters lt pvp id gt The index of the PVP connection all All configured PVPs In order to free a PVP connection between 2 modules you must type the command in the CLI of each module Listing the current PVP connections To list all current PVP connections which are set up on the M770 ATM Switch use the pvp show command Command 15 155s8 gt pvp show Output PVP ID VPL1 VPL 2 FWD TD REV TD AD
24. TNO_RESPONSE has expired Number of TNO_RESPONSE pops Number of times the TCC timer has reached maximum value Number of times the TCC timer has reached it s maximum number of Expiries while waiting for a response to BGN Number of Invalid PDU s bad length alignment or type Number of PDUs that could not be processed due to incorrect length alignment or type Number of Invalid PDU s content errors or while state not valid Number of PDUs that contained content errors or were received in an invalid state Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Resetting signalling statistics To clear signalling counter for a virtual port use the vport sig resetstats command Command M15 155s8 gt vport sig resetstats lt vport id gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport sig resetstats 23 9 0 Parameter lt vport id gt Thevirtual port identifier is displayed as lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt Output Done Managing Connections Listing all virtual circuits To list the details of all virtual circuits use the vport connections all command Command M15 155s8 gt vport connections all The vport connections all command displays all SVCs PVCs and internal virtual circuits such as ILMI signalling that are set up on the M770 ATM Switch Information displayed in the output is described in Table 6 7 Listing switched virtual circuits To list t
25. This is the time difference in hours from G M T To set the time zone back to G M T use the following command Command M15 155s8 gt system time zone GMT 0 232 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 17 Managing System Commands Using Terminal Commands These commands allow you to configure how the Avaya M770 ATM Switch displays output on the terminal Viewing the pager status The pager is a facility that enables you to view the information that the M770 ATM Switch outputs to the screen a number of lines at a time By default the pager is enabled To display the pager status use the terminal pager command Command M 15 155s8 gt terminal pager Output pager is enabled Enabling the pager If the pager is enabled the M770 ATM Switch displays output on the terminal screen a number of lines at a time To enable the pager use the terminal pager enable command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal pager enable Output pager enabled Disabling the pager If the pager is disabled the M770 ATM Switch displays output on the terminal screen continuously To disable the pager use the terminal pager disable command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal pager disable Output pager disabled Viewing the number of lines If the pager is enabled this is the number of lines that the M770 ATM Switch will output before pausing For more information about the pager see Viewing the prompt later in this chapter By default the
26. and then according to their PTSE ID for the local node there is a distinction between different slots originating PTSEs In this table only summary information about the PTSEs is presented for more information about a specific PTSE use the optional lt index gt parameter in the command 128 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Global Topology Reachable Addresses For displaying the global topology reachable addresses use the following command Command Examples M1 Ra 60 0 Ra 47 60 0 5 155s8 gt route pnni topology ra Len 104 bits Prefix 39 84 0f 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 20 00 Orig Node Id Type Reachable Scope Internal Yes 0 a0 39 84 0f 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 20 00 00 00 6f 00 0 20 00 Len 152 bits Prefix 00 79 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 a0 3e 00 00 01 Orig Node Id Type Reachable Scope Internal Yes 0 a0 39 84 0f 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 20 00 00 00 6f 00 0 20 00 The output is a list of Reachable Addresses with the following information about it Field Description Len This is the length of the reachable address in bits Prefix The prefix indicates that all addresses that start with this prefix can be reached directly from the advertising node Orig Node This is the 22 bytes of the node that advertises direct Id reachability to this address Type Indicates whether the address is advertised as internal or exteri
27. configuration is required depending on your third party switch to get LECS redundancy on your M770 ATM Switch switches For information on when to create candidates in third party environments see Proprietary resilient LECS in Chapter 13 LANE Services Displaying a resilient LECS election candidate To list all the resilient LECS candidates on the network that are known to the local LECS use the lane lecs resilient show command Command M15 155s8 gt lane lecs resilient show Output Mesh state is running local LECS state is standby Resilient LECS table ndex Election Protocol Endpoint AddressType 0 39 84 0F 80 01 BC 61 DF 00 07 80 20 00 00 00 6F 07 80 20 7FPVC 39 84 0F 80 01 BC 61 DF 00 07 20 9C 00 00 00 6F 07 20 9C 7FLOCAL ndex LECS Address 0 47 00 70 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 A0 3E 00 00 01 00 47 00 70 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 A0 3E 00 00 01 00 ndex Status Link StatePriorityChecksumUpt ime 0 standby reachableO 8570 00 00 active reachable12885714 days 8 28 29 194 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 14 Managing the LECS The lane lecs resilient show command displays the information described in Table 14 1 Table 14 1 Output from the lane lec resilient show command Field Description Index A unique number assigned for each resilient LECS known to this switch Index 0 is assigned to the local LECS Election Protocol The full 20 by
28. e Avaya M770 M SPS Installation Guide Supported Modules Avaya M770 ATM Switch Software Version 2 3 supports the following ATM modules e M15 155F SF MS module 15 OC 3 Multimode or Multimode Single mode fiber ports e M3 622F SF module 3 OC 12 Multimode Single mode or Multimode Single mode fiber ports e M4 DS3 module 4 DS3 ports with traffic shaping capabilities Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Features List Hardware Features Dual 40 Gbps passive backplane switch Low Cell Transfer Delay through the switch is 20 usec in port to out port Low Cell Delay Variation through the switch is 5 usec in port to out port Clock Synchronization Generation Propagation of clock to all other ports Supports CBR VBR rt VBR nrt ABR UBR Classes of Service Supports AAL1 AAL2 AAL3 4 and AALS classes Cell Loss Priority CLP discard Early Packet Discard EPD and Partial Packet Discard PPD for AALS ABR with EFCI Tagging Hot swapping of modules Line Indication LEDs Link LNK Transmit Tx Receive Rx Loss of Signal LOS Remote Defect Indicator RDI Idt R4650 100 MIPS RISC processor 32M RAM and 4M Flash on each module for fast call set up and protocol processing M15 155F SF MS module features 32K cells per slot output buffers 16K cells per slot input buffers 120K Virtual Channels per module 32K Virtual Channels per port M3 622F SF module features 32K cells per slot out
29. lt vport The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt id gt user During signalling the virtual port will act as the user side of the connection network During signalling the virtual port will act as the network side of the connection The default signalling profile is network However on an inter switch link using IISP one side of the link will have to be configured to user side This does not apply when 2 M770 ATM Switches are connected together which will automatically configure one side of the link to user Setting the stack type parameter You can set the signalling stack type for a virtual port The default signalling stack type is PNNI 1 0 The signalling stack type can be UNI 3 0 UNI 3 1 Note straight IISP is by default based on UNI 3 1 signalling UNI 4 0 IISP 3 0 IISP 3 1 PNNI 1 0 Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable a virtual port see Disabling a virtual port on page 65 To set the signalling stack type for a virtual port use the vport set stacktype command Command M15 155s8 gt vport set stacktype lt vport id gt lt value gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport set stacktype 8 1 0 UNI 3 1 Parameters lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt sot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt lt value gt Selects the type
30. none The management LEC will use the BIA lt laa gt A MAC address in the format appropriate to the management LEC s ELAN type A MAC address consists of 6 hexadecimal bytes For an Ethernet ELAN the first byte is x2 x6 xA or xE Note The change caused by the above command will not take effect until the M770 ATM Switch management LEC is restarted To restart the M770 ATM Switch management LEC use the lane lec restart command 166 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 11 Managing the Management LEC Restarting the management LEC This command is used after changing the management LEC configuration To restart the management LEC use the lane lec restart command Command M15 155s8 gt lane lec restart D Note The above command may disrupt Telnet and SNMP management sessions Displaying the LANE ARP cache You can display the management LEC s LANE ARP Address Resolution Protocol cache This is a list of all other LECs in the ELAN that have sent specifically addressed LAN frames to the management LEC or that the management LEC has sent frames to These frames include Telnet session control and data frames SNMP requests and responses and PING requests and responses There are two kinds of entries that are displayed in the LANE ARP cache e MAC addresses which are normally other nodes on the ELAN e Route Descriptors RDs which occur only in a source routed Token Ring ELAN and show either
31. or one or more of the specified modules are currently running another script entire command will fail and no modules will run the script In this case appropriate message will be highlighted 264 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 21 Command Line Interface Scripts Remote Script Execution Status At any time it is possible to monitor status of the remote script execution using the script status command Command M15 155s8 gt script status This command represents current status of the script execution on all the modules that are capable to run the script Possible script running states are as follows Message Meaning Invalid status The module does not support scripts Idle The module has not run the script since the last reset Loading script The module is downloading the script file from the Master Agent Running script The module is running the script Script running finished The module has successfully finished running the script Script running failure The module failed to run the script Note All commands in the script sub menu except run and status have local significance only CLI Scripts Restrictions There are a few CLI commands which can t be run in context of script A result of running of such commands will usually be the command failure These commands are e All types of system download and system upload when th
32. reset all the LANE configuration on the module If you want to reset the module s LANE parameters to the factory defaults delete or rename the config data file The module will create a new config data file based on LANE factory defaults Renaming a file in the flash memory bank To rename a file in the flash memory bank use the flash rename command Command M15 155s8 gt flash rename lt old_name gt lt new_name gt Example M15 155s8 gt flash rename m770ATM fieldrelease Parameters lt old_name gt The current name of the flash file lt new_name gt The new name you wish to assign to the file 248 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 20 Signaling Security Access Control Commands This part lists and describes the CLI commands of the Avaya M770 ATM switch s Signaling Security Access Control feature The purpose of the Signaling Security feature is to filter out calls during the setup phase at the signaling level The filtering is based on the source destination ATM addresses present in the call setup The rules by which calls are screened are based on creating a Template that defines the addresses mask and the rule permit deny and creating filters that assign templates to vports The calls screening procedure is as follows Figure 20 1 Call Screening Procedure Signaling ecurity State VPORT in Secured Mode Disabled Traverse the filters list from highest priority to l
33. s Guide Appendix B Using BOOT Loader Terminal Commands These commands allow you to configure how the BOOT Loader in a M770 ATM Switch displays output on the terminal Viewing the number of lines If the pager is enabled this is the number of lines that a M770 ATM Switch will output before pausing For more information about the pager see Viewing the pager status later in this chapter To display the current number of lines use the terminal lines command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal lines Output lines 24 Setting the number of lines To set the number of lines use the terminal lines command Command 15 155s8 gt terminal lines lt rows gt Example M15 155s8 gt terminal lines 48 Parameter lt rows gt The number of lines to be displayed on the terminal Viewing the terminal width To display the current terminal width use the terminal width command Command M 15 155s8 gt terminal width Output terminal width 79 Setting the terminal width To set the terminal width use the terminal width command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal width lt columns gt Example M15 155s8 gt terminal width 90 Parameter lt columns gt The number of columns to be displayed on the terminal Viewing the wordwrap status To display the wordwrap status use the terminal wordwrap command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal wordwrap Output no wordwrapping Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 285 Appendix B
34. the bandwidth pool The default value is root max bandwidth max number of vports per port The bandwidth is measured in CPS Traffic shaping for DS3 virtual ports The M4 DS3 module supports traffic shaping rate limit shaping on its virtual ports You can use shaping only on non root virtual ports All aggregated traffic SVCs PVCs etc going out of the vport is shaped to the Peak Cell Rate PCR which is configured by the user for that vport Rate limit shaping means that the DS3 module will adjust the transmitted traffic to a rate no higher than the user defines as the PCR for the vport The DS3 module uses a 256k buffer to allow bursty traffic to be accumulated in the switch and then be sent out later In order to control shaping you use the vport create command The bandwidth parameter defines the Peak Cell Rate PCR allowed on a vport and is defined in Cells Per Second Cells sec If you do not define a bandwidth value then a default rate is assigned to that vport The default rate is calculated as follows the actual maximum bandwidth of the port divided by the maximum number of vports that can be defined on a port The actual maximum bandwidth of a ports takes into account the overhead associated with the different cell mappings ADM PLCP The maximum number of vports per port depends on the number of vpi bits configured for the module For example if the number of VPI bits is 3 and we are using ADM then the default 64
35. 00 01 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 139 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing The output of this command displays a list of all local switch Reachable Addresses For each address it shows the following information Field Description Len The address length in bits The maximum length would be 152 bits as ATM routing is done for only 19 bytes addresses The last byte of the ATM address the selector has local significance only and does not affect routing Prefix The ATM address prefix up to 19 bytes 152 bits that is known to PNNI Port Type and Provide a table of all the local ports that this address is Scope Table registered on For each port it provides the port type and scope Type The address type may be either Internal or Exterior to the PNNI domain An exterior ATM address is an address that was set statically using static routes Scope This field indicates the scope of advertisement of the address The scope value indicates up to which hierarchical level the address will be advertised The lower the value the wider the domain that gets the address Value of 0 indicates that the address will be advertised through out the entire PNNI domain The advertisement scope is mapped from the UNI scope For more details refer to the Static Routing chapter Port 0 on the local slot indicates the CPU Addresses registered on the CPU port indicates services that are registered on the loc
36. 4 gt 1 lt leadership priority 1 205 gt 3 Configure the Administrative Status of the node in the next higher level to Up M15 155s8 gt route pnni config admin set lt level x 1 2 5 gt up e Repeat the last step for all levels you have in the hierarchy Connecting to an end station or edge device notsupporting ILMI If you are attaching an end station or edge device that does not support ILMI then you must configure a route to that device For example if you are connecting an Avaya M400 Gate Switch LSA module to port 8 4 0 on the M770 ATM Switch you should configure the static routing by performing the following steps assume that the ATM address of the LSA is 39 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0d 64 02 de 00 M15 155s8 gt route add 39 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0d 64 02 de 8 4 0 E Note The ATM address should not include the selector Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 15 Chapter 2 Getting Started Setting up LAN Emulation Each module in the Avaya M770 ATM Switch can host one LECS and multiple combined LES and BUS This means that on one switch there can be several resilient LECS and for one ELAN several distributed LES The Avaya M770 ATM Switch LES does not have to reside in the same device as the LECS The module that is elected as the Master will host the Management LEC The following steps should be performed for each M770 ATM Switch module to ensure correct LANE
37. 84 0F 80 01 BC 61 DF 00 07 80 20 00 00 00 6F 07 80 20 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 accounts_elan Id MAC address 00 00 F6 11 2A 3 Id Alias ELAN name 1 collage530default 2 market_UKmarketing_trn Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 221 Chapter 16 Managing an ELAN Deleting ELAN client mappings To delete an ELAN client mapping use the lane elan client delete command Command M15 155s8 gt lane elan client delete lt alias atm mac gt lt id gt Example M15 155s8 gt lane elan client delete mac 2 Parameters lt alias atm mac gt Select which type of dient mapping is to be deleted lt id gt This is the identifier for the mapping you wish to delete Usethe lane elan client show command to display the identifiers for the mappings For more information about this command see Displaying ELAN Client Mappings earlier in this chapter Note The above command does not affect clients that are already registered and joined to the ELAN If you want to make sure that any deleted clients are no longer using the ELAN then you must restart the LES for the ELAN If there are distributed LES you must restart each one that has distributed clients Use the lane les restart command This will force all clients off the ELAN and all clients will have to re register Changing the Formula for LES address that a LEC will call This command is only valid if the specified ELAN supp
38. ATM Switch to discover the server on the network by broadcasting requests To view the time received from the time server use the system time command refer to Chapter 17 Managing System Commands for details To view the current time server use the ip timeserver command Command M15 155s8 gt ip timeserver Output The M770 is requesting the time from a server at 192 16 1 14 The M770 will use the first time server that responds to a broadcast request To set or change the time server use the ip timeserver command Command M15 155s8 gt ip timeserver lt address gt discover Parameters lt address gt This enables you to specify the IP address of the time server discover This enables the M770 ATM Switch to discover the server by broadcasting requests 34 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 4 Managing Miscellaneous Commands Using PING The M770 ATM Switch allows you to PING an IP address The M770 ATM Switch will send one Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP echo request to the address each second until you press CTRL C Whenever the remote device responds the time taken to respond is displayed in milliseconds To PING an IP address use the ip ping command Command M15 155s8 gt ip ping lt address gt Example M15 155s8 gt ip ping 192 32 220 5 Parameters lt address gt The IP address for the remote device Output PING target address is 192 32 220 5 Type Control C to stop the ping seq
39. ILMI information IP configuration commands master agent option only LANE configuration commands sets the remote local console password Physical Port management Management of Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs Routing table management Management of script files Console network management Summary information System wide commands Traffic Descriptor Management Terminal settings Display build version number Virtual Port management Universal commands 27 exit retstatus top tree up Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 25 Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface Help is also available for individual commands To obtain help on a command type help followed immediately by the full command As an example the help output forthe address esi command is Command M15 155s8 gt help address esi Output esi Display the module ESI address Syntax address esi to display current esi NOTE the esi is burnt in and cannot be changed Note If there is a discrepancy between the information in the on line help and the information in this manual always follow the advice in the on line help as it is the most current information available 26 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 4 Managing Miscellaneous Commands This chapter describes how to use the command line interface to set passwords address information and CAC informa
40. LECS enter the lane elan show command Command M 15 155s8 gt lane elan show Output Name default Type Ethernet Security Open Max Number of LESs Hameo LES address formula Round robin LANE2 Capable yes ELAN ID 4528 LES Mode and Address es Distributed at 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 B8 05 at 39 04 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 04 05 at 39 04 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 16 05 at 39 04 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 23 05 Creating a New ELAN You can define up to 64 ELANs that will be known to the LECS on an M770 ATM Switch If the LES is hosted in a device other than the M770 ATM Switch then you must specify the ATM address where the LES will be located If the M770 ATM Switch will host the LES then you should set the lt LES id gt to auto This will enable the LES to automatically register with the ELAN For information about the automatic LES address determination method see the Section The LES and BUS in an Avaya M770 ATM Switch in Chapter 13 LANE Services 212 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 16 Managing an ELAN To create anew ELAN enter the lane elan create command Command M15 155s8 gt lane elan create lt newname gt lt les id gt ethernet Example M15 155s8 gt lane elan create elanl auto ethernet Parameters lt newname gt The name of the new ELAN lt les id gt au
41. M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing by the switch using a private protocol or manually configured and advertised using Exterior RA IGs Finally the total number of different PTSEs received at this node is displayed Topology hierarchy list Use the following command to display the hierarchy list of the PNNI network Command 15 155s8 gt route pnni topology hlist Output Hlist Level 1 Scope 56 nodeld 38 A0 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 1 6 00 atmAddr 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 B8 81 pglid 38 39 04 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 PGL 38 A0 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 1 6 00 Level 2 Scope 48 nodeld 30 38 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 B8 0 0 00 atmAddr 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 B8 82 pgld 30 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Paber gt Done The hierarchy list represents the hierarchy of peer groups as it is seen from this switch physical node As described in the ATM Forum PNNI protocol each node sees its peer group and the peer groups that are directly above it It doesn t see neighboring peer groups their content or their internal information The output example above represents a network with 2 levels of hierarchy Level 1 represents the lowest level where the physical node resides The Level 1 output displays the following e Le
42. M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 16 Managing an ELAN This chapter describes how to use the command line interface to manage an ELAN in an Avaya M770 ATM Switch For information about how to access and use the Avaya M770 ATM Switch command line interface see Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface ELAN Database Maintenance You can create and maintain an ELAN database on any switch that is hosting a resilient LECS Switches that are hosting resilient LECSes do not carry out any checking of database consistency It is up to you to create and maintain the same LANE services information on all switches that could host the active LECS This will ensure that a resilient LECS can smoothly take over the running of the network should the active elected LECS fail Note Until you have configured a switch hosting a resilient LECS with the same LANE services information as the active LECS it may be prudent to set the resilient LECS priority to zero This would ensure that the resilient LECS could not be elected as the active LECS For more information about managing the resilient LECS see Proprietary resilient LECS in Chapter 13 LANE Services Viewing Default ELANs When a LEC contacts the LECS it usually specifies the ELAN name or the ELAN type that it wants to join The LECS in an M770 ATM Switch will enable you to define up to 64 different ELAN names You can also define default ELANs that
43. PNNI standard refer to the ATM Forum publication af pnni 0055 000 Hierarchical PNNI Hierarchical PNNI is supported from M770 ATM Switch Embedded S W Version 2 1 and above You can now configure your ATM network into a hierarchy of peer groups with multiple peer groups at each level A single M770 ATM Switch can operate as both a physical and a logical node There may be up to four logical nodes in four heirarchy levels in the same switch The physical node represents the switch itself while a logical node in a higher level peer group represents a lower level peer group In the following sections describing PNNI the level parameter in a command refers to the instance of the PNNI node within the switch level 1 is the physical node and level 2 is the first logical node PNNI Implementation in the Avaya M770 ATM Switch The architecture of the M770 ATM Switch is a distributed one i e no single point of failure All cards implement full PNNI and at the same time share the information received and produced by each other Information generated by an individual card is shared by all other cards and accepted as if it is self originated All switch cards share the same node ID and peer group ID so to other switches in the peer group it looks like one unified switch When Hierarchical PNNI configurtion is used the Master Agent module of the Avaya M770 ATM switch the PDC or PNNI Designated Card has a special role This is the mod
44. Port Port Slot Status 08 07 00 00 12 03 00 00 8 True Peer Nbr Remote Node Id 38 A0 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 D0 80 7 E CO 01 00 Nbr Active State Time full 21140 Total number of ports p Number of received DBS packets 2 Number of transmitted DBS packets 2 Number of received PTSPs 25 Number of transmitted PTSPs 146 Number of received PTSE requests 3 Number of transmitted PTSE requests 0 Number of received PTSE acks 134 Number of transmitted PTSE acks 24 Nbr Ports Local Remote Hub Flood Port Port Slot Status 08 07 00 00 14 02 00 00 8 True 134 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing The output of this command shows the neighbors to this node and their state Field Description Peer Node Id The 22 bytes node ID of the peered neighbor Nbr State Indicates the state in the Neighboring Peer state machine for this neighbor The state full indicates that the two nodes completed database synchronization Active Time The amount of seconds since the databases became synchronized and this link is advertised SvcHello This field is applicable for logical neighboring relationship State Between LGNs all PNNI control protocols run over SVC based RCC This field indicates the state of the SVC based RCC Hello protocol The state of twoWay indicates that the remote node was discovered correctly Total The number of
45. S ID lt 33478 05 02 00 00 gt 8 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 23 0 0 14037 01 13 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 4E 0 0 Svc Link Activ Remote Remot e e State Statu Time Port Node s ID open lt 14065 00 02 00 gt 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 23 0 0 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 131 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing The output in a tabular format includes the following information Field Description Port The local port number Hello The state of the Hello protocol on this link plate twoWaylnside An inside link within the peer group The node on the other side was discovered correctly commonOutside An outside link to a node on a different peer group The node on the other side was discovered correctly and a common parent peer group was identified twoWay A logical link The logical node on the other side was discovered correctly Nbr Indicates the state of the Neighboring Peer FSM that is used for State database synchronization The state full indicates that the nodes databases are in synch The state remote indicates that the synchronization protocol is not yet performed on this link However it could be that there is a parallel link from a different slot of this switch going to the same neighbor and the synchronization is done over that link This field is not applicable for outside link
46. Table 5 1 Output from the pport show command Field Description Port Id The physical port number This is displayed in the format lt slot gt lt port number gt Admin State The administrative state of the physical port If the state is UP then this physical port is enabled If the state is DOWN then this physical port is disabled This will occur when you disable the physical port using the command line interface or use SNMP Oper State The operational state of the physical port If the state is UP then this physical port is functional If the state is DOWN then this physical port is not functional This could be due to a problem with the physical connection Speed kbps The speed for a physical port in kbps Framing The physical layer framing for a physical port For fiber the value Mode is either Sonet or SDH The default setting is Sonet For DS3 the value is either C bit or M23 The C bit framing mode for DS3 reserves the C bits for application specific uses The M23 framing mode for DS3 uses the C bits to indicate the presence or absence of stuffing bits The default setting is C bit The CPU port will always display __ _ and the Backplane port j will always display __ _ Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 41 Chapter 5 Managing Physical Ports Table 5 1 Output from the pport show command Field Description VPI Ran
47. Telnet program to the ATM module e Direct Connection or Telnet Connection via the M SPV M SPX M SPS S W Ver 2 5 or higher For more information see to the M SPS Installation Guide When a terminal is connected to the command line interface the M770 ATM Switch displays a welcome message on the terminal screen and logs the user directly into the root of the command line interface You can set a password for serial and telnet connections into the switch For more information about setting up a password see Setting passwords for local remote connections in Chapter 4 Managing Miscellaneous Commands Note You can access the command line interface using Telnet directly to the ATM D module only if the M770 ATM Switch s management LEC is currently joined to an ELAN that is accessible from the network management station and the IP address of the switch has been set However you can access the M770 ATM Switch via Telnet to the M SPV M SPX M SPS using an Ethernet connection Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 21 Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface How the Command line Interface Works The command line interface provides a set of commands that you can use to configure the M770 ATM Switch The commands are arranged in a hierarchy such that related commands are grouped together in a single functional group A functional group can also contain one or more functional groups and so forth When you login to the comman
48. The transmit clock source is either local derives the clock internally or loop derives the clock from the received signal The default setting is local To set the Tx clock source for a DS3 port use the pport set txClock command Command M4 DS3s8 gt pport set txClock lt lt slot gt lt port gt gt local loop Example M4 DS3s8 gt pport set loopback 8 1 line Parameters lt pport id gt The physical port identifier in the form lt slot gt lt port number gt local Sets the transmit clock source to local loop Sets the transmit clock source to loop Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 53 Chapter 5 Managing Physical Ports Resetting Parameters on a Physical Port You can reset all configurable parameters for a specific physical port to their default values Note You must disable the physical port before you can change clear or reset any physical port parameters For more information about how to disable a physical port see Disabling a Physical Port on page 49 To reset all configurable parameters on a physical port to their default values use the pport reset command Command M15 155s8 gt pport reset lt pport id gt Parameter lt pport id gt The physical port number in the form lt dot gt lt port number gt 54 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide ERETI o Managing Virtual Ports This chapter describes how to use the command line interface to manage virtual ports e For inform
49. Using BOOT Loader Setting the wordwrap To set the wordwrap use the wordwrap command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal wordwrap on enable off disable Example M15 155s8 gt terminal wordwrap enable Viewing the linewrap status For more information about the different linewrap settings see Setting the linewrap later in this chapter To display the linewrap status use the terminal linewrap command Command 15 155s8 gt terminal linewrap Output no linewrapping Setting the linewrap To set the linewrap use the terminal linewrap command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal linewrap none pager terminal Example M15 155s8 gt terminal linewrap pager Parameters none Line wrapping is carried out by the terminal The M770 ATM Switch will not try to calculate how many lines have actually been used on the terminal In fact it will assume that no wrapping has occurred when performing pager functions pager When the line output by the M770 ATM Switch reaches the defined terminal length the M770 ATM Switch will insert a line break and assume that no line wrapping is carried out by the terminal terminal Line wrapping is carried out by the terminal The M770 ATM Switch will keep a record of the number of lines using the terminal width Viewing the pager status To display the pager status use the terminal pager command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal pager Output pager is enabled Enabling the pager To enab
50. Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs Parameters lt td_id gt An unique identifier for this traffic descriptor lt pcr0 1 gt The combined PCR for all cells regardless of whether the CLP bit is set inthe ATM cell header lt scr0 gt The SCR for cells where the CLP bit is not set lt mbs0 gt The MBS for cells where the CLP bit is not set Removing a traffic descriptor To remove a traffic descriptor use the td free command Command M15 155s8 gt td free lt td_id gt Example M15 155s8 gt td free 1 Parameter lt td_id gt An identifier for the traffic descriptor Note A traffic descriptor that is in use cannot be freed First you will need to free the VCLs that are using the traffic descriptor Listing the traffic descriptors To list all traffic descriptors use the td show command Command M 15 155s8 gt td show Output ID Count SRC Quality of Service All 7 Int UBR UBR Unknown Best Effort Traffic 2 0 Int No service 3 7 Auto UBR Best Effort PCR0 1 127 4 3 Auto UBR Best Effort PCR0 1 255 5 4 Auto UBR Unknown PCRO 1 3532 The td show command displays the information described in Table 8 5 Table 8 5 Output from the td show command Field Description ID The traffic descriptor identifier Count The number of times the traffic descriptor is used by VCLs Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 115 Chapter 8 Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs
51. a remote LECS at WKA laidi mado 3rd party switch switch 4 M770 ATM Switch switch 2 i M770 ATM Switch PNNI Routing witch 1 M head Switch Hosts a resilient LECS standby mode Looking for a remote LECS at WKA switch 3 f M770 ATM Switch Hosts the active elected LECS at WKA Changing the priority of a resilient LECS You can force the election of a resilient LECS by placing it on a higher priority level than other resilient LECSes on the network The higher the priority assigned to a resilient LECS the better the chances of it winning the election By default all resilient LECSes when created are assigned a priority of 128 You can stop a resilient LECS being elected by assigning it a priority of zero This enables you to configure the LANE services on a switch that is hosting a resilient LECS without the possibility of the LECS becoming active Changing the priority of a LECS will trigger a new election process and the LECS with the highest priority will be elected If two or more LECSes have the same priority level then the LECS with the higher ATM address will be elected Note If the network is recovering from a failure the election process is different The resilient LECS with the highest up time will remain the active LECS This is to minimize network disruption Note If you configure the priority of a resilient LECS to the highest priority 255 this will force the LECS to be elected after a network failure r
52. a virtual port see Disabling a virtual port on page 65 To set a signalling VCI range for a virtual port use the vport set vcirange command Command M15 155s8 gt vport set vcirange lt vport id gt lt range gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport set vcirange 8 1 0 32 800 Parameters lt vport id gt Thevirtual portin the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt lt range gt Selects the signalling VCI range that will be used for the virtual port The range must be in the form x y where x gt 32 and y lt maximum vci as defined by the number of VCI bits Note Do not reduce the lower limit of the signalling VCI range below 32 All values below 32 are reserved for signalling protocol Setting the VPI range on a root virtual port The VPI range set for the root virtual port cannot be greater than the VPI range of the physical port Note Before you can create a new virtual port you must reduce the VPI range of the root virtual port For more information about creating a virtual port see Creating a virtual port on page 64 To set a VPI range for a root virtual port use the vport set vpirange command Command M15 155s8 gt vport set vpirange lt vport id gt lt range gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport set vpirange 8 1 0 0 3 Parameters lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt lt range gt Selects the VPI range that wil
53. address for the switch If the management LEC on the M770 ATM Switch is joined to an Ethernet ELAN its MAC address will default to the ESI Ethernet format To display the BIA ESI of the M770 ATM Switch use the address esi command Command M15 155s8 gt address esi Output Switch ESI Address Ethernet Format 00 40 0D 07 00 0e Note The ESI cannot be changed However in the case of LANE a Locally Administered Address LAA can be defined For more information see Managing the ELAN for the management LEC on page 165 32 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 4 Managing Miscellaneous Commands Viewing or changing the switch prefix When a M770 ATM Switch with a blank EEROM is powered up a default prefix is generated and stored in the EEROM The default prefix is 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 xx xx xx xx xx xx where x is the MAC address of the switch Note that the first byte of all switch prefixes must start with one of the following e 39 An ATM Forum Identifier AFI for the Data Country Code DCC This is allocated and assigned to countries and administered by the ISO member for that country e 47 An AFI for the International Code Designator ICD This is allocated and assigned to countries and administered by an ISO registration authority for that country for example the British Standards Institute BSI e 45 An AFI for E 164 encapsulated This is useful for organizations who wish to use the exis
54. and filename must be supplied Note The main purpose of upload command is to save configuration files on a source other than the M770 ATM Switch Rebooting the switch It is highly recommended that you use the system reboot command to reboot the Avaya M770 instead of using the reset button This is because the system reboot command first flushes any outstanding configuration updates to the non volatile memory whereas pressing the reset button may cause configuration information to be lost To reboot the switch use the system reboot command You will be prompted to confirm the operation Command M15 155s8 gt system reboot D Note When the M770 ATM Switch is rebooted all connections to the switch will be lost Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 283 Appendix B Using BOOT Loader Controlled shutdown of the switch This command is used for a controlled shutdown of a module any connections that still remain on that module will be lost A warning to this effect is displayed and confirmation is requested before the module is powered down To carry out a controlled shutdown of the switch in preparation for a power down use the system halt command Command M15 155s8 gt system halt Output This will stop the module losing all connections do you want to continue y n Note This command should be carried out before the M770 ATM Switch has its power disconnected 284 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User
55. assigned with an identifier of 0 For more information about managing virtual ports see Managing Virtual Ports in Chapter 6 ILMI The M770 ATM Switch supports ILMI and several signalling protocols ILMI is used between an end station and a switch for the following e Automatic configuration of signalling and port parameters e Address registration Setting up SVCs The M770 ATM Switch supports UNI 3 0 3 1 and 4 0 signalling for connection setup between an end station and a switch IISP and PNNI 1 0 signalling are used for inter switch connection When a connection setup request is transmitted by an end station using the UNI signalling protocol the M770 ATM Switch will use the ATM address of the called party and look up the longest matching addresses in its internal routing table If there is more than one longest matching address it selects the appropriate port to route in terms of meeting the CoS and QoS requirements and the minimum cumulative Administrative Weight of the links on the path to the destination Once the preferred output port has been determined the setup request is forwarded to that port Each switch forwards the connection setup request in the same manner until the destination end station is reached If the destination end station agrees to accept the connection a SVC is set up Figure F2 Signalling through the switches eee Avaya M770 JER et z i A Swi Ye vpi vei ATM Switch 1 a bme Endestation 1 A
56. be obtained at any time by typing tree The tree command can be used at the prompt of any functional group to view the sub commands of the group Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 23 Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface For example the output of the tree command from the pport functional group prompt is Command Output M15 155s8 pport gt tree pport disable Disable a physical port t enable Enable a physical port reset Reset all settable parameters on a physical port to their defaults set Set a physical port parameter framing Specify the framing payloadscrambling Specify whether payload scrambling is on or off txrate Specify port transmit rate in Kbits sec show Show information about all physical ports counters Show counter information for a physical port Note Certain functional groups in the hierarchy are also commands in their own right For example the vport show functional group is also a command when entered on its own Conventions used to describe commands Throughout this chapter the following conventions are used e All command examples are given in relation to the root of the hierarchy That is this is how you would enter the command if you were at the root of the hierarchy e The syntax of commands are described using the symbols displayed in Table 3 2 Table 3 2 Symbols used to describe command syntax
57. cc cece ceeeeeeeteeenseeneneneneneenes 252 Creating a tem platen nosys syon g e e e e 252 Creating a template i 0 titcca i aa ira a bE e 252 Displaying configured templates se ssssssssessississessssersesressssneesees 253 Displaying a specific template s information ssssssssssssssessesseeseee 253 Deleting a template nse rsnnistn ia e a S 253 Signaling Security Filters sieles piss aiia aiii adhi 254 Creating arfilter oaa ene Bea tat ates e aa Eee cath reared ea 254 Displaying configured filters s ss ssessssssssisssiseessesterisressesseseesesses 254 Filter sstateuno iaei nins n a a a aa a d 255 Deleting a t mplate isisisi a eiea aE 255 Virtual Port s Security Mode ssssssessssssssisissesssssersissessssnsesiesessesneesteseenee 256 Virtual port s security mode sssssssssssessississessirsississesstesieressesntesees 256 Setting a vport to secured mode s ssssssssissesssssisieseeseessesees 256 Setting a vport to unsecured mode eee sees sees tees 256 Testing vport s Security configuration by simulation 256 Signaling Security Event Log and Traps ss ssssssesississssssessesisnrisresreseesne 257 Signaling Security Traps Management ccccsecceeeeeteeeeeenees 257 Enabling Disabling Signaling Security related SNMP traps 257 Displaying event logs cccceeecscescsesesesescesesesescscseseecesscessseneeecenenes 257 Clearing the event log nesne n cavers EE 258 Co
58. ccs ceeeeeeeees 72 Setting the signalling VCI range oo ccc ese seseceeeececeeeneeeneneees 73 Setting the VPI range on a root virtual port 0 cece 73 Setting the QSAAL wait parameter on a Virtual port 0 74 Resetting Virtual Port Parameters cccc cece ee ee eeeeseeceeeeseenenesenenenes 75 Resetting the signalling profile parameter 0 0 0 0 75 Resetting the stack type parameter ccccsececeseeseseseeteneesesteeeneees 76 Resetting the signalling VPC VPI range 0 ee teneeeeees 76 Resetting the signalling VPCI range cceescssessssesescecetesesesteneeneees 77 Resetting the signalling VCI range cccesseesessesetesceeeesesesneneeneees 77 Resetting the VPI range cccce ccc cece cs ceeeececseensnesececesenenesesenenenes 78 Resetting the Waitqsaal parameter ccceccseesesteteteseseeteteseenens 78 Resetting all configurable parameters on a specific virtual port 79 Managing the Probe Method ccccsesccesessssesesesesssssesesessseseseseessesesees 79 Setting the managing probe method for proprietary features 79 Displaying the method of probing for proprietary features 79 Virtual Port Signalling Information cccccc cece ee cesses ne neneeeeeees 80 Virtual port signalling information 0 0 0 eeeeneeeeeees 80 Resetting signalling statistics cccccssessssesesesesseteesceceesesesneneeneees 89 Managing Comnections ccccccccccsecsssessscssssessecsseessseseeensesescseesese
59. configuration 1 Determine what type of LECS is to be hosted on this module local or remote By default the module is configured to seek a remote LECS at WKA Well Known Address For information about the different types of LECS that can be hosted on the M770 ATM Switch see Chapter 14 Managing the LECS 2 Ifyou are using resilient LECS configure one of the LECS to have the highest priority For information about changing a LECS priority on the M770 ATM Switch see Chapter 14 Managing the LECS 3 If the M770 ATM Switch is to host a local LECS then you will need to consider the ELANSs that the LECS will coordinate Note To ensure that a standby LECS can smoothly take over the running of the network should the active elected LECS fail it must be configured with the same LANE services information as the active elected LECS There is no checking of database consistency between modules that are hosting the resilient LECS 4 Determine what ELANSs this switch will host and create LESes to host the required ELANs For information about configuring local ELANs see Chapter 16 Managing an ELAN For information about configuring the local LES see Chapter 15 Managing the LES BUS By default the M770 ATM Switch hosts the following default ELANs ELAN name ELAN LES name Default Ethernet ELAN default default 16 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 2 Getting Started Note En
60. destinations for frames that must cross a source routing bridge or a device that bridges from ATM to physical Token Ring networks To view the LANE ARP cache use the lane lec arpcache command Command M15 155s8 gt lane lec arpcache Output Destination 00 10 5A 0A C0 3B ATM address 39 84 0F 80 01 BC 61 DF 00 87 00 77 01 00 40 0D 64 02 DE 81 DataDirect VC Vpi 0 Vci 751 Destination 00 40 0D 5A 01 4E ATM address 39 84 0F 80 01 BC 61 DF 00 87 00 77 01 00 40 0D 64 02 DE 81 DataDirect VC Vpi 0 Vci 751 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 167 Chapter 11 Managing the Management LEC Viewing the management LEC statistics To display statistics about the control and data planes of the management LEC use the lane lec statistics command Command M15 155s8 gt lane lec statistics The control plane information for the lane lec statistics command is shown in Table 11 2 Table 11 2 Output from the lane lec statistics command control plane Field Description control packets In Out The number of ELAN control frames that this management LEC has received and sent Bad The number of corrupted control frames that this management LEC has received arp requests In Out The number of LANE ARP requests that this management LEC has received from and sent to the LES arp replies In Out The number of responses to LANE ARP requests that this management LEC has received and responded to raw data In Out The t
61. etta Eai aE aeiee s 65 Disabling a virtual port sssssssssssesssssssssesisseestsssesiesteseesnententessesseseenee 65 Enabling a Virtual port mpsnscrssereysn piia e e a ea 65 Managing ILMD meitin aeeiioaaoe annsi E aaa a r a es 66 Disabling ILMI on a virtual port sssss sssessssesssssississesssesisessessseseeseesee 66 Disabling ILMI polling on a virtual port s ssssssesssssesissessessseseesese 66 Disabling ILMI multiple registration s sssssssssssessesssesssrtesressesseseesee 66 Enabling ILMI on a virtual port sssss ssssssissesssssissessesssesiesissessseseeseesee 67 Enabling ILMI polling on a virtual port ss ssssssssissssssesisissesssesseseeee 67 Enabling ILMI multiple registration ssss sessssessssssssississessesrersessesseeee 67 Setting the ILMI version on a virtual port ss ss sssssessssssesrsssssertesssees 68 Resetting the ILMI version on a virtual port s sssssssssssssssssissstesteess 68 Setting Virtual Port Parameters ss sssesssssssissesseesirissesstesrestentessesnenteneeenens 69 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide iii Contents Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Setting the signalling profile parameter ccceec eee 69 Setting the stack type parameter 0 cece eseseeteeneseeteeseseees 70 Setting the signalling VPCI range cee ceeeeeeeeeteneeeneeeees 71 Setting the signalling VPCI base ccccccssseceseteesesteteeseeeeneseeeenens 71 Setting the signalling VPC VPI range
62. future use Rx Window All ports are set to the default parameter Wait for Peer This specifies whether this vport will wait indefinitely for an SSCOP incoming QSAAL connection Listing the status information for all virtual ports You can view the status information for all virtual ports on a module or for a specific virtual port Any virtual port information that is marked with an asterisk has been learned by the M770 ATM Switch during the ILMI dialogue with the remote device Information that is not marked with an asterisk has either been configured by the user or is the default setting for the virtual port To view the virtual port status enter the vport show status command Command M15 155s8 gt vport show status lt vport id gt Parameter lt vport id gt The virtual port This is displayed in the format lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt If a lt vport number gt parameter is not supplied then the link status summary information is supplied for all virtual ports Example M15 155s8 gt vport show status Output Virtual Port Status Information Virtual AdminOperStackUserQ SAALO 2931PNNI HelloILMIILMI Port IdStateStateType NetStateStateStateVerState 8 0 BwWNE OG GO UpUp InternalUserUpUpDown4 0Disabled UpDown PNNI 1 0NetDownDownDown4 0Inactive UpUp UNI 3 1 Net UpUpDown3 x Ready UpUp UNI 4 0 Net UpUpDown4 0 Ready UpUp PNNI 1 0 Net UpUpUp4 0 InterSwitch
63. ilmi show command Command M15 155s8 gt ilmi show lt vport id gt Parameters lt vport id gt The virtual port is displayed in the format lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt If no virtual port id is entered then ILMI information is displayed for all virtual ports The ilmi show command displays the information described in Table 6 8 Table 6 8 Output from the ILMI show command for a specific virtual port Field Description Stack Type The Stack Type that the remote device uses for signalling This can be UNI 3 0 UNI 3 1 UNI 4 0 IISP 3 0 IISP 3 1 or PNNI 1 0 Private The UNI type that is used This is either Private or Public Public IP address The IP address of the remote device attached to the virtual port Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 91 Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Table 6 8 Output from the ILMI show command for a specific virtual port Continued Field Description OSI NSAP The Open Systems Interconnection OSI Network Service address Access Point NSAP address An OSI NSAP address is an address to which a management station can send network management protocol messages to access network management information about the operation of the ATM device local to this UNI Management Entity UME IfName The textual name of this interface MaxVpiBits The maximum VPI bits This together with the MaxVpc d
64. ilmimultireg 66 vport disable poll 66 vport enable 65 vport enable ilmi 67 vport enable ilmimultireg 67 vport enable poll 67 vport probe 79 vport reset all 79 vport reset ilmiver 68 vport reset profile 76 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide I List of Commands in the Command line Interface vport reset sigvpcirange 77 vport reset stacktype 76 vport reset vcirange 77 vport reset vpirange 78 vport reset waitqsaal 78 vport set ilmiver 68 vport set profile 69 vport set sigvpcibase 71 vport set sigvpcirange 71 vport set stacktype 70 vport set vcirange 73 vport set vpirange 73 vport set waitqsaal 74 vport show 55 vport show bandwidth 63 vport show config 59 vport show status 60 vport show vpivciranges 62 vport sig sigsecurity event clear 258 vport sig sigsecurity event show 257 vport sig sigsecurity filter create 254 vport sig sigsecurity filter disable 255 vport sig sigsecurity filter disable vport 256 vport sig sigsecurity filter enable vport 256 vport sig sigsecurity filter remove 255 vport sig sigsecurity filter show 254 vport sig sigsecurity filter simulate 256 vport sig sigsecurity show 251 vport sig sigsecurity template create 252 vport sig sigsecurity template remove 253 vport sig sigsecurity template show 253 vport sig sigsecurity traps 257 vport sig stats 80 IV Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter provides information about the Ava
65. level neighbors Local Port The identification slot port of the local end of the link to the neighbor Remote Port The identification of the remote end slot port Hub Slot The slot on which the local end of the link resides Flood Status A true false value indicating which of the parallel links is used for flooding of PTSEs In case there is only one link to a neighbor that link will be used for flooding of PTSEs Local Reachable Addresses Command Examples To show local reachable addresses RAs use the following command M15 155s8 gt route pnni local ra Local Ra Len 152 bits Prefix 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 5C Port Type Scope 08 00 00 00 Internal 0 The output of this command displays a list of all local Reachable Addresses For 136 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing each address it shows the following information Field Description Len The address length in bits The maximum length would be 152 bits as ATM routing is done for only 19 bytes addresses The last byte of the ATM address the selector has local significance only and does not affect routing Prefix The ATM address prefix up to 19 bytes that is known to PNNI Port Type Provide a table of all the local ports that this address is registered and Scope on For each port it provides the Port Type and Scope Table T
66. link is derived from two Horizontal Link PTSEs which represent the two uni directional connections A link may be non routable if e The paired link the link on the other direction doesn t exist i e a Horizontal Link PTSE describing the other direction doesn t appear in the local database e The remote node doesn t appear in the local database it s Nodal Info PTSE was not received Note In heirarchical PNNI configuration uplinks known to this node are not shown in the output above To see Uplinks information see the Global Topology Uplink command on page 130 In addition the table distinguishes between nodes that are reachable and those that are not reachable Reasons for a node to be non reachable are e One or more PTSEs generated by this node were received at the local node but the Nodal Info PTSE of that node was not one of them e The Nodal Info PTSE of that node was received however there is no valid route to that node A route may be non valid if one or more links on that route are non routable e Anode may be non reachable if one of the nodes on the path is a non transit node Reachable addresses are grouped to Internal and Exterior Reachable Addresses RAs Internal RAs are ATM addresses that are part of the PNNI domain The switches learned them using ILMI and advertised them in Internal RA IGs Exterior RAs are ATM addresses that are not part of the PNNI domain They were learned 124 Avaya
67. mac lt MAC address gt lt ELAN name gt Example M15 155s8 gt lane elan client create mac 00 00 F6 11 2A 3 sales_trn Parameters lt MAC address gt TheMAC address of the LEC that needs to be mapped to the specified ELAN lt ELAN name gt The name of the ELAN known to the LECS To create a new client mapping for a LEC ELAN alias use the Lane elan client create alias command Command M15 155s8 gt lane elan client create alias lt alias name gt lt ELAN name gt Example M15 155s8 gt lane elan client create alias market_UK marketing_eth Parameters lt alias name gt The namethat the LEC provides in its configuration request to the LECS lt ELAN name gt The name of the ELAN known to the LECS In this example all LECs that request the LES address of the ELAN market _UK will receive the LES address of the ELAN market ing_eth 220 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 16 Managing an ELAN Displaying ELAN Client Mappings To display all ELAN client mappings use the lane elan client show command Command Parameters Example Output M15 155s8 gt lane elan client show atm mac alias If no parameter is supplied all mappings will be listed atm Lists only LEC ATM address to ELAN mappings mac Lists only LEC MAC address to ELAN mappings alias Lists only LEC alias ELAN name to ELAN mappings M15 155s8 gt lane elan client show Id ATM addressELAN name ATM address mask 1 39
68. names are the sole property of their respective owners Copyright 2001 Avaya Inc All rights reserved 318 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide
69. of the software in the flash memory This chapter explains how to manage the run time software that is held in flash memory and how to upgrade downgrade via TFTP from the CLI For more information on how to download or upload microcode to the M770 ATM Switch see Chapter 17 Managing System Commands Viewing Software Version Information To obtain software version information use the version command Command M15 155s8 gt version Output MAC Address 00 00 F6 65 00 66 Boot ROM Version 150 30 Build Version ta 13 0520 Build Time Tue Jan 31 13 06 29 GMT 1999 Built By release Build Directory release avayaM770 Build Host builder Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 241 Chapter 19 Upgrading Avaya M770 ATM Switch Software Upgrading Software via TFIP from the Command Line Interface CLI To download files to the ATM Module via TFTP use the procedure outlined below This example explains how to download version 2 0 software 1 Before downloading a new software version it is recommended to take a snapshot of your current module configuration If it is needed to revert to a previous version it is best to use the configuration that was used with that version To take a snapshot use the system snapshot command Command M15 155s8 gt system snapshot lt filename gt Output M15 155s8 gt system snapshot snap1408 txt Flash and NVwrites stopped Snapshot saved to Configuration file snap1408 txt 2 Before you ca
70. parallel links that go to the same neighbor node number of ports Number of The number of Database Summary packets that were received received DBS from the neighboring peer part of the PNNI database packets synchronization phase Number of The number of Database Summary packets that were transmitted transmitted to the neighboring peer part of the PNNI database DBS packets synchronization phase Number of The number of PNNI Topology State Packets PTSP that were received received from the neighboring peer PTSPs Number of The number of PTSPs that were transmitted to the neighboring transmitted peer PTSPs Number of The number of received PNNI Topology State Element PTSE received requests during PNNI Database synchronization phase PTSE requests 135 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Field Description Number of The number of transmitted PTSE requests during PNNI transmitted Database synchronization phase PTSE requests Number of The number of PTSE acknowledgments that were received from received the neighboring peer PTSE acks Number of The number of PTSE acknowledgments that were transmitted to transmitted the neighboring peer PTSE acks Nbr Port Provides a table with information about all the ports on the physical node that are connected to the same neighbor The local ports may be from any slot on the switch This table is applicable to physical
71. permngr update command Syntax M15 155s8 gt snmp permngr update lt index gt lt ip_addr gt Parameters lt index gt The permanent manager table index of the manager ip address that needs to be updated lt ip_addr gt the updated manager ip address Example M15 155s8 gt snmp permngr update 1 149 49 34 217 M15 155s8 gt snmp permngr show Permanent Managers 1 149 49 36 217 2 149 49 39 216 Removing a manager from the list To remove a new manager from the list use the permngr remove command Command M15 155s8 gt snmp permngr remove lt index gt Parameters The permanent manager table index of the ip address that needs to be removed Example M15 155s8 gt snmp permngr remove 2 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 175 Chapter 12 Managing SNMP Secure Group Commands This section describes the secure group commands that enable you to enable or disable security on the switch and set up a list of Network Management Station NMS addresses as authorized managers An authorized manager is any NMS that is listed in the secure allowed table If you enable security then only authorized managers that have been specified in the security tables will be able to manage the M770 ATM Switch There is a limit on the number of concurrent NMSs that can manage a single M770 ATM Switch If SNMP security is enabled then a maximum of 15 concurrent NMSs can manage the M770 ATM Switch otherwise up to 20 concurrent NMSs ca
72. pport set mapping 8 2 plcp lt pport id gt The physical port identifier in the form lt slot gt lt port number gt adm Sets the mapping mode to ADM The default setting is ADM plcp Sets the mapping mode to PLCP 52 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 5 Managing Physical Ports Specifying loopback type for a DS3 port You can specify loopback type for a DS3 port Loopback is either line loopback the receiver loops back the received line signal or payload loopback the receiver loops back the received payload or none no loopback The default loopback is none no loopback Note In order to start stop loopback using the set loopback command both the Admin state and Oper state of the port must be UP Another method of stopping loopback is to disable the port For more information about how to disable a physical port see Disabling a Physical Port on page 49 To set the loopback type for a DS3 port use the pport set loopback command Command M4 DS3s8 gt pport set loopback lt lt slot gt lt port gt gt payload line none Example M4 DS3s8 gt pport set loopback 8 1 line Parameters lt pport id gt The physical port identifier in the form lt slot gt lt port number gt payload Sets the loopback type to payload line Sets the loopback type to line none Sets the loopback type to none Specifying the Tx Clock source for a DS3 port You can specify the transmit clock source for a DS3 port
73. seconds Parameter lt timeval gt A timeout value between 20 and 3000 seconds Listing all current NMS s accessing the Avaya M770 ATM Switch You can list all the NMS addresses that are currently communicating with the M770 ATM Switch For each NMS in the table the following information is displayed an index entry number for the NMS the address type of the NMS the IP address of the NMS and when the current NMS last accessed the M770 ATM Switch Note If SNMP security is enabled then a maximum of 15 concurrent NMS s can manage the M770 ATM Switch otherwise up to 20 concurrent NMS s can manage the switch To display the current security information use the snmp secure current command Command M15 155s8 gt snmp secure current Output Secure mode is currently Disabled SNMP Security Information currently active NMS s Index Type IP AddressTime Since Last Access H M S 1 IP 194 32 220 1290 02 50 2 IP 194 32 220 260 02 20 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 177 Chapter 12 Managing SNMP Configuring Authorized Managers This section describes how to view and set up a list of Network Management Station NMS addresses on the M770 ATM Switch as authorized managers An authorized manager is any NMS that is listed in the Secure Allowed Table The NMS will be able to access the M770 ATM Switch by sending SNMP requests and receiving SNMP replies from the M770 ATM Switch If you enable security then only a
74. see VCC virtual port default setting 12 virtual ports 55 93 administrative state 57 config information 55 creating 64 deleting 65 disabling 65 displaying signalling information 80 enabling 65 id 55 57 ILMI 66 68 disabling multiple registration 66 disabling polling 66 enabling 67 enabling ILMI multiple registration 67 enabling ILMI polling 67 MIB information 91 resetting the version 68 setting the version 68 ILMI state 58 listing details permanent virtual circuits 90 switched virtual circuits 89 virtual circuits 89 operational state 57 resetting signalling statistics 89 setting QSAAL wait parameter 74 signalling profile 69 signalling VCI range 73 signalling VPC VPI range 72 signalling VPCI base 71 UTP 42 signalling VPCI range 71 stack type 70 312 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Index VPI range on a root port 73 setting parameters 69 show 55 config 59 status 60 VPIVCI range 62 show bandwidth 63 signalling profile 69 status information 55 traffic shaping 64 DS3 module 63 UNI 57 VCI 55 VPI 55 VPI range 64 root 64 VPI 301 VT100 9 WwW Well Known Address WKA 189 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 313 Index 314 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide How to Contact Us To contact Avaya s technical support please call In the United States Dial 1 800 237 0016 press 0 then press 73300 In the EMEA Europe Middle East and Africa Region Local Dial I
75. switch G 39 00 00 00 00 00 03 03 The user decides that this is it For all switches set all the remaining bytes up to the 13 byte to 0 The prefix of switch A 39 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 The prefix of switch B 39 00 00 00 00 01 01 02 00 00 00 00 00 The prefix of switch C 39 00 00 00 00 01 02 01 00 00 00 00 00 The prefix of switch D 39 00 00 00 00 01 02 02 00 00 00 00 00 The prefix of switch E 39 00 00 00 00 00 03 01 00 00 00 00 00 The prefix of switch F 39 00 00 00 00 00 03 02 00 00 00 00 00 The prefix of switch G 39 00 00 00 00 00 03 03 00 00 00 00 00 308 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Index A Address Resolution Protocol see ARP ARP cache see IP ARP cache 36 ARP request 298 ATM address 298 ATM cells 301 ATM Forum compliant statistics BUS 208 LES 204 ATM port 12 automatic LES address determination method 182 185 207 B BOOT Loader 269 287 command hierarchy 272 command line interface 271 273 defaultimage 270 image version 288 menu 269 PROM 288 BOOTP 11 31 Broadcast Unknown Server see BUS BUS 297 299 ATM Forum compliant statistics 208 C CBIT 50 CBR traffic 113 descriptor 113 Coaxial 42 command hierarchy 23 BOOT Loader 272 command line interface command format conventions 24 direct connection 21 on line help 25 26 Telnet connection 21 congestion control 22 23 CAC 37 Connection Admission Control CAC 37 controlled shutdown 229
76. that 2 Horizontal Links PTSEs for 2 routable uni directional links exist in the local node database The link is identified by the node ID and the port number of its ends If the link does not exist an X will be displayed on the vertical line Note In hierarchical PNNI local switch links include all logical and physical horizontal links that are directly connected to this switch including all its nodes Local Switch Reachable Addresses This command displays the 19 byte address of end stations directly connected to the switch These addresses were either learned via ILMI or added manually in the static route table The addresses here are all of the addresses seen in each of the modules using the route pnni local ra command To show local switch reachable addresses RAs use the following command Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni local switch ra 138 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Examples Local 39 03 Port Ra Len 152 bits Prefix 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Type Scope 00 Internal 0 Len 152 bits Prefix 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Type Scope 00 Internal 0 Len 152 bits Prefix 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Type Scope 00 Internal 0 00 Exterior 32 Len 152 bits Prefix 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Type Scope 00 Internal 0 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 5C 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 B8 00 00 00 40 0D 64 03 EA 00 00 00 A0 3E 00
77. the LEC should join should it only specify the ELAN type However in some cases the LEC may neither specify an ELAN name nor the ELAN type that it wishes to join For these cases you can set a default ELAN that will be used The following default ELAN types can be specified in the LECS The default settings in an M770 ATM Switch are also provided e Ethernet type ELAN A default ELAN name of default is specified in an M770 ATM Switch M770 for this ELAN type e Unspecified type ELAN A default ELAN name of default will be used when the LEC provides neither an ELAN name nor a specific ELAN type that it wants to join Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 211 Chapter 16 Managing an ELAN To list or change the ELAN names for the default ELAN names see Specified ELAN Defaults in the LECS in Chapter 14 Managing the LECS Listing all ELANs known to the local LECS In an M770 ATM Switch LECS the LECS will support 64 ELANSs including the pre defined ELAN The name default supports Ethernet ELANs If the ELAN mode has been determined by the first LES to register with the ELAN then an asterisk will be displayed An asterisk near the LANE2 capability parameter indicates that it was set to auto and the capability has been set by the first LES to register An asterisk near the ELAN ID indicates that it has been calculated by the software To display a list of ELANs that are known to the local
78. the Trunk ID range for the module Each P2MP PVC has a manually assigned Trunk ID The Trunk ID is used as a unique identifier for the P2MP call on both the ingress module on which the root of the call is connected and on the egress modules on which the leaves of the call are connected The Trunk ID values that are allowed for use by the P2MP call must be defined on the module The following example configures the Trunk ID Range for the module from 0 to 200 Command M15 155s8 gt hardware trunkidrange lt maxTrunkId gt disable Example M15 155s8 gt hardware trunkidrange 200 Parameters lt maxTrunkId gt Maximum trunk ID for P2MP PVCs on all ports of the module Limiting the Signaling SVC range for the virtual port Before a VCI may be used for a PVC the signaling SVC range on that vport must be limited to prevent this VCI from being used by an SVC In this example we are using the VCIs 114 and 115 so we will limit the signaling SVC range to VCI 100 Command M15 155s8 gt vport set vcirange lt vport id gt lt range gt Example Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 291 Appendix C Creating PVCs Module 1 M15 155s8 gt vport disable 1 1 0 M15 155s8 gt vport set vcirange 1 1 0 32 100 M15 155s8 gt vport enable 1 1 0 Module 2 M 770s2 gt vport disable 2 1 0 M 770s2 gt vport set vcirange 2 1 0 32 100 M 770s2 gt vport enable 2 1 0 Module 3 M 770s3 gt vport disable 3 1 0 M 770s3 gt vport set vciran
79. the automatic registering mode for the specified ELAN will be displayed Note The above change does not affect the ELAN until the next time it is activated Note You must change the ELAN automatic registration mode to distributed before using any of the commands in this Chapter which alter the way distributed ELANs are used Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 215 Chapter 16 Managing an ELAN Changing the Security of an ELAN You can change the security of an ELAN By default all ELANs are open ELANs when they are created This means that any LEC can request to join the open ELAN If an ELAN is closed then only LECs that have client mappings to the ELAN will be able to access the secure ELAN For more information about setting up client mappings see Managing ELAN Clients later in this chapter To change the security of an ELAN enter the lane elan security command Command M15 155s8 gt lane elan security lt name gt open closed Parameters lt name gt The name of the ELAN open Changes the security of the named ELAN to open By default all ELANSs are set to open security when created closed Changes the security of the named ELAN to closed Note The above change will take effect immediately but will not affect the LECs that are already on the ELAN 216 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 16 Managing an ELAN Managing ELAN Clients A client is a LEC on an ELAN You
80. the main image To change the main image that the M770 ATM Switch will next run use the flash default command Command M15 155s8 gt flash default lt filename gt Example M15 155s8 gt flash default m770ATM_new Parameter lt filename gt The name of the image that the M770 ATM Switch will next run Note This command checks the integrity of the selected image therefore it may take a few seconds for the cursor to return Viewing the default boot loader image To view the default boot loader image that the M770 ATM Switch will load use the flash loader command Command M15 155s8 gt flash loader Output The current flash loader boot loader is boot_loader 1 2 5 Changing the default boot loader image To change the default boot loader image that the M770 ATM Switch will load use the flash loader command Command M15 155s8 gt flash loader lt filename gt Example M15 155s8 gt flash loader boot_loader 1 2 7 Parameter lt filename gt The name of the default boot loader image that the M770 ATM Switch load Note This command checks the integrity of the selected image therefore it may take a few seconds for the cursor to return Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 275 Appendix B Using BOOT Loader Activating a configuration file You can restore an old configuration file stored in the flash directory that was generated with the system snapshot command To activate a configuration file us
81. the packet discard thresholds for an module use the hardware packetdiscard lt epd gt command Command M15 155s8 gt hardware packetdiscard lt epd gt Example M15 155s8 gt hardware packetdiscard 70 Parameters lt epd gt The new percentage threshold for EPD Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 97 Chapter 7 Managing Module Hardware Managing the speed for the serial port To display the current speed for the serial interface port use the hardware serial speed command Command M15 155s8 gt hardware serial speed Output M15 155s8 gt 9600 To set up the speed for the serial interface port use the hardware serial speed command and type the desired speed after the command as shown Command M15 155s8 gt hardware serial speed 4800 9600 19200 38400 Example M15 155s8 gt hardware serial speed 9600 Parameters 4800 9600 19200 384 Select the speed at which the serial interface port will 00 communicate Managing the number of VPI and VCI bits You can configure the number of VPI and VCI bits that will be used for the VPI and VCI ranges on all the physical ports for this module To display and or change the VPI VCI bits for the ATM module use the hardware vpivcibits command Use the hardware vpivcibits command to display the maximum number of VPI and VCI bits that are used for all ports on the module Command M15 155s8 gt hardware vpivcibits Output Configured number of vpi bits 3 vei bits 12 Curre
82. the same level To check the PNNI and ATM addresses of the switch type one of the following commands M15 155s8 gt summary info or M15 155s8 gt route pnni config show Note Changing the PNNI level also changes the first byte of the Node ID and the Peer Group ID Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 13 Chapter 2 Getting Started Connecting to another ATM switch which doesn t support PNNI If you are attaching another ATM switch that doesn t support PNNI you must configure a route to that switch For example if you are connecting a Collage 740 to port 8 5 0 on the M770 ATM Switch you should configure the static routing table by performing the following steps assume that the partial ATM prefix of the Collage 740 is 39 04 M15 155s8 gt route add 39 04 8 5 0 Configuring Hierarchical PNNI The following steps will help you in configuring your network into a hierarchy of peer groups You will need a basic knowledge of PNNI e Create a drawing of the network you want to achieve while completing the following steps 1 Decide how many level of hierarchy you need 2 Divide your switches into different peer groups 3 Decide how many peer groups are grouped together in to the next level of hierarchy 4 On each peer group decide which node will be the Peer Group Leader PGL Or better configure all switches to be capable of becoming a Peer Group Leader assuming their software version supports this
83. using the new config file will take longer to boot up and another module in the switch will become the Master Agent and use the old switch wide settings When the module reboots using the new configuration file the current LANE configuration is saved in the file config bak If you need to restore the previous LANE configuration you need to perform the following steps 1 Delete the file config data using the flash delete command 2 Rename the file config bak to config data using the flash rename command 3 Reset the module using the lt gt reset pushbuttons on the module front panel Deactivating an active configuration file To deactivate an active configuration file use the flash config disable command Command M15 155s8 gt flash config disable Output No configuration file is currently active Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 247 Chapter 19 Upgrading Avaya M770 ATM Switch Software Deleting a file from the flash memory bank To delete a file from the flash memory bank use the flash delete command You will be asked to confirm the deletion Command 15 155s8 gt flash delete lt filename gt Example M15 155s8 gt flash delete m770ATM Parameter lt filename gt The name of the file you wish to delete from the flash directory Note Once a file is deleted it cannot be recovered The file must be downloaded D again You must not delete the config data file during normal operation as this will
84. will light ON For example if you want to set the IP address to be 149 49 46 61 with a subnet mask 255 255 255 0 and a gateway IP address 149 49 46 150 you should perform the following steps M15 155s8 gt ip address 149 49 46 61 255 255 255 0 M15 155s8 gt ip gateway 149 49 46 150 For more information about setting IP addresses see Configuring the Avaya M770 ATM Switch Address Information on page 31 Note Changing the IP address commands will take effect immediately and will disrupt IP traffic for example Telnet or SNMP that is going to the M770 ATM Switch Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 11 Chapter 2 Getting Started ATM Port Configuration Setting the virtual port to its default configuration If you are attaching an end station or an edge device that supports ILMI to an Avaya M770 then you must ensure that the virtual port on the M770 ATM Switch is using its default configuration For a list of the default port settings see Appendix A Default Settings on a New Avaya M770 ATM Switch For example to set vport 8 4 0 to its default settings type M15 155s8 gt vport disable 8 4 0 M15 155s8 gt vport reset all 8 4 0 M15 155s8 gt vport enable 8 4 0 This will enable ILMI to automatically configure the virtual port so that it can communicate with the attached device For more information on resetting the parameters on the virtual port see Resetting Virtual Port Parameters on page 7
85. 0 or LUNI 2 0 protocol This ELAN capability is configurable For more details refer to Chapter 16 Managing an ELAN If the ELAN is determined to use LUNI 1 0 and a LUNI 2 0 Client tries to register it will be told to use LUNI 1 0 However if a LUNI 2 0 is used in the ELAN and a LUNI 1 0 client tries to register it will be registered as the LES is capable of using the LUNI 1 0 protocol as well The LECS in an Avaya M770 ATM Switch By default the M770 ATM Switch will seek a remote LECS at the WKA The M770 ATM Switch pre defines one ELAN An Ethernet ELAN named default This is the ELAN name that is requested by several Avaya s Ethernet to ATM Access Switches The M770 ATM Switch LECS can support up to 64 ELANs The M770 ATM Switch enables you to specify default ELANs that will be used when a LEC does not specify the ELAN name but does specify the type of ELAN it wishes to join You can also define a default ELAN that will be used when a LEC does not specify both the ELAN name and the ELAN type The M770 ATM Switch LECS supports a proprietary automatic LES address determination method to locate a suitable LES for an ELAN All M770 LES will automatically register with the LECS The benefit of this is that you do not have to supply the LES address when registering with a M770 LES and if a M770 LES is re located you do not have to re configure the LECS with the new LES address The M770 ATM Switch LECS supports a proprie
86. 00 Current PG Id 38 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Current Level 56 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 29 Chapter 4 Managing Miscellaneous Commands The summary lane command displays LECS location an ELAN list LES list and a list of all Selectors currently in use Command 15 155s8 gt summary lane Output lecs location The local resilient LECS is active It is advertising the ATM Forum well known address The elected LECS is at the ATM Forum well known address elan list Name Security Type LES Mode and Address es Maximum Number of LESs LES address formula default Open Ethernet Distributed 1 LES s using LES group address at 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 5 Group address Global Open Ethernet Distributed No les is registered ELAN_3 Open Ethernet Distributed at 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 0D 00 40 0D 87 00 0D 8A 5 Round robin ELAN_Generic Open Ethernet Distributed No les is registered ELAN_Global Open Ethernet Distributed at 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 0D 00 40 0D 87 00 0D 82 5 Round robin les list Selectors Name Type Enabled LES BUS Clnts ELAN_Global Ethernet Yes 82 83 0 ELAN_5 Ethernet Yes 88 89 0 ELAN_3 Ethernet Yes 8A 8B 0 default Ethernet Yes 20 21 5 List of all selectors now in use 20 21 7F 80 81 82 83 88 89 8A 8B 30 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 4 Managing Miscell
87. 1 22 33 44 55 66 where the represents the ATM prefix and the represents the Selector Example an address mask that is designed to match all the hosts having an address prefix 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 would have the form of 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Where the represents all possible combinations for ESI Selector Creating a template Command M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity template create lt name gt srcnsap lt mask gt dstnsap lt mask gt lt action gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity template create block r d srcnsap 39 03 00 00 00 dstnsap deny Parameters lt name gt name of the template lt mask gt source destination address masks lt action gt deny to reject the call accept to accept the call 252 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 20 Signaling Security Access Control Commands Displaying configured templates Command Output Template name Action Source NSAP MASK Destination NSAP MASK Template name Action Source NSAP MASK Destination NSAP MASK Template name Action Source NSAP MASK Destination NSAP MASK Displaying a specific template s information Command Example Output Template name Action Source NSAP MASK Destination NSAP MASK Associated filters VPORT PRIORITY 9 1 0 16 9 2 0 16 Deleting a template Command Example M15 155s8 gt vpo
88. 15 155s8 gt route pnni config show lt level gt Output Level 1 Level Scope Configure Current 56 56 Admin Status Up Oper Status Up Restricted Transit No Node id Configure Current 38 A0 39 04 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 00 87 01 2 3 00 38 A0 39 04 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 2 3 00 Atm Addr 39 04 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 00 87 01 23 81 PG id Configure Current 38 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 38 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 J Note Configuration of the first level requires a switch reset Therefore the output of the Show command gives both current values in brackets and configured value as currently stored in the NVRAM To show PNNI variables for all levels use the same command with no level parameter Command 15 155s8 gt route pnni config show 142 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Output Level 1 Level Scope Configure Current 56 56 Admin Status Up Oper Status Up Restricted Transit No Node id Configure Current 38 A0 39 04 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 23 00 38 A0 39 04 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 23 00 Atm Addr 39 04 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 23 81 PG id Configure Current 38 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 38 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Level Scope 48
89. 170 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 12 Managing SNMP This chapter describes how to use the command line interface to manage SNMP in the Avaya M770 ATM Switch For information about how to access and use the Avaya M770 ATM Switch command line interface see Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface Note The secure commands do not affect Telnet sessions access to a M770 ATM Switch Telnet sessions use password security Using SNMP Commands These commands configure SNMP information on an Avaya M770 ATM Switch Viewing the system group information To display the information for the system group sys use the snmp show command Command Output M15 155s8 gt snmp show SNMP System Group Information SysDescr Avaya M770 ATM Switch Software Version 1 0 17 SysObjectID 1 3 6 1 4 1 81 17 1 16 SysContact keren SysName 0g 77 SysLocation akko SysUpTime HH MM SS 1 day 19 53 13 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 171 Chapter 12 Managing SNMP Show the list of community names To list all the community names use the snmp community show command Command M15 155s8 gt snmp community show Example M15 155s8 gt snmp community show Output Read Only community names 1 public Set the read only community name To add a specified name to the list of read only community names use the snmp community ro command Command M15 155s8 gt snmp communi
90. 294 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Appendix D Creating PVPs Example 2 Module 1 M15 155s1 gt vport disable 1 1 0 M15 155s1 gt vp set sigvpcvpirange 1 1 0 5 5 M15 155s1 gt vport enable 1 1 0 Module 3 M15 155s3 gt vport disable 3 2 0 M15 155s3 gt vp set sigvpcvpirange 3 2 0 5 lt 5 M15 155s3 gt vport enable 3 2 0 Parameters lt root vport Virtual port identifier in the form lt slot gt lt port gt 0 id gt lt range gt in the form dower bound gt lt upper bound gt dower bound gt must be the minimum VPI number for VP switching as defined by hardware vpcvpirange command vport set sigvpcvpirange In order to re enable the PVPs use the Note A previously defined PVP on a vport will be disabled if you type in the pvp enable command Note Before the vport parameter may be set it must be disabled as shown in the above examples Creating a Traffic Descriptor A Traffic Descriptor must be defined with the service class that will be used to transport the traffic and the bandwidth that is required The example below defines a traffic descriptor where its td_id 5 and a cell rate of 4152 cells per second Command M15 155s1 gt M15 155s1 gt td setup CBR lt td_id gt pcr0 1 lt pcr0 1 gt pcr0 lt pcr0 gt Example 1 Module 1 M15 155s1 gt td setup CBR 5 pcr0 1 4152 Example 2 Module 1 M15 155s1 gt td setup CBR 5 pcr0 1 4152 Module 3 M15 155s3 gt td setup CBR 5 pcr0 1 4152
91. 4 2nd Meth Od eissccsretea cation dencesacveesectieveiteceatteelocesh E A 114 Sd Method git iiss 2 iise eRe AA ih coh sh 114 Removing a traffic descriptor ccceeecesecess tees cseceeescscneneteeesees 115 Listing the traffic descriptors ccc tee e certs ceeeeeeeneteteeeeeees 115 Chapter 9 Managing Static Routing oc cccceccccccscsteteseeceseseseenesneseseenesesssnanenesesssnenesesees 117 Setting UP routing entries 0 cece eeeeescscseseseseecseseseecsesesesesesesenees 117 Adding a new routing entry to the routing table 117 Deleting a routing entry from the routing table 119 Listing the routing entries in a routing table cee 120 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI ROUN gisisto isiin tsisa 123 PNNI Private Network Network Interface seseeeeeeessesrseeresesererrseess 123 Hierarchical PNN ennea a seen du e i n a 123 PNNI Implementation in the Avaya M770 ATM Switch 123 PNNI Global Topology Information s sssssesssssssssessssiesressessesssnrinsessesseene 124 General topology information cccccceeesesteteeeeceteesesesneneneeceees 124 Topology hierarchy List cscicicccss ieisccteiiets csacectetecececsavenoseesavtstedes tbr 125 Global topology MAKS petaire sairo eent aaia aa S 126 Global Topology N des sssi iorsisrstishen tsibo sisri 127 Global Topology PISES isiin aaia r si a 128 Global Topology Reachable Addresses cccccsssesssesssssssesesesees 129 Global Topology Uplink cccccccceeese
92. 4 Aug 1998 GMT Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 231 Chapter 17 Managing System Commands Manually changing the date or time on an Avaya M770 ATM Switch You can manually change the date or time on the switch You do not have to enter both the date and time only the parameter that you wish to change Note that the date and time will be reset when you reboot the switch To change the date or time on a switch use the system time set command Command M15 155s8 gt system time set lt date gt lt time gt Example M15 155s8 gt system time set 08 25 98 15 22 Parameters lt date gt Enter the date in the form MM DD YY or DD MMM YYYY Where D is the day M is the month and Y is the year lt time gt Enter the time in the form HH MM or HH MM SS Where H is the hour M is the minute and S the seconds Viewing the current time zone A time zone is defined by the name of the time zone and the difference in hours from Greenwich Mean Time G M T To view the current time zone use the system time zone command Command M15 155s8 gt system time zone Example Current Time Zone is EST 5 Manually changing the time zone You can manually change the time zone using the system time zone command Command M15 155s8 gt system time zone lt name gt lt GMT gt Example M15 155s8 gt system time zone EST 5 Parameters lt name gt This is the name of the time zone You can enter up to ten characters lt GMT gt
93. 5 Connecting to a device supporting ILMI If you are attaching an end station edge device or another ATM switch which supports ILMI then the M770 ATM Switch will automatically configure the virtual port to communicate with the attached device Ensure that ILMI is enabled on all devices and the ports have been set to their default port configuration before attaching the device ILMI will not alter any parameters that have been manually configured by the administrator If a parameter has been automatically configured for a port using ILMI the parameter will be displayed with an asterisk next to it Connecting to a device notsupporting ILMI If you are attaching an end station edge device or another ATM switch that doesn t support ILMI to an Avaya M770 then you must disable ILMI on the M770 ATM Switch port that connects the two devices You should then verify that the following virtual port parameters on the M770 ATM Switch are the same as the parameters on the attached device e The port profile must be set to either network or user the opposite to the configuration on the remote device e The signalling stack type must be set to either UNI 3 0 UNI 3 1 UNI 4 0 IISP 3 0 ISP 3 1 or PNNI 1 0 according to the configuration on the remote switch e Other signalling parameters on the M770 ATM Switch to match the remote device like VPI and VCI range 12 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 2 G
94. 5 155s8 gt script dump lt script file name gt Parameters lt script file The name of the script file in the Flash File System as it appears name gt in the output of the flash dir command Example M15 155s8 gt script dump script txt 3 Then actually run the script using the script run command Command M15 155s8 gt script run lt script file name gt log console delay lt delay value gt Parameters lt script file The name of the script file in the Flash File System neue as it appears in the output of the flash dir command Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 261 Chapter 21 Command Line Interface Scripts Example Monitoring CLI Script Execution log console delay lt delay value gt The destination of the output of the executed commands contained in the script file If log specified the output will be stored in the script log The script log may be viewed later using script log show command see below Otherwise if console specified the script output will be redirected to that terminal from which the script was started i e serial terminal or Telnet window If neither specified log is used by default Insert delay between running of consequent commands of the script measured in milliseconds The lt delay value gt may vary between 0 5000 ms If is not specified zero is used M15 155s8 gt script run script txt console delay 100 You can monitor the progress
95. 5040 5040 504 504 00 0 0 0 4 6174 06 14 00 0 True 504 5040 5040 504 504 00 0 0 0 5 6176 06 15 00 0 True 504 5040 5040 504 504 00 0 0 0 146 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Here you can see the ATM interface on the switch slot For every interface you find the following information Field Description Interface Index This is the ifIndex for this port Pnni Port This is the port ID as known to PNNI Aggr Token This is the aggregation token for the link if exists The Aggregation Token is used by the network administrator to indicate to the PGL how to aggregate multiple uplinks into higher level horizontal links VP Cap Indicates whether the interface is capable of carrying VPCs or not Admin Weight Indicates the administered weight that is currently assigned for the link for different Classes of Services CBR Constant Bit Rate RtVBR Real Time Variable Bit Rate NrtVBR Non real time VBR ABR Available Bit Rate and UBR Unspecified Bit Rate The default value is 5040 for all administered weights Administered Weights are used during routes calculation When different routes to the destination are available the one with the lowest cost is taken The cost of the route is calculated as the summation of all admin weight along the path Setting the PNNI interface aggregation token The aggregation token is significant in multiple peer groups configu
96. 6 ELAN type 200 LECs 203 LECS location 199 mode 200 manual 199 non Lucent devices 199 peers 207 registration mode standby 185 LES BUS 185 187 linewrap 234 local LECS 192 M M23 50 mainimage 246 management local console 9 local or remote console 9 management station 10 206 207 principles 297 SNMP 10 LANE Services management LEC 10 163 169 187 settingup 16 17 BIA 163 166 LANE services 163 BOOTP 163 LEC 297 298 ELAN 165 187 LECS 16 182 189 198 297 298 299 ELAN registration 163 default location 182 ICMP 163 ELANs 182 LAA 163 166 local 16 LANE ARP cache 167 resilient 189 192 MAC address 187 310 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Index MAC addresses 167 protocols 163 187 restarting 167 Route Descriptors RDs 167 statistics 168 169 Telnet 163 UDP 163 memory allocation 231 MMF 42 mode 207 N Navigational commands 22 271 network mask 37 P pager 233 234 physical port administrative state 41 Cell Mapping 42 ADM 42 PLCP 42 coaxial cable length 42 counter 43 BIP 48 CCVS 45 CESS 45 CSESS 45 DS3 44 FEBE 48 FERR 48 LCVS 45 LESS 45 PCVS 45 PESS 45 PLCP 48 PSESS 45 UASS 45 disabling 49 empty cell generation 42 enabling 38 49 id 39 Last Change 42 Line Code B8ZS 42 loopback 42 Media Mode 42 media type 42 number 41 operational state 41 payload scrambling 42 physical layer framing 41 resetting parameters 54 SDH 41 setting cable length 52 framing mod
97. 7 8741 Morocco 31 70 414 8055 Tanzania 31 70 414 8060 Netherlands 31 70 414 8023 Tunisia 31 70 414 8069 Nigeria 31 70 414 8056 Turkey 800 4491 3919 Norway 47 235 001 00 UAE 31 70 414 8036 Oman 31 70 414 8057 Uganda 31 70 414 8061 Pakistan 31 70 414 8058 UK 44 0207 5195000 Poland 0800 311 1273 Ukraine 31 70 414 8035 Portugal 351 21 318 0047 Uzbekistan 31 70 414 8046 Qatar 31 70 414 8059 Yemen 31 70 414 8062 Romania 31 70 414 8027 Yugoslavia 31 70 414 8038 Russia 7 095 733 9055 Zimbabwe 31 70 414 8063 Email csctechnical avaya com 316 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide How to Contact Us In the AP Asia Pacific Region Country Local Dial In Country Local Dial In Number Australia 1800 255 233 Hong Kong 2506 5451 Indonesia 800 1 255 227 Japan 0 120 766 227 Korea 0 80 766 2580 Email sgcoe avaya com In the CALA Caribbean and Latin America Region Email caladatasupp avaya com Hot Line 1 720 4449 998 Fax 1 720 444 9103 Number Malaysia 1800 880 227 New 00 800 9828 9828 Zealand Philippines 1800 1888 7798 Singapore 1800 872 8717 Taiwan 0 80 025 227 For updated information visit www avayanetwork com and click Global Support Organization GSO Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 317 How to Contact Us All trademarks registered trademarks service names product and or brand
98. 70 ATM Switch User s Guide List of Commands in the Command line Interface lane lecs location local 192 lane lecs location remote 192 lane lecs priority 193 lane lecs resilient create 196 lane lecs resilient delete 196 lane lecs resilient show 194 lane lecs stats 198 lane les busstats 208 lane les clients 203 lane les create 200 lane les delete 201 lane les elan 206 lane les mode 206 lane les peers 207 lane les restart 205 lane les show 201 lane les state 204 205 lane les stats 204 P password 27 pport disable 49 pport enable 49 pport reset 54 pport set framing 50 pport set length 52 pport set loopback 53 pport set mapping 52 pport set payloadscrambling 50 pport set txClock 53 pport set txrate 51 pport show 40 pport show counters 43 pport show ds3counters 43 44 45 pport show plcpcounters 43 48 pvc disable 106 pvc setup 103 pvc show 105 R route add 118 route delete 119 route pnni config admin set 145 route pnni config admin show 144 route pnni config atm_addr show 145 route pnni config default 145 route pnni config interfaces aggrToken 148 route pnni config interfaces default 148 route pnni config interfaces show 146 route pnni config interfaces weight 148 256 route pnni config level set 149 route pnni config level show 148 route pnni config node _id default 150 route pnni config node _id set 150 route pnni config node_id show 150 route pnni config oper show 151
99. A and X or B and Z i e vports A 0 and B 0 are disabled then switches A and B would not know that switches X Y and Z exist Note Before you attempt to set up a PVP you will need to configure two things 1 Define the VPI range that is used for VP switching By default all VPIs are used for VC switching and VP switching is disabled For configuring VPC VPI range refer to Managing VPI range for VP switching on page 99 2 Define the VPIs that are used to Signalled VPs and the rest are used for Permanent VPs For configuring signaled VPC VPI range refer to Setting Virtual Port Parameters on page 69 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 109 Chapter 8 Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs Creating a PVP connection A PVP is created by constructing two VPLs The VPLs describe the edges of the PVP see Figure 8 2 Refer also to Creating PVPs on page 293 Figure 8 2 A PVP Connection PVP Connection VPL A lt gt VPL B lt lt __ _ PVP connections will be re established automatically when the M770 ATM Switch powers up You can have up to 64 PVP connections on a module To set up a bi directional PVP between 2 ports on different modules on the same switch you must type the command on the CLI of each module The command described below will setup a VPL on each lt slot port vpi gt and a PVP connection joining the two The PVP connection will be automatically assigned an
100. AN that the management LEC will attempt to configured register with when the LEC is restarted LES address The ATM address of the LES where the management LEC has registered its address Maximum frame The maximum frame size that the ELAN can support The size bytes value is obtained from the LES 164 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 11 Managing the Management LEC Managing the ELAN for the management LEC You can select the ELAN that the management LEC will attempt to join By default the management LEC attempts to join the ELAN default You can e Specify the ELAN that the management LEC will attempt to join e Set up the LECS to dictate which ELAN the management LEC will attempt to oin View the current ELAN that the management LEC will attempt to join Note Any changes caused by the following commands will not take effect until the M770 ATM Switch management LEC is restarted To restart the M770 ATM Switch management LEC use the lane lec restart command To specify the ELAN that the management LEC will attempt to join enter the lane lec elan command Command M15 155s8 gt lane lec elan lt name gt Example M15 155s8 gt lane lec elan default Parameters lt name gt The name of the new ELAN that the management LEC will attempt to join The ELAN must be somewhere on the network and known to the LECS To leave the decision about the ELAN that the management LEC joins to th
101. Done Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 173 Chapter 12 Managing SNMP Set the trap community name To set alter the trap community name with lt trap community name gt use the snmp community trap set command Command M15 155s8 gt snmp community trap set lt trap community name gt Show the trap community name To show the trap community name use the snmp community trap show command Command M15 155s8 gt snmp community trap show Example M15 155s8 gt snmp community trap show Command Trap community name public Done 174 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 12 Managing SNMP Using Permanent Managers Configuration Commands This section describes how to view and set up a list of Permanent Managers These are a list of the Network Management Stations which receive SNMP Traps Adding a new manager to the list To add a new manager to the list use the permngr add command Command M15 155s8 gt snmp permngr add lt ip_addr gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt the ip address of the manager that need to be added to the permanent manager table Example M15 155s8 gt snmp permngr add 149 49 34 216 Listing all the current managers To list all the current managers use the permngr show command Command M15 155s8 gt snmp permngr show Output Permanent Managers 1 149 49 36 251 2 149 49 39 216 Updating an existing manager To update an existing managers IP address use the
102. I advertisement scope indicates how far in the hierarchy this address should be advertised Table 9 1 Default UNI Scope to PNNI Level Mapping UNI Scope PNNI Routing Level Indicator 1 3 96 4 5 80 6 7 72 8 10 64 11 12 48 13 14 32 15 global 0 118 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 9 Managing Static Routing Note All ATM addresses that are entered in the routing table must begin with the AFI that is supported by the switch The current AFIs supported by a M770 ATM Switch are 39 47 and 45 For more information about these AFIs see Viewing or changing the switch prefix in Chapter 4 Managing Miscellaneous Commands Once routes have been added you can view them using the route show command For more information about displaying the routes in a routing table see Listing the routing entries in a routing table on page 120 Deleting a routing entry from the routing table When you delete a routing entry that is currently being used for an established connection this connection will not be affected The deletion will take effect next time you set up the connection To delete a route from the routing table use the route delete command Command M15 155s8 gt route delete lt address gt lt vport id gt lt vport id gt Examples M15 155s8 gt route delete 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 6 c0 00 21 11 31 6 00 28 01 8 1 0 Parameters lt addres
103. ILMI running on this virtual port ILMI State The ILMI state of the virtual port For a list of the different ILMI states see Table 6 1 Output from the vport show command earlier in this chapter Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 61 Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Listing the VPI and VCI range information for all virtual ports You can view the VPI and signalling VCI range information for all virtual ports on a module or for a specific virtual port Any virtual port information that is marked with an asterisk has been learned by the M770 ATM Switch during the ILMI dialogue with the remote device Information that is not marked with an asterisk has either been configured by the user or is the default setting for the virtual port To view VPI and signalling VCI range information about the virtual ports use the vport show vpivciranges command Command M15 155s8 gt vport show vpivciranges lt vport id gt Parameter lt vport id gt The virtual port This is displayed in the format lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt If a lt vport number gt parameter is not supplied then the VPI and signalling VCI ranges are supplied for all virtual ports Example M15 155s8 gt vport show vpivciranges Output Virtual Port VPI and VCI Ranges VirtualVPISig VpciSig VCISig Vpci Port IdRangeRangeRangeBase 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 32 1023 0 8 1 0 0 7 0 7 32 1023 0 8 2 0 0 0 0
104. IP address If a value is not supplied for the netmask the default value of 255 255 00 00 will be used To enable remote access to the M770 ATM Switch from a different IP subnet you must identify the IP address of a default gateway The gateway must be on the same IP subnet as the M770 ATM Switch To set the gateway IP address use the ip gateway command Command M15 155s8 gt ip gateway lt ip_address gt Example M15 155s8 gt ip gateway 192 32 220 8 Parameters lt ip_address gt A valid IP address for the gateway Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 31 Chapter 4 Managing Miscellaneous Commands Viewing Avaya M770 ATM Switch IP address information You can display IP address information for the M770 ATM Switch For information about changing the IP address information see Setting the Avaya M770 ATM Switch IP address subnet mask and gateway on page 31 To view the IP address information use the ip show command The message initializing indicates that the LEC has not yet joined the ELAN Command M15 155s8 gt ip show Output IP address 192 32 220 61 The address was obtained using BOOTP IP subnet mask 255 255 255 0 IP gateway address 192 32 220 8 MAC address lt valid address gt or initializing Layer 2 ok or initializing Viewing the End System Identifier ESI The End System Identifier ESI also referred to as the Burnt In Address BIA is the factory assigned world wide unique
105. If you press the RETURN key immediately after the prompt it has the same effect as entering the up command If you are at a particular point in the hierarchy and you need to perform a command elsewhere in the hierarchy you must enter the slash symbol followed by the full hierarchical path followed by the command For example M15 155s8 route gt vport show This command will list information about virtual ports while you are in the route functional group After the command has been executed you will still be in the route functional group Note After resetting a module some of the CLI commands may not be available immediately Wait a few seconds until all the software has initialized Master Agent and Sub Agent Commands The Master Agent and Sub Agent have slightly different CLI options For example the Master Agent has the ip command and the access command which will enable you to access a Sub Agent from the Master Agent A simple way to find out whether you are currently communicating with a Master Agent is to type help at the command line and check whether there is an access command option All the information configured to the Master Agent IP Permanent Managers is backed up by the Sub Agent so if the Master Agent is removed another module will be elected and all previous configuration settings will be kept Command hierarchy The hierarchy of the commands in the Command Line Interface CLI can
106. L and the transmit descriptor of the second VCL on the PVC connection Note if td2 is omitted then it defaults to the same as td1 Creating a Point to Multipoint PMP PVC connection Note Before you set up a PMP PVC you have to identify the Trunk ID range that D can be used by the module that holds the root of the call Trunk IDs are used for associating different branches of the same PMP PVC call to its root There may be up to 895 Trunk IDs on each module that holds roots of PMP PVC calls By default no Trunk IDs are defined Refer to Chapter 7 Managing Module Hardware for instructions on how to change that definition For PMP PVC calls the optional traffic descriptor parameter indicates the traffic on the forwarding direction i e from the root to the branches The backward reverse direction is always zero To set up a PMP PVC between ports on different modules on the same switch you must type the command on the CLI of each module The order of the VCLs should NOT switch places The root VCL is the first and the branch VCLs come second The command described below will setup a VCL on each lt slot port vpi vci gt and a PMP PVC connection joins the root to its branches The PMP PVC connection will be automatically assigned an id Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 103 Chapter 8 Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs Traffic descriptor does not have to be specified If they are not UBR traffic
107. LEC is connected to or make sure it can communicate with that ELAN Set the IP address of the M770 ATM Switch management LEC and make sure the management station is either on the same subnet or can communicate with that subnet If the management station and management LEC are on different subnets set the default gateway on the M770 ATM Switch so it can communicate with the management station Make sure you know the SNMP community name for both read and write access Operate the Avaya M770 ATM Switch Manager on your management station as part of the CajunView package The Avaya M770 ATM Switch Manager enables you to view the device check the status indicators from the management station and perform a range of management tasks For more information about Avaya M770 ATM Switch Manager refer to the Avaya M770 ATM Switch Manager User Guide Setup Procedures on an Avaya M770 ATM Switch To install an M770 ATM Switch successfully do the following To access and manage an M770 ATM Switch remotely an IP address must be assigned to the switch For more information on setting up an IP address on an M770 ATM Switch see Setting the IP address on page 11 To access an attached device or switch set up static routing entries to switches that do not support PNNI and to any attached devices that do not support ILMI For more information on setting up a routing table on an M770 ATM Switch see Chapter 9 Managing Static Routing To enable
108. M network using LANE must have one active LECS that acts as a central coordinator making sure that all LECs join the correct ELANs even though there may be a number of resilient standby LECS Each ATM module can host the LECS locally or look for a remote LECS A remote LECS can be in another module switch or in an end station such as a NetWare server The LECS type can be configured as a e Local Simple LECS This will force all local LECs to use the local LECS in the M770 ATM Switch e Local Resilient LECS This resilient LECS will enter the election and will need to be elected to become the active elected LECS If the resilient LECS is not elected it will become a standby LECS For more information about the election process see Proprietary resilient LECS in Chapter 13 LANE Services e Remote LECS This will force all local LECs to use a remote LECS in the network Advertised address of a LECS You can specify the address that the LECS will be advertising By default on the M770 ATM Switch the management LEC and LES BUS will seek a remote LECS at the WKA For information on how to change the location of the LECS see Changing the location of the LECS later in this chapter A local LECS in a M770 ATM Switch can be configured to advertise one of the following addresses e The WKA Well Known Address The ATM Forum defines this address as 47 00 79 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 A0 3E 00 00 01 00 e The 19 byte module address and
109. M will provide some protocol checks during transfer whereas the serial download provides no check on the data transfer The following sequence shows you how to download a software image over XMODEM 1 Connect the serial cable to the serial interface port For more information about the default settings and pin out of the serial port see the Modules Installation Guides 2 Enterthe system download xmodem command Command M15 155s8 gt system download xmodem Example M15 155s8 gt system download xmodem After you press ENTER the M770 ATM Switch will wait for data on the selected serial interface port and transmission baud rate will default to 9600 3 Start the transmission on the serial link Note Set up of new calls has priority over the XMODEM download so on a busy network it may be necessary to disconnect the M770 ATM Switch from the network in order to achieve a successful download via the bootloader Downloading over serial interface You can only download a software image over the serial interface To download over serial interface use the following steps 1 Connect the cable to the serial interface port to download the software image 2 Enterthe system download serial command Command M15 155s8 gt system download serial lt baud_rate gt Example M15 155s8 gt system download serial 9600 Parameter lt baud_rate gt The default baud rate is 9600 The highest baud rate that is supported is 38400 After you pre
110. MAX Frame Size saori Brees a A a AE ve e AE ais E E 209 Chapter 16 Managing an ELAN sess cc seiversie cot a ie e a a tees 211 ELAN Database Maintenance ccccccccessecsssecsseceseecsscecseceseecsscecseeseeesaeeeaees 211 Viewing Default ELANS c ccc cece ee necssecenenenesesseenenenesesens 211 Listing all ELANs known to the local LECS 0 0 212 Creating a New ELAN sis cnecsciseteicnes geese clin Batiste cece antes 212 Deleting an ELAN 0 sscccscctietscecicticstissecttestietovasdsteocteistiieecvediaakiececteenbects 213 Retiamingan ELAN ssissssssssssssactzigssassovesonscnatcs sat intgocedasoeterasins inayotestocs 214 Changing the Operating Mode of an ELAN cccecceeeceteteteteeeeees 214 Changing the Automatic Registration Mode of an ELAN 215 Changing the Security of an ELAN oo eects cee eeeeeenes 216 Managing ELAN CHEN Sisenna asias 217 Creating an ELAN client mapping s s ssssssssissssssisssssessersessesssesesees 219 Displaying ELAN Client Mappings s ssssssssesississesresiestesessesses 221 Deleting ELAN client mappings sessssssssssessersiesississesseesiesessssssesees 222 Changing the Formula for LES address that a LEC will call 222 Changing the Maximum Number of LESes in an ELAN 223 LANE 20 Capability sicccetia denise ae eet is tices t aed ats 224 MAX Frame Size sss scas csedescnss ccs snbeaback aaa aa aiarad aauina iaaii 225 Chapter 17 Managing System Commands s sssssss
111. MIN 270047153 9 1 7 6 3 7 1 pt UP The pvp show command displays the information described in Table 8 3 Table 8 3 Output from the pvp show command Field Description ID Unique identifier for the PVP connection assigned by the switch VPL1 One VPL for a PVP connection VPL2 The second VPL for a PVP connection FWD TD Traffic descriptor for the forwarding direction from VPL1 to VPL2 REV TD Traffic descriptor for the reverse direction VPL2 to VPL1 Admin The management state of the PVP connection Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 111 Chapter 8 Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs Disabling a PVP connection To temporarily disable an established PVP connection use the pvp disable command Command 15 155s8 gt pvp disable lt pvp id gt Example M15 155s8 gt pvp disable enable 270047153 Parameters lt pvp id gt PVP connection index Enabling a PVP connection To enable an established PVP connection use the pvp enable command Command M 15 155s8 gt pvp enable lt pvp id gt Example M15 155s8 gt pvp enable 270047153 Parameters lt pvp id gt PVP connection index Listing all the VPLs To list all the VPLs use the pvp vpl show command Command M15 155s8 gt pvp vpl show Output VPL X CONNECT ID FWD TD REV TD STATE l 62307 270047153 1 1 UP l l Deke 270047513 1 a UP l l The pvp vpl show command displays the informati
112. MPLETE Number of RELEASE_COMPLETE message received for an unknown call Reference this is included in the atmSigDetectMsgErrors AToM MIB object Timer Expired for signals Local timers expired list sorted by type Restart Ack Mismatches Count of received ATG_RESTART_ACKNOWLEDGEs with restart_class vpci or vci that do not match those on the outgoing ATG_RESTART Setup Retransmissions Number of SETUP retransmissions sent and received Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Table 6 6 All protocol statistics displayed by the vport sig stats all command Field Description QSAAL Statistics SSC SSCOP Statistics BEGIN e Tx Rx Number of Begin PDUs transmitted and received Retr Tx Retr Rx Number of Begin PDUs retransmissions transmitted and received e Ack Tx Ack Rx Number of Begin PDUs acknowledgements transmitted and received Rej Rx Rej Tx Number of Begin PDUs rejections received and transmitted RESYN The fields for Resynchronization PDUs are the same as for the Begin PDUs except that the rejection count fields are not used E REC The fields for Error Recovery PDUs are the same as for the Begin PDUs except that the rejection count fields are not used END The fields for End PDUs are the same as for the Begin PDUs except that the rejection count fields are not used POLL The number of POLL PDUs that were receiv
113. Management LEC will join for example to elan1 type the following command M15 155s8 gt lane lec elan elanl After changing the E LAN for the management LEC to join you must restart the management LEC by typing M15 155s8 gt lane lec restart To check with which ELAN the management LEC is currently registered type M15 155s8 gt lane lec show Support for LUNI 2 0 From M770 ATM Switch embedded S W Version 2 1 and higher the LES supports LUNI 2 0 The first LES registered to an ELAN determines the LUNI 2 0 capability of the entire ELAN A LUNI 1 0 client LEC can still register to a LUNI 2 0 server LES since the LUNI 2 0 LES can send LUNI 1 0 frames However a LUNI 2 0 client cannot register to a LUNI 1 0 server Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 19 Chapter 2 Getting Started 20 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface This chapter explains how to get management access to the Avaya M770 ATM Switch command line interface and how to use the command line interface to manage the switch Getting Connected You can access the Avaya M770 ATM Switch command line interface by one of the following methods e Direct connection to an ATM module using a serial interface using a VT100 terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program For information about the serial interface refer to the module s Installation Guides e Telnet connection using a standard
114. N to use when a LEC does not specify the ELAN If you want to remove a default ELAN name enter none Viewing ATM Forum compliant statistics for the LECS If the LECS is local then you can view the ATM Forum compliant statistics that have been gathered for the LECS These statistics are continuously being monitored and updated To view the ATM Forum compliant statistics for the local LECS use the lane lecs stats command Command M15 155s8 gt lane lecs stats Output control packets in 14039 successful config requests 12651 malformed config requests 0 invalid config request parameters 952 rejected due to insufficient resources 0 rejected due to security restrictions 0 rejected because LECID is not zero 0 rejected due to invalid LAN destination 0 rejected due to invalid ATM address 0 rejected because Client is not recognized 0 rejected due to conflicting parameters 0 rejected due to insufficient info 836 198 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 15 Managing the LES BUS This chapter describes how to use the command line interface to manage the LES BUS in an Avaya M770 ATM Switch For information about how to access and use the Avaya M770 ATM Switch command line interface see Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface Creating a new LES Each Avaya M770 module can provide up to 16 combined LES BUS If the LECS is hosted in an Avaya M770 then an Avaya LES will use a proprietary automatic LE
115. NI interface administrative weight 148 Set PNNI interfaces to default values ccccceeseeseeteetees 148 PNNELGVelS soonest nities coin ta eds eee ote aed eee 148 Showing PNNI Node Level cccceccccceeeseeseeesee cece 148 Setting PNNI Node Level cccccccessesesesssessseseseenesesesees 149 Setting PNNI Node Level to the Default Value 149 PNNENOd UD ronson ore e nin e aaeei aee wets 150 Showing PNNI node ID s sssssssssssessssssssiesisstessesnssiesressesneneeeness 150 Setting PNNI node ID ou iiien ei 150 Setting PNNI node ID to default value occ 150 PNNI Operational Status cccccc cece cesses cseeeeseececesensnesesenees 151 PNNI Peer Group ID oe ececesssseesceeseeeeesseseecsseeeesecneseseessseenesseeensees 151 Showing PNNI peer group ID oo cccceeeseseseeeteeeeseees 151 Setting PNNI peer group ID oo ceeecseseessseseteseeseeceeseeeeees 152 Setting PNNI peer group ID to default value oc 152 PNNIPGLE Parameters rearen patayan aie aAa EAS EEEE SLEA 152 Showing PNNI PGLE parameters s ss sesssesssessesiessissessesreeress 153 Set PNNI PGLE parameters to default values 0054 153 Set PNNI PGLE Parameter ccccccccccccscccessececescecesseseeeaes 153 PNNI Restricted Transit Flag cccccccc cesses ee ceeeeeeeeeneeenenes 154 Showing PNNI node restrict transit flag cece 154 Setting PNNI node restrict transit flag cee eee 154 Setting PNNI node restrict tran
116. PVC connection lt gt Transmit Receive Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Figure 8 1 shows a PVC consisting of two VCLs that span three switches A VCL is a bi directional link between two entities such as two switches or a switch and an end station With respect to switch 2 VCL A is identified by specifying the physical port port B and the VPI VCI used at that port Similarly with respect to switch 1 VCL A is identified by specifying the physical port port A and the VPI VCI used at that port Note that the VPI VCI in the same switch is the same at both ports The PVC connection could be between 2 ports on the same module or between 2 modules on the same switch through the backplane This means that port B and port C can be on one module or on 2 different modules on the same switch Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 101 Chapter 8 Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs Note Before you attempt to set up a PVC you will need to reduce the signalling VCI range for a virtual port that is used for SVCs Do not use a VCI in the range 0 31 as these are reserved by the ATM Forum To reduce the VCI range see Setting Virtual Port Parameters in Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Since a VCL is bi directional a traffic descriptor needs to be defined for the transmit and receive data paths belonging to the VCL For VCL A the traffic descriptor for the receive data path at port B should be the same as the traffic de
117. S PCVS LESS that are not displayed for far end fe counter information To display DS3 counter information for all near end DS3 physical ports in all intervals use the pport show ds3counters ne interval command Command Output M4 DS3s8 gt pport show ds3counters ne interval Link near end interval counters for port 8 1 Intvl PESS PSES UASS LCVS PCVS LESS CCVS CESS CSES S S l 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Link near end interval counters for port 8 2 Intvl PESS PSES UASS LCVS PCVS LESS CCVS CESS CSES S S 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 46 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 5 Managing Physical Ports Link near end interval counters for port 8 3 Intvl PESS PSES UASS LCVS PCVS LESS CCVS CESS CSES S ie e O A S 0 0 0 0 0 A ASD S CS SSS aes ED oe oo Se SS Oo oS ma 2 G hE oo o gt te SS Oo OO Or 3S SO Se SO ol Link near end interval counters for port 8 4 Intvl PESS PSES UASS LCVS PCVS LESS CCVS CESS CSES S S 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 To display far end DS3 counter information for a specific DS3 physical port for example port 8 3 use the pport show ds3counters fe interval pport id command Command 4 DS3s8 gt pport show ds3counters fe int
118. S address determination method to register with the LECS For more information about the proprietary method and different types of LES modes supported see in Chapter 13 LANE Services When creating a new LES you should note the following e If the LECS is hosted in a non Avaya device the LES mode should be set to manual Note If the LES mode is set to manual and you move the LES then you will need to manually re configure the LECS to find the LES Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 199 Chapter 15 Managing the LES BUS To create a new LES in the switch use the lane les create command For definitions of the various LES modes see changing the LES registration mode later in this chapter Command M15 155s8 gt lane les create lt elan name gt lt mode gt lt type gt lt les selector gt lt bus selector gt Example M15 155s8 gt lane les create marketing_eth distributed ethernet 82 83 Parameters lt elan name gt lt mode gt lt type gt lt les selector gt lt bus selector gt Enter the name of the ELAN that the new LES will hos The ELAN name should be unique within the ATM network This parameter is case sensitive Enter the mode type as either distributed standby or manual See above explanation for correct mode usage distributed automatic registration for distributed LESes standby automatic registration with standby support manu
119. S table and a LES BUS pair must be defined for the ELAN To create an ELAN named elan1 you need to first define an entry for elan1 in the LECS table typing the following command at the module which holds the LECS M15 155s8 gt lane elan create elanl auto ethernet After all of the ELANs have been defined in the ELAN database you need to change the priority of the LECS to a priority higher than 0 so that it can participate in the LECS election If you will be using more than one resilient LECS configure one of the LECS to have a higher priority to the others using the following command this example changes the LECS priority to 200 M15 155s8 gt lane lecs priority 200 Then you need to define a distributed LES BUS for elan1 To create a LES BUS that will use the selectors al and b1 for their ATM addresses type the following command M15 155s8 gt lane les create elanl distributed ethernet al bl To Check if the LES registered its address with the LECS type M15 155s8 gt lane elan show To check if any Clients registered with the LES elan1 type M15 155s8 gt lane les show 18 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 2 Getting Started 4 In order to manage the M770 ATM Switch the Management LEC must register with the same ELAN as the NMS or there should be a router between the ELANs By default the Management LEC is configured to join the Ethernet ELAN default If you want to change the ELAN which the
120. Sonet Oset SES 065535 Port Cell Payload Media Media Last Id Mode Scrambling Type Mode Change 8 0 Unassigned On s55 UP ok Unassigned On MMF LRDI 0700 00715 0 8 2 Unassigned On MMF UP 0 00 00 54 4 8 3 Unassigned On MMF LRDI 0 00 00 22 8 8 4 Unassigned On MMF UP 0 00 00 63 4 8 11 Unassigned On MMF UP 0 00 00 06 7 8 12 Unassigned On MMF UP 0 00 00 12 1 8 13 Unassigned On MMF UP 0200200 30 1 8 14 Unassigned On MMF UP O 00 00 19 9 8 15 Unassigned On MMF UP 0 00 00 27 4 8 16 Unassigned Off Note In the Table above Port 0 is the CPU port and Port 16 is the Backplane port Note When you enter M4 DS3s8 gt pport show for the DS3 module you will see all of the parameters displayed in the Table above with information at the bottom of the table for several additional Physical Port parameters displayed only for DS3 modules See the Table below 40 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 5 Managing Physical Ports Command M4 DS3s8 gt pport show Output Physical Port Information Port Cell Line Cable Tx Loop Id Mapping Code Length Clock Back 8 0 Soe a sox 8 1 PLCP B8ZS gt 225 feet Local None 8 2 ADM B8ZS 0 225 feet Local None 8 3 ADM B8ZS 0 225 feet Local None 8 4 PLCP B8ZS 0 225 feet Local None 8 5 soe ses ae aS Note In the Table above Port 0 is the CPU port and Port 5 is the Backplane port The pport show command displays the information described in Table 5 1
121. TM Switch User s Guide Chapter 11 Managing the Management LEC This chapter describes how to use the command line interface to manage the management LEC in an Avaya M770 ATM Switch For information about how to access and use the command line interface see Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface Avaya M770 LANE services The Avaya M770 can host multiple LANE Servers LECS LES and BUS in addition to one management LEC For a list of all the M770 ATM Switch default LANE services settings see Appendix A Default Settings ona New Avaya M770 ATM Switch For information on how to manage the LANE services in an Avaya M770 see the LANE Chapters in this manual Configuring the Management LEC The M770 ATM Switch has one management LEC for managing the M770 ATM Switch It supports several high level protocols such as e Telnet for a command line interface e UDP for SNMP management and TFTP software upgrades e BOOTP for obtaining M770 ATM Switch s IP address from a server e ICMP for PING inward and outward for IP network configuration diagnosis The management LEC resides on the module elected as the Master Agent For information on Master Agent see Chapter 1 Introduction By default the M770 ATM Switch management LEC uses the Burnt In Address BIA of the Master Agent as its MAC address This address can be overridden and a Locally Administered Address LAA can be assigned The management LEC will re
122. The PNNI s Peer Group Leader Election protocol will determine the active PGL 5 Repeat the steps 3 amp 4 until all peer groups of all switches are organized in the hierarchy 6 Decide the level scopes of the different level in the range of 1 104 A lower level should have a greater number Note In the CLI levels are numbered 1 2 3 where 1 indicates the lower level the physical level in which the node resides 2 indicates the next level in the hierarchy and so on 7 Determine the switches prefixes so they will match the organization into peer groups and the specified levels There is an algorithm that can help you in determining the prefixes to match the hierarchy see Appendix e Configure all switches ATM Address prefixes as determine in step 7 and force their node IDs to match the prefix The configuration is done on the Master Agent using the command M15 155s8 gt address prefix lt prefix gt node_id 14 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 2 Getting Started e For the switches that are capable of becoming PGLs as determine in step 4 do the following 1 Configure the level scope as determine in step 6 for all levels 1 5 using the command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config level set lt level 1 5 gt lt level scope 1 104 gt 2 Configure the leadership priority of the node in the lower level to a value greater than 0 M15 155s8 gt route pnni config pgle set lt level x 1
123. This enables you to configure the LANE services on a switch that is hosting a resilient LECS without the possibility of the LECS becoming active Changing the priority of a LECS will trigger a new election process and the LECS with the highest priority will be elected If two or more LECSes have the same priority level then the LECS with the higher ATM address will be elected Note If the network is recovering from a network failure the election process is different The resilient LECS with the highest up time will remain the active LECS This is to minimize network disruption To change the priority of the local LECS use the lane lecs priority command Command M15 155s8 gt lane lecs priority lt priority gt Parameters lt priority gt Indicates the level of priority assigned to the resilient LECS during the election process 0 LECS candidate is not available for election 1 Lowest priority that can be assigned to a LECS 128 Default priority assigned to a LECS 255 Highest priority that can be assigned to a LECS This will guarantee that the LECS will be elected Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 193 Chapter 14 Managing the LECS Managing Resilient LECS Candidates Note If you are not planning to use PNNI routing or want the M770 ATM Switch switches in the third party environments to host a resilient LECS contact Avaya Technical Support They can provide you with further information on what
124. This will display the link status information for all of the virtual ports on a module For more information see Listing the status information for all virtual ports later in this chapter This will display the VPI and signalling VCI ranges for all of the virtual ports on a module For more information see Listing the VPI and VCI range information for all virtual ports later in this chapter Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 55 Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports To view information about all virtual ports use the vport show command Command Output M15 155s8 gt vport show Virtual Port Information Virtual AdminOperStackUserQ SAALVPISig VCIILMI Port Id StateStateType NetStateRangeRangeState O O O O MO MW MO WW MO OW MO WM Oo ODAIADHOBWNHEO DDNDDDDDDDDADHDADAUBAWNHEO ooo ooo mononomo qaancqaqqqaqacqacaqaacacgcagaaacaqaaaaaagaag DMIDUNUBWNFODODCVC0OAG io q 10 U LLU 12U LIU 14 U pUp InternalUserUp 0 pDown UNI 3 0NetDown 0 pDown PNNI 1NetDown 0 pDown PNNI 1NetDown 0 pDown PNNI 1NetDown 0 pDown PNNI 1NetDown 0 pDown PNNI 1NetDown 0 pDown PNNI 1NetDown 0 pDown PNNI 1NetDown 0 pUp UNI 3 1 NetUp 0 pDown PNNI 1NetDown 0 pDown PNNI 1NetDown 0 pDown PNNI 1NetDown 0 pDown PNNI 1NetDown 0 pDown PNNI 1NetDown 0 pDown PNNI 1NetDown 0 pUp PNNI 1 User Up 0 pDown PNNI 1NetDown 1 pDown PNNI 1NetDown 2 pDown PNNI 1NetDo
125. Tx Discards The number of transmitted cells that have been discarded Rx Discards The number of received cells that have been discarded Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 43 Chapter 5 Managing Physical Ports Table 5 2 Output from the pport show counters command Field Description Rx Errors The number of cell errors that have been received through the physical port Displaying counter information for DS3 physical ports You can view counter information specific only to DS3 modules by entering the command pport show ds3counters The information this command displays will not appear when you enter the command pport show counters DS3 Counter information is accumulated in 15 minute completed intervals for the last 24 hours the system was up Fewer than 96 intervals of information will be available if the module has been restarted within the last 24 hours There are 96 15 minute intervals numbered 1 96 with interval 0 always the current interval interval 1 the interval most recently completed and interval 96 the earliest possible interval As soon as the current 15 minute interval ends a new current interval 0 starts The pport show ds3counters current command displays counter information only for the current interval The pport show ds3counters interval command displays a historical record of the counters for the completed intervals up to 96 completed intervals during the last 24 hours th
126. Type Trunk z sail as Id 27000042 9 2 0 801 9 260 302 UP UP P2P N A 2 27000045 2 15 0 803 9 2 0 803 UP UP P2MP 2 200 6 27000045 9 2 0 803 9 2 0 804 UP UP P2MP 2 200 6 The pvc connection show command displays the information described in Table 8 1 Table 8 1 Output from the pvc connection show command Field Description ID Unique identifier for the PVC connection assigned by the switch VCL1 The transmitting VCLs for a PVC connection VCL2 The receiving VCLs for a PVC connection Admin The management state of the PVC connection e Ifthe state is UP then this PVC connection is enabled e Ifthe state is DOWN then this PVC connection is disabled This will occur if you have disabled the PVC connection using the command line interface Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 105 Chapter 8 Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs Table 8 1 Output from the pvc connection show command Field Description Oper The operational state of the PVC connection e If the state is UP then this PVC is functional e Ifthe state is DOWN then this PVC is not functional This may be because either the PVC is disabled or a port on this switch used by the PVC is down Type Indicates whether this is a Point to Point PVC PP or a Point to Multipoint P2MP PVC Trunkld The trunk id that is used by the PMP call New branch
127. UP indicates that the route is functional DOWN indicates that the route is non functional This could be because the port is down or disabled by the user Origin The origin of the routing entry Static The routing entry has been manually entered ILMI The routing entry has been learned using ILMI Such entries are added by the M770 ATM Switch for end stations that are attached to it and are using the ILMI protocol Internal The routing entry was added by an entity that is internal to the switch for example by LANE services Scope The UNI scope with which this address was registered The UNI scope is translated to PNNI advertisement scope according to Table 9 1 The PNNI level indicates the hierarchy scope up to which the address is advertised The default UNI scope is 15 the address is advertised throughout the entire PNNI domain Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 121 Chapter 9 Managing Static Routing 122 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing This chapter describes how to use the command line interface to manage the PNNI routing in an Avaya M770 ATM Switch For information about how to access and use the Avaya M770 ATM Switch command line interface see Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface PNNI Private Network Network Interface The description in this chapter assumes basic knowledge of the PNNI protocol For more information regarding the
128. Use the following command to show the configured PNNI summary table Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config summary show lt level gt Examples Summary Type internal Len 104 bits Prefix 39 84 0f 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 60 00 Suppress false State advertising RowStatus active Local Ra Len Prefix Summary Type internal Len 104 bits Prefix 39 84 0f 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 78 00 Suppress false State advertising RowStatus active Local Ra Len Prefix 152 39 84 0f 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 78 00 00 00 6 00 00 40 152 39 84 0f 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 78 00 00 00 6 00 00 60 152 39 84 0f 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 78 00 00 40 0d 63 01 7 PNNI specification defines that each PNNI node advertises the addresses that are locally connected to it Since it is not scalable that each node would advertise all of its local RAs PNNI defines a way that the node advertises only summaries of addresses For lowest level node the ATM address of a switch is the switch default summary as all directly connected hosts and edge devices that use ILMI for address registration get the switch prefix as the prefix to their address For lowest level node the address prefix of the switch is the default summary Note In a well configured network the switches prefixes will be organized D according to their peer groups This way the default summaries on the default level will match the ATM prefixes of the switches See Appendix G
129. User s Guide AVAYA M770 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ATM SWITCH SOFTWARE VERSION 2 3 Catalog No 130075 Rev C October 2001 AVAYA Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 List of Commands in the Command line Interface 00 0 ce eeseeeseeeeteeeeeeeee I TTPO GUC Of ies s5sze535 cesses Bed eeais oades gee deans since oats Tosees Last aenbuniagescasdewh ses ctacehcetss 1 About the Avaya M770 ATM SWitch ccccccscesteeesesteteescenesesesesneeneeceees 1 Master Agent and Sub Agent cccccccccscesssessetetescececesesssnensesssnsneneseseees 2 Related Documents carnis arn a E E anaa ea a coeadiond 2 Supported Modules sise beaketdeespeseotscsasebechditevetesuastevierestndesderstectes 2 Features Lispo ercer ea iie ee RAR Ae POR ek 3 Hardware Features ccccccsccessecsscsssccssscesseceseecsseesecesseeeeaeceseecsseeeneecsee 3 M15 155F SF MS module features cccccscessessceseeseceeeeeeees 3 M3 622F SF module features cccccceeccsesssccesssssessessesseseesees 3 M4 DS3 module features ccecccceessessesecsseesecsscesseeseeseeeeseeeees 3 Software Features cccccscccssccsscecsecesscessecessecesceessceessesseceseeceseecseeesecees 4 Supported Standards smen issiasiiiiisr snti ei einek E en rosene rE Ria 6 Operational Standards ss ssssseesesssessessessestestessessestenrissesneneensess 6 ATM Forum Standards cccccccccccsessessecssessecsseesecseceseeeceseeeeseseees 7 Gett
130. User s Guide 99 Chapter 7 Managing Module Hardware Note T least one VPI has to be reserved for the signalling VPC After the next reboot the VPC VPI configuration would look like this Command M15 155s8 gt hardware vpcvpirange Output Configured VPC VPI 6 7 range Current VPC VPI range bsa T At this point the user can configure Permanent Virtual Paths PVPs For more details about PVPs please refer to Chapter 8 Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs 100 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 8 Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs This chapter describes how to use the command line interface to manage PVC connections in an Avaya M770 ATM Switch For information about how to access and use the Avaya M770 ATM Switch command line interface see Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface Managing Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs Managing PVC connections Not all ATM equipment currently supports UNI signalling Therefore you may need to manually establish a virtual circuit to make a connection between two ATM endpoints over an ATM network These connections are referred to as Permanent Virtual Circuits PVCs A PVC is a concatenation of Virtual Circuit Links VCLs where each VCL is bi directional Figure 8 1 illustrates the terms VCL and PVC Figure 8 1 A breakdown of a PVC connection Port A Port B Port C Port D Transmit Transmit
131. a specific selector Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 189 Chapter 14 Managing the LECS If the M770 ATM Switch is looking for a remote LECS then it can be configured to use a LECS that is advertising one of the following addresses e TheWKA e A specific ATM address on the network e The address of an elected M770 ATM Switch resilient LECS Viewing the Location of the LECS You can view the current location of the active LECS on the network Note The output display from the following command will depend on the current location of the active LECS To view the location of the LECS use the lane lecs location command Command M15 155s8 gt lane lecs location e Ifthe switch is using its own simple LECS then the following output will be displayed Output There is a local simple LECS It is advertising the ATM Forum Well Known Address Local LECS clients will use the local LECS e Ifthe switch is using LECS redundancy and the local resilient LECS is on standby then the following output will be displayed Output The local resilient LECS is on standby It will advertise 39 84 0F 80 01 BC 61 DF 00 24 24 24 00 24 24 24 24 24 24 30 The elected LECS is at NSAP 39 84 0F 80 01 BC 61 DF 00 A4 A4 A4 00 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 30 e Ifthe switch is looking for a remote LECS then the following output will be displayed Output There is no local LECS Local LECS clients will use the LECS at the ATM Forum well known addres
132. able the PNNI summary address prefix To disable PNNI summary address prefix use the following command Note When a PNNI summary address is disabled summary show State inactive and RowStatus notInService Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config summary disable lt type gt lt prefix gt lt len gt lt level gt Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 157 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing lt type gt lt prefix gt lt length gt lt level gt Examples I nternal or E xterior The ATM address prefix Each octes isin hex and is separated by a length of the prefix in bits 0 152 Internal level number 1 is the lowest physical node disable I 39 84 0 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 60 00 104 1 lt type gt lt prefix gt lt length gt lt level gt Remove the PNNI summary address prefix To remove the PNNI summary address prefix use the following command Command Parameters Examples M15 155s8 gt route pnni config summary remove lt type gt lt prefix gt lt len gt lt level gt lt type gt I nternal or E xterior lt prefix gt The Atm address prefix each octet is in hex and separate with lt length gt length of the prefix in bits 0 152 lt level gt Internal level number 1 is the lowest physical node set I 39 84 0f 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 60 00 104 1 Set the PNNI summary table to the default Use the following command to set the PNNI summary t
133. able to its default values For lowest level node it is the switch s ATM prefixs For higher level nodes it s the switch prefix where its length in bits is equal to the level where it resides Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config summary default lt level gt 158 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing PNNI SVCC timers In hierarchical configuration of PNNI after each peer group elects a PGL and the Uplinks to remote Upnodes are advertised within the peer group LGNs try to open connections between themselves for passing PNNI control information These connections are called SVC based RCC since they are used as Routing Control Channel There are special timers that are used when the SVCCs Switched Virtual Channel Connections are set and maintain These timers are handled in this submenu Showing PNNI SVCC timers Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config svcc show lt level gt Output Svcc Table Level 1 Name Index Current Default Value Value Range Init Time aL 4 4 1 30 Retry Time 2 30 30 dos 300 Calling Integ 3 35 35 I Time 300 Called Integ 4 50 50 T Time 400 Set PNNI SVCC timers to default values Use the following command to set the PNNI node SVCC timers to their default values Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config svcc default lt level gt lt index all gt Parameters lt level gt internal PNNI level number 1 is the physical node lt index gt
134. al manual registration Enter the type of LES ELAN as ethernet Enter the 1 or 2 digit hexadecimal ATM selector for the LES Enter the 1 or 2 digit hexadecimal ATM selector for the associated BUS functions Note Each selector entered when creating a LES must be unique on the switch You can use the lane les show command to view a list of all selectors currently in use Selectors 7f 80 and 81 are reserved for special use and cannot be used for the LES or BUS Note The LES name should be the same as the hosted ELAN name Note Avaya strongly recommends that you use distributed LES BUS services instead of resilient 200 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 15 Managing the LES BUS Deleting a LES To delete a LES use the lane les delete command Command M15 155s8 gt lane les delete lt elan name gt Example M15 155s8 gt lane les delete marketing_eth This will force all attached LECs off the ELAN do you want to continue Y N Yy Done Note The above command will take immediate effect The command must be used with care as all LECs will be thrown off the ELAN hosted by the LES Viewing all LESes To list all the LESs currently held in the ATM modules database use the lane les show command Command Output M15 155s8 gt lane les show Selectors Name Type EnabledLESBUSClients default Ethernet Yes 05 06 3 List of all selectors now in
135. al switch for example the LECS address as appears in the above example 140 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Local Switch Uplinks This command displays all PNNI uplinks that were advertised by any module in the switch Uplinks are advertised for Outside links links to other peer groups that their Hello protocol had reached the final state of commonOutside Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni local switch link Output Node Id 38 A0 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 16 00 Aggregation Token 0 Uplink Port 02 04 00 00 gt Node Id 30 00 39 04 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 16 00 lt Node Id 38 A0 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 16 00 Aggregation Token 0 Uplink Port 09 13 00 00 gt Node Id 30 38 39 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 F6 00 00 09 00 lt Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 141 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing PNNI Configuration Commands In Hierarchical PNNI there is a need to configure the nodes separately on different levels Therefore there is an additional parameter to indicate the level that is currently being configured You may omit this parameter for the configuration show commands In this case the command would refer to all levels Showing all PNNI configured variables To show important 1 level PNNI variables use the following command Command M
136. an attached device or switch to communicate you may need to configure ports For more information on configuring ports on an M770 ATM Switch see ATM Port Configuration on page 12 To enable communication over the network LAN Emulation must be set up on the switch For more information on setting up LAN Emulation on an M770 ATM Switch see Setting up LAN Emulation on page 16 10 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 2 Getting Started Setting the IP address To access and manage an M770 ATM Switch remotely for example using Telnet or SNMP an IP address must be set for the switch You will need to decide whether the M770 ATM Switch will use BOOTP to acquire its IP address or whether you wish to set it manually If you plan to use BOOTP make sure a BOOTP server is on the same ELAN as the M770 ATM Switch management LEC or there is a route from a BOOTP server to the ELAN For more information about managing the Management LEC see Chapter 11 You will need to set the IP address of the M770 ATM Switch to BOOTP this is the default IP setting for anew M770 ATM Switch The M770 ATM Switch will then attempt to learn its IP address using the BOOTP protocol If you plan to set the IP address manually first ensure that the terminal or terminal emulator is connected to the serial interface of the Master Agent The IP address of the switch can only be seen on the Master Agent the Master Agent module s NMA LED
137. and M15 155s8 gt lane elan client create atm lt address value gt lt address mask gt lt ELAN name gt Example 1 The following example shows how to map a specific LEC to the ELAN accounts_elan M15 155s8 gt lane elan client create atm 39 84 0F 80 01 BC 61 DF 00 07 80 20 00 00 00 6F 07 80 20 00 accounts_elan This example shows how to map all LECs whose addresses begin with a specific prefix to the ELAN accounts_elan Example 2 M15 155s8 gt lane elan client create atm 39 84 0F 80 01 BC 61 DF 00 07 80 20 00 13 accounts_elan Parameters lt address The full 20 byte ATM address value gt lt address mask gt The portion of the lt address value gt that needs to match the LEC s ATM address for the mapping to apply The lt address mask gt is either entered as a number for example 15 indicates that the first 15 bytes of the lt address value gt is to be masked or you can use FF to indicate the byte of the lt address value gt that is to be masked and 00 to indicate the byte of the lt address value gt that is not masked When using the mask as a number note that the number of bytes entered in the address value should be limited to this number lt ELAN name gt The name of the ELAN known to the LECS Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 219 Chapter 16 Managing an ELAN To create a new client mapping fora LEC MAC address use the lane elan client create mac command Command 15 155s8 gt lane elan client create
138. andidate 0 0 194 Creating a resilient LECS election candidate ccc eee 195 Deleting a resilient LECS election candidate 0 0 eee 196 Specified ELAN Defaults in the LECS oc eeceeeeeneneenenseeeene 197 viii Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Contents Viewing default ELANS sireisas egi a 197 Specifying default ELANS c ccc cesec eee csceeeseececsceseneneneeenenes 198 Viewing ATM Forum compliant statistics for the LECS 198 Chapter 15 Managing the LES BUS cccccccssseseses cs ccesescscsssesescscscsssnseececssensnsneseeenes 199 Creating a NeW LES si is iodain aaner Raaen Esan isione 199 Deleting a LES sivetes ouros dreiet o aa heaire nei stees 201 Viewing all LESES miyen g Sete E E E RER 201 Viewing LECs using a specific LES s ssssssssssssssissessssssessestersissesses 203 Display ATM Forum compliant statistics for a LES ce 204 Enabling or disabling a LES cccccsescsscesssesescseseseseescscsesneseeeeenes 204 Restarting a local LES and BUS ccceccceceeecceseeseteeceenneceesnees 205 Changing the ELAN name that the LES will host 0 205 Changing the LES registration mode ceeecsesesesseseseseneeeesees 206 Viewing the LES registration mode cccesescceseseetesescseseeeeeeees 207 Listing the peer LESes in a distributed LANE environment 207 Display ATM Forum compliant statistics fora BUS 208 LANE 2 0 Capability ceesre o ae oeei e a a iaeei 208
139. aneous Commands Configuring the Avaya M770 ATM Switch Address Information Setting the Avaya M770 ATM Switch IP address subnet mask and gateway An M770 ATM Switch will need an IP address so that it can be managed remotely You must decide whether the M770 ATM Switch will use BOOTP to acquire its IP address or whether the address must be set manually If you plan to use BOOTP make sure the BOOTP server is on the same ELAN as the M770 ATM Switch management LEC or there is a route from the BOOTP server to the ELAN You will need to set the IP address of the M770 ATM Switch to BOOTP this is the default IP setting for a new M770 ATM Switch The M770 ATM Switch will then attempt to learn its IP address using the BOOTP protocol Note IP address configuration commands will take effect immediately and may disrupt IP traffic for example Telnet or SNMP going to the M770 ATM Switch To set the M770 ATM Switch s IP address and subnet mask enter the ip address command Command M15 155s8 gt ip address lt ip_address gt lt netmask gt Example M15 155s8 gt ip address 192 32 220 61 255 255 255 0 Parameters lt ip_address gt A unique IP address that is to be assigned to the M770 ATM Switch If you set the address to BOOTP the M770 ATM Switch will attempt to learn its IP address using the BOOTP protocol lt netmask gt A valid IP subnet mask 0 0 0 0 indicates that the default subnet mask should be determined from the
140. ardware vpcvpirange 5 Parameters lt minVpcVpi gt Minimum number for Vpc Vpi for all ports on the module Maximum Vpc Vpi is set to maximum Vpi according to vpivcibits set in the command hardware vpivci bits D Note You must reset each module in order for the change to take place After resetting the module you can verify that the VPIs have been reserved for VP switching by typing in the command vport show vpivciranges Define the VPI range to be used for Signaled VPs In step 1 all of the VPIs reserved for VPs are automatically reserved for Signaled VPs Before a VPI may be used for a PVP the signaling VP range on that vport must be limited to prevent this VPI from being used by a Signaled VP There are some rules to remember in defining the range for Signaled VPs 1 At least one of the VPIs defined in Step 1 MUST be reserved for Signaling VPs 2 In defining the range for Signaled VPs the lower bound MUST be the minimum VPI defined in the Step 1 In this example we are using VPIs 6 and 7 so we will limit the signaling VPIs to just VPI 5 This meets the criteria defined above Command M15 155s1 gt vp set sigvpcvpirange lt root vport id gt lt range gt Example 1 Module 1 M15 155s1 gt vport disable 1 1 0 M15 155s1 gt vport disable 1 2 0 M15 155s1 gt vport set sigvpcvpirange 1 1 0 5 5 M15 155s1 gt vport set sigvpcvpirange 1 2 0 5 5 M15 155s1 gt vport enable 1 1 0 M15 155s1 gt vport enable 1 2 0
141. arry out a controlled shutdown of the module in preparation for a power down use the system halt command Command M15 155s8 gt system halt Output This will stop the module losing all connections do you want to continue y n Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 229 Chapter 17 Managing System Commands Taking a snapshot of the current system configuration You can take a snapshot of the current system configuration of your module to produce a backup configuration file or before you carry out a system upgrade This file is saved into the flash directory of the switch To take a snapshot of the current system configuration of the switch use the system snapshot command To re activate the configuration file later use the flash config command Command M15 155s8 gt system snapshot lt filename gt Output M15 155s8 gt system snapshot snap1408 txt Flash and NVwrites stopped Snapshot saved to Configuration file snap1408 txt Note The snapshot command saves all the module s parameters in the same file system wide module specific LANE etc LANE parameters only are automatically saved in the text file config data This file may also be uploaded and downloaded and can be used to copy a LANE configuration from one module to another in the same or another switch After you have downloaded a new config data file you need to reset the module manually using the lt gt reset pushbuttons on the modul
142. as all distributed LESes hosted by the same ELAN You can list the ATM address and LEC id range of all peer LESes that a specified distributed LES knows about To display a list of the peer LESes in a distributed LANE environment use the lane les peers command Command M15 155s8 gt lane les peers lt elan name gt Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 207 Chapter 15 Managing the LES BUS Parameters lt elan name gt The name of the ELAN that currently hosts the distributed LES This parameter is case sensitive Parameters 15 155s8 gt lane les peer M770ElanEth Peer LES ATM address LEC ID Range 39 84 0F 80 01 BC 61 DF 00 07 80 20 00 00 00 6F 07 80 20 01 1 1024 39 84 0F 80 01 BC 61 DF 00 07 80 20 00 00 00 6F 07 80 70 01 1025 2048 Display ATM Forum compliant statistics for a BUS To display the ATM Forum compliant statistics for a BUS use the lane les busstats command Command M15 155s8 gt lane les busstats lt elan name gt Parameters lt elan name gt The ELAN name that hosts the BUS This parameter is case sensitive Example M15 155s8 gt lane les busstats default Output Number of frames discarded due to resource error0 Number of octets that this BUS has received413615667 Number of unicast data frames control frames 591906 Number of multicast frames this BUS has received 1590697 Number of frames dropped by BUS due to time out 0 Number of unsuccessful multicast send connection attempts0 Number
143. ation about how to access and use the Avaya M770 ATM Switch command line interface see Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface e For more information about virtual ports see Virtual Ports in Appendix F Routing and Signalling Concepts Showing Virtual Port Information Listing information about virtual ports You can view information about all of the virtual ports on the M770 ATM Switch When a module is installed in the M770 ATM Switch default virtual ports are created for the ports Each of these default virtual ports is assigned a virtual port id of zero Any virtual port information that is marked with an asterisk has been learned by the M770 ATM Switch during the ILMI dialogue with the remote device Information that is not marked with an asterisk has been either configured by the user or is the default setting for the virtual port To view configuration information about all of the virtual ports use the vport show command with the following parameters Command M15 155s8 gt vport show config status vpivciranges Parameter When no parameter is entered config status vpivciranges This will display the link configuration information about all virtual ports on a module This will display the link configuration information for all of the virtual ports on a module For more information see Listing the link configuration information for all virtual ports later in this chapter
144. ault value lec Note The main purpose of upload command is to save configuration files on a source other than the M770 ATM Switch 228 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 17 Managing System Commands Viewing a list of fatal system exceptions A fatal system exception occurs when the CPU detects an error such as a division by zero or accesses to non existent memory A fatal exception causes the M770 ATM Switch to reboot A breakpoint is a special type of exception which is invoked by the M770 ATM Switch software when it detects an internal inconsistency To dump a list of fatal system exceptions use the system breaklog command Command M15 155s8 gt system breaklog Output Filename ilmaux c Line No 553 pml_time 1234 Abs_time Unknown Stablised Count 0 Reason 0000b024 epc c005dce4 badva c8681734 Note The breaklog provides vital information for diagnosing why the M770 ATM Switch has crashed This information needs to be reported to Avaya Technical Support Clearing the list of fatal system exceptions To clear the list of fatal system exceptions use the system breaklog clear command Command M15 155s8 gt system breaklog clear Controlled shutdown of the module This command is used for a controlled shutdown of a module any connections that still remain on the module will be lost A warning to this effect is displayed and confirmation is requested before the module is powered down To c
145. boot_loader 1 2 0 TEXT 5516 snapshot_config 1 2 do not delete MAIN U 1598440 m770ATM 1 1 7 MAIN C 494710 m770ATM 1 2 0 CONFIG 1024 snapshot_1 2 0 Note A maximum of two main image files and two boot loader files are allowed in flash memory A total of 15 files are allowed including snapshot files Viewing the default image The default image is the software image that will be run when the Avaya M770 boots up To display the default image use the flash default command Command M15 155s8 gt flash default Output The current default boot image is m770ATM Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 245 Chapter 19 Upgrading Avaya M770 ATM Switch Software Changing the main image To change the main image that the M770 ATM Switch will next run use the flash default command Command M15 155s8 gt flash default lt filename gt Example M15 155s8 gt flash default m770ATM 1 2 0 Parameter lt filename gt The name of the image that the M770 ATM Switch will next run Note This command checks the integrity of the selected image therefore it may take a few seconds for the cursor to return Viewing the default boot loader image To view the default boot loader image that the M770 ATM Switch will load use the flash loader command Command 15 155s8 gt flash loader Output The current flash loader boot loader is boot_loader 1 2 5 Changing the default boot loader image To change the default boot loader
146. can set up ELAN client mappings e To enable you to map a LEC from one ELAN to another e To allow only the LECs that match the ELAN client mappings to join a specific secure ELAN For more information about setting up a secure ELAN see Changing the Security of an ELAN earlier in this chapter ELAN client mappings are stored in the local LECS database These mappings tell the LECS to assign a LEC or group of LECs to a specific ELAN In total up to 512 mappings can be stored in the local LECS database An ELAN client mapping allows you to map a LEC or group of LECs to a specific secure ELAN based on one of the following e An ATM address e A MAC address e An alias ELAN name The alias is provided by the LEC in its configuration request to the LECS The alias ELAN mapping maps the ELAN name requested by the LEC to another ELAN This allows the system administrator to change user ELANs at the switch An ATM address or an alias ELAN name mapping usually refer to a group of LECs whereas a MAC address mapping always refers to a specific LEC In this way you can create generic mappings instead of a separate mapping for each and every LEC Figure 16 1 shows how client mappings are used when a LEC sends a request to the LECS to join an ELAN Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 217 Chapter 16 Managing an ELAN Figure 16 1 Flowchart showing how client mapping is used LEC request to LECS to join an ELAN MAC apping
147. ch is invoked by the M770 ATM Switch software when it detects an internal inconsistency To dump a list of fatal system exceptions use the system breaklog command Command M15 155s8 gt system breaklog Output Filename lmaux c Line No 553 pml_time 1234 Abs_time Unknown Stablised Count 0 Reason 0000b024 epc c005dce4 badva c8681734 Note The breaklog provides vital information for diagnosing why the M770 ATM Switch has crashed This information needs to be reported to Avaya Technical Support Clearing the list of fatal system exceptions To clear the list of fatal system exceptions use the system breaklog clear command Command M15 155s8 gt system breaklog clear Running all the hardware tests You can run all the non critical hardware tests on a M770 ATM Switch If all the tests pass the M770 ATM Switch will respond with DONE If a test fails then the BOOT Loader will display the test that has the failed and the M770 ATM Switch LEDs will display the sequence that represents the error For more information about the LED status sequence see the Module Installation Guides To run all hardware tests use the system test command Command M15 155s8 gt system test Output example Done when all tests pass Output example The boot loader SELF TEST failed when there is a failure 280 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Appendix B Using BOOT Loader Downloading over XMODEM Download from XMODE
148. command Command M15 155s8 gt vport reset profile lt vport id gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport reset profile 8 1 0 Parameter lt vport The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt id gt Resetting the stack type parameter Resetting the If you reset the virtual port s stack type parameter the port will re learn the stack type when it is enabled and a remote device is connected For more information about this parameter see Setting the stack type parameter on page 69 Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable a virtual port see Disabling a virtual port on page 65 To reset the stack type parameter for a virtual port use the vport reset stacktype command Command M15 155s8 gt vport reset stacktype lt vport id gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport reset stacktype 8 1 0 Parameter lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt signalling VPC VPI range To reset the VPC VPI range that was previously assigned for Switched Virtual Paths use the following command Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable a virtual port see Disabling a virtual port on page 65 Command M15 155s8 gt vport reset sigvpcvpiran
149. control is Enabled Configured templates Template name accept all Action permit Source NSAP MASK a Destination NSAP MASK Template name reject 1 Action deny Source NSAP MASK 39 30 20 Destination NSAP MASK Total number of templates 2 Configured filters type q to quit or any other key to continue PRIORITY VPORT STATE INCOMING TEMPLATE OUTGOING TEMPLATE ON accept all ON accept all Total number of filters 2 Secured vports list Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 251 Chapter 20 Signaling Security Access Control Commands Signaling Security Templates Creating a template Signaling Security templates define rules for calls screening based on the call s source destination addresses A template holds the following information 1 Name of template up to 20 characters template name 2 Source NSAP Mask A specific NSAP address or an address mask 3 Destination NSAP Mask A specific NSAP address or an address mask 4 The rule deny or permit An address mask is an expression designed to define a set of addresses A mask expression may include two wildcards characters and where represents any address portion i e any number of nibbles and represents a single nibble half a byte Example an address mask that is designed to match an ATM host having a MAC address of 11 22 33 44 55 66 i e bytes 14 19are the MAC would have the form of 1
150. counter 43 current time D default boot loader image 246 default image 245 default settings 267 destination IP address 37 downloading microcode 227 over serial interface 281 over TFIP 227 231 232 E eerom memory 278 ELAN clients 217 222 LECs 217 219 mapping types 219 mappings 217 222 ELANs 211 216 automatic LES determination 213 creating 212 default 197 198 212 default types 211 deleting 213 displaying 212 distributed LESs max number 223 hosting 16 local LECS 212 manual LES determination 213 name 213 operating mode 214 renaming 214 secure 17 security 216 ESI 32 events 237 239 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 309 Index clear 239 logged 239 logging priority level 237 priority levels 237 reset 239 trap priority level 238 F flash memory 245 248 274 278 flashrename 2 7 framing mode CBIT 51 M23 51 SDH 50 Sonet 50 G gateway IP address 31 H hardware commands 278 help 272 I ILMI 49 66 68 IP address 11 31 32 36 IP ARP cache 36 37 IP route cache 37 L LAN Emulation Client see LEC LAN Emulation Configuration Server see LECS LAN Emulation Server see LES LAN Emulation see LANE LANE components 297 simple 189 192 location 190 191 remote 189 192 resilient 182 statistics 198 WKA 189 LES 297 299 address determination method manual 199 ATM Forum compliant statistics 204 ATM selector 200 BUS selector 200 delete 201 ELAN 205 ELAN mode 20
151. create lt vport gt lt priority gt lt template name gt lt incoming outgoing gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity filter create 1 1 0 10 block r amp d incoming Parameters lt vport gt The filter s vport lt priority gt The filter s priority 1 16 lt template The name of a configured template name gt lt incoming The filter s direction applicable to incoming outgoing gt or outgoing calls Displaying configured filters Command M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity filter show lt vport gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity filter show 9 1 0 Output VPORT PRIORITY STATE INCOMING TEMPLATE OUTGOING TEMPLATE lt Q o ON block r amp d es 90 16 ON accept all x 9 1 0 16 ON es accept all 254 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 20 Signaling Security Access Control Commands Filter s state A filter may be in one of two states ON or OFF When a filter is in the OFF state it is ignored when testing a call setup and has no effect Command M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity filter disable lt vport gt lt priority gt lt incoming outgoing gt or M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity filter enable lt vport gt lt priority gt lt incoming outgoing gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity filter disable 9 1 0 10 incoming Parameters lt vport gt The filter s vport lt priority gt The filter s priority 1 16
152. csssessesesssenees 89 Listing all virtual CirCUits sssinnynen nienia nis naai 89 Listing switched virtual circuits 0 cece eee eeeceeeeeeeneteeeeeees 89 Listing permanent Virtual circuits cece ee eee cece este ceeeeeees 90 Viewing ILMI information for a Virtual port cesses teneneeneees 91 Managing Module Hardwat e ccccccsccsssesesecscneseseecscssesescssscsssnsnesecesenees 95 Managing Modules eisic vcicicccesdithen iene nR E E a e e 95 Viewing the Clock Source Ports s ss ssssssssesssesisstesrissesiesiesressesneneesess 95 Managing Packet Discard Thresholds for a Module 006 96 Displaying the packet discard threshold for modules 97 Changing the packet discard thresholds for modules 97 Managing the speed for the serial port ccccccccseseseeteteeseeeeteseseees 98 Managing the number of VPI and VCI bits cccccesteeseeeeteseees 98 Managing Trunk ID range for P2MP PVCS oo ccecceeeeeeees 99 Managing VPI range for VP switching c cece eee eens 99 Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs cceseeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 101 Managing Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs 5 101 Managing PVC connections ceccesseeesseseeessesesesenseeceeseeeenesseeeneees 101 Creating a PVC connection s essssesssessestestsssessertestessessertersess 102 Creating a Point to Point PP PVC connection 004 102 iv Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Con
153. currently running on the ATM module use the command version Note If anew configurarion file and S W Main Image is changed at the same time a file called oldconfiguration unknown will be saved in Flash memory on reboot of this module 244 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 19 Upgrading Avaya M770 ATM Switch Software Managing the Flash Filing system The following commands enable you to manage the flash memory Viewing the contents of the flash memory You can view all files that are held in flash memory A maximum of 15 files can be saved in flash memory For each file in the directory the following information is displayed The type of file The size of each file in bytes The name of the file The default configuration file is distinguished with a plus sign next to the file type The default boot loader image file is distinguished with a plus sign next to the file type The default main image is distinguished with an type Any main image file that is compressed is indicated with the letter C Any main image file that is uncompressed is indicated with the letter U Also displayed are comments attached to files UA asterisk next to the file To display a listing of the flash memory bank use the flash directory command Command M15 155s8 gt flash directory Output Flash Filing System contains 6 files BOOT 343557 boot_loader 1 2 7 BOOT 376442
154. d line interface you will be placed at the root of the hierarchy To perform an operation using a command you will need to specify the full hierarchical path followed by the command For example M15 155s8 gt route show This command shows routes in the routing table and is contained in the route functional group Alternatively you can descend the hierarchy by typing M15 155s8 gt route This will cause the prompt to change displaying the position in the hierarchy M15 155s8 route gt You can now perform the command simply by typing show as follows M15 155s8 route gt show The advantage of descending the hierarchy is that you can perform multiple related commands without having to type them out in full that is specifying their full hierarchical path Note You do not need to enter all the letters of a command you need only enter sufficient letters to uniquely identify it from other commands in the directory For example instead of typing route show you could just enter r s in the command line interface You can also use the TAB key to complete the full command Table 3 1 lists the commands that are used to navigate the hierarchy Table 3 1 Navigational commands Command Description top Returns you to the root of the hierarchy up Returns you to the previous level in the hierarchy 22 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface Note
155. datory IE content errors Non Mandatory IE Content Errors The number of non mandatory IE content errors IE Passed along Requests The number of unrecognized IEs received with pass along indicator set 84 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Table 6 6 All protocol statistics displayed by the vport sig stats all command Field Description ADD_PARTY_REJECT UNI3 1 Cause Values for STATUS RELEASE RELEASE_COMPLETE Counters for tracking received and transmitted cause values The categories are defined by the AToM MIB and are only relevant for UNI3 0 and Uncounted This is included to count those cause values that are not in any of the counted categories this includes invalid cause values and UNI4 0 PNNI cause values The groups defined by the AT oM MIB are as follows Unavailable Routes Causes 1 2 3 88 Unavailable Resources Causes 35 37 38 41 45 47 49 51 58 63 92 Called Party Events Causes 17 18 21 22 23 27 31 Message Errors Causes 10 36 81 82 89 96 97 99 100 101 104 111 Also includes e call reference length errors e call reference flag incorrectly set to 1 on received SETUP e call reference unknown on received RELEASE COMPLETE e SETUP received for call already in progress e message too short Calling Party Events Causes 28 43 57 65 73 78 91 93
156. ddresses that fall under this summary Each RA is displayed by its Len length in bits and Prefix 156 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Set the PNNI summary address prefix Use the following command to set a PNNI summary address prefix Command Parameters Examples M15 155s8 gt route pnni config summary set lt type gt lt prefix gt lt len gt lt suppress gt lt level gt lt type gt lt prefix gt lt length gt lt suppress gt lt level gt I nternal or E xterior The ATM address prefix Each octes is in hex and is separated by a length of the prefix in bits 0 152 T rue or F alse Internal level number 1 is the lowest physical node set I 39 84 0 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 60 00 104 F 1 Enable the PNNI summary address prefix To enable pnni summary address prefix use the following command and RowStatus Active Note When a pnni summary address is enabled summary show State advertising Command Parameters Examples M15 155s8 gt route pnni config summary enable lt type gt lt prefix gt lt len gt lt level gt lt type gt lt prefix gt lt length gt lt level gt I nternal or E xterior The ATM address prefix Each octesisin hex and is separated by a length of the prefix in bits 0 152 Internal level number 1 is the lowest physical node enable I 39 84 0 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 60 00 104 1 Dis
157. de Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Table 6 5 High level statistical output from the vport sig stats command Continued Field Description Signalling Messages The number of signalling messages transmitted or received on this virtual port Setup Attempts The number of Setup messages transmitted or received on this virtual port Setup Retransmissions The number of Setups that were retransmitted to or from this virtual port Errors detected in the contents of received messages Errors detected in the contents of received messages Active Calls The number of incoming and outgoing active VCs on this virtual port Active Incoming Point to Point Calls The number of incoming Point to Point VCs on this virtual port Active Outcoming Point to Point Calls The number of outgoing Point to Point VCs on this virtual port Active Incoming Point to Multipoint Calls The number of incoming Point to Multipoint VCs on this virtual port Active Outcoming Point to Multipoint Calls The number of outgoing Point to Multipoint VCs on this virtual port Active Point to Multipoint Leaves The number of Point to Multipoint leaves on this virtual port Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 81 Managing Virtual Ports Table 6 6 All protocol statistics displayed by the vport sig stats all command Field Description Signalling Statistics Statistics Info The nu
158. dministrators to imply some policy over the network Showing PNNI node restrict transit flag Use the following command to show pnni node restrict transit flag Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config restrict_transit show lt level gt Output Restricted Transit Level 1 No Level 2 No Level 3 No Level 4 No Level 5 No Setting PNNI node restrict transit flag Use the following command to set the PNNI restrict_transit flag Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config restrict_transit set lt level gt lt no yes gt Parameters Level 1 5 Internal level number 1 is the lowest physical node No Yes No indicates the node is not restricted for transit Yes indicates that the node is restricted for transit i e no Setup calls through this mode Output Note This request will define this switch as a transit non transit switch i e no setup call through this node Changes will take effect immediately Setting PNNI node restrict transit flag to default value Use the following command to set the restrict transit flag to its default of no Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config restrict_transit default lt level gt Examples Note This request will set default value no for restrict transit flag i e setup call can through this node Changes will take effect immediately 154 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing PNNI Summary Tables Showing PNNI summary table
159. e 50 loopback type 53 mapping mode 52 payload scrambling 50 transmit rate capping 51 Tx Clock source 53 setting parameters 49 show 39 Sonet 41 speed 41 transmit clock source 42 VCI range 42 VPC VPI range 42 VPI range 42 physical ports 39 54 PING 35 Proprietary Resilient LECS see LECS resilient PVC connection 102 PVC connections 301 disabling 106 enabling 107 freeing 104 listing 105 R rebooting 231 remote LECS 192 reset saved switch prefix 34 router address 37 routing table 117 121 adding routing entries 117 119 AFI 119 ATM address 117 119 deleting routing entries 119 listing routing entries 120 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 311 Index S secure ELANs 216 self tests 9 serial port speed 98 278 setup procedures 10 SMF 42 SNMP 10 commands 171 community name 10 SNMP security 171 authorized managers 178 179 NMS 176 177 status 176 timeout 177 software upgrades 241 248 version 241 software versions 288 standby LESes 185 startup 9 start up process 269 SVCs 301 switch prefix 33 system commands 227 235 279 282 system prompt 235 T TCP IP 9 Telnet console management 9 terminal width 234 time server address 34 traffic descriptors 113 listing 115 removing 115 U UBR traffic 113 descriptor 114 UDP IP 10 Uploading microcode over TFTP 228 uploading microcode 228 V VBR traffic 113 descriptor 114 VCC 298 VCI 301 VCLs 102 listing 107 Virtual Circuit Connection
160. e LECS enter the lane lec elan command Command M15 155s8 gt lane lec elan Example M15 155s8 gt lane lec elan Parameters The decision about which ELAN the management LEC hyphen will attempt to join is left to the LECS Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 165 Chapter 11 Managing the Management LEC To view the name of the ELAN that the management LEC will try to join enter the lane lec elan command Command M15 155s8 gt lane lec elan Output The management LEC will join the default ELAN Managing a Locally Administered Address for the management LEC If you have an ELAN that uses its own block of MAC addresses you may want the management LEC s MAC address to conform to this scheme by assigning a Locally Administered Address LAA When no LAA is defined the management LEC will use the M770 ATM Switch s Burst In Address BIA You can e View the currently assigned LAA for the management LEC e Set the LAA to cause the management LEC to use the BIA as its MAC address e Assign a specific LAA to the management LEC To view the current management LEC address use the lane lec laa command Command M15 155s8 gt lane lec laa Output The Management LEC will use the BIA To change address of the LAA use the lane lec laa command Command M15 155s8 gt lane lec laa none lt laa gt Examples M15 155s8 gt lane lec laa none Example M15 155s8 gt lane lec laa 51 00 00 62 6A 3E Parameters
161. e accepted Bandwidth is reserved in the following manner for the different service categories e CBR Bandwidth equal to Peak Cell Rate PCR requested will be allocated if available e VBR Bandwidth allocation will use the Simple Generic CAC SGCAC algorithm described in PNNI 1 0 This is based on PCR and SCR Sustainable Cell Rate requested e UBR UBR calls will always be accepted assuming the limit on active VCs has not been reached Note If you have any rate limit set on a port then CAC will not allow you to set up connections which could exceed the set limit All new circuits through the switch are allocated according to the SGCAC this provides the optimum usage of the bandwidth through your switch Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 37 Chapter 4 Managing Miscellaneous Commands Allocating VBR bandwidth according to the SGCAC algorithm To allocate VBR bandwidth according to SGCAC algorithm method use the cac sgcac command Command M15 155s8 gt cac sgcac Output VBR bandwidth now allocated according to SGCAC Allocating VBR bandwidth according to the PCR To allocate VBR bandwidth according to PCR method use the cac pcr command Command M15 155s8 gt cac per Output VBR bandwidth now allocated according to PCR Viewing VBR bandwidth allocation method To view the VBR bandwidth allocation method currently being used use the cac show command Command M15 155s8 gt cac show Output VBR bandw
162. e all the other affected switches static routing table entries with the new switch prefix If you are using PNNI routing then the affected routing entries will be updated automatically Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 33 Chapter 4 Managing Miscellaneous Commands Resetting the saved switch prefix You can reset the saved switch prefix to current address This prevents the current address from changing even after a reset To reset the saved switch prefix use the address reset command Command M15 155s8 gt address reset Setting the switch prefix to its default value The default prefix is 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 xx xx xx xx xx xx where x is the MAC address of the switch master agent module To change the switch prefix for the M770 ATM Switch to its default value use the address default command Command M15 155s8 gt address default Output Done Note You must reboot the switch before the above command will take affect You D must update all the other affected switches static routing table entries with the new switch prefix If you are using PNNI routing then the affected routing entries will be updated automatically Viewing or changing the IP time server address A time server is a server that provides the date and time as specified by RFC 868 such as a UNIX machine running timed to the M770 ATM Switch You must provide the M770 ATM Switch with the IP address of a time server or set the M770
163. e front panel in order for the information in the new config data file to take effect do not use the CLI reboot command because this will change the config data file with its current RAM data During the power up process the module will use the information stored in the new config data file Resetting the module to its factory defaults You can return a module to its factory default by the system default command This command returns all parameters to its factory defaults Command 15 155s8 gt system default Example M15 155s8 gt system default Output WARNING This command will erase the entire module configuration All current parameters will be lost and replaced by the factory defaults NOTE Changes will take effect only after a module reset Do you want to continue Y N y Note To return the entire switch to its factory defaults type system default on each of the modules and afterwards perform a reset to the entire switch 230 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 17 Managing System Commands Rebooting the module or switch It is highly recommended that you use the system reboot command to reboot a module in the M770 ATM Switch or the entire switch instead of using the reset button This is because the system reboot command first flushes any outstanding configuration updates to the non volatile memory whereas pressing the reset button may cause configuration information to be lost To reboot the
164. e information on how to use the Boot Loader see Appendix B Using BOOT Loader If the M770 ATM Switch passes all the self tests it will load the main image from flash memory and you can manage the M770 ATM Switch Managing an Avaya M770 ATM Switch The M770 ATM Switch can be configured and managed using the following management methods e Management from a local or remote console using the command line interface e Management from a network management station using SNMP and the Avaya M770 Manager which is an easy to use graphical management application Management from a local or remote console You can manage the M770 ATM Switch using the following methods e Out of band console management by means of a VT100 compatible terminal connected to the serial port labelled Console of the M770 ATM module e Remote console management using a terminal using Telnet over TCP IP e Out of band console management using a VT100 compatible terminal connected to the serial port labelled Console of the M SPV M SPX M SPS Supervisor module For information about connecting a terminal device to the serial interfaces refer to each module s Installation Guide Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 9 Chapter 2 Getting Started Management from a network management station You can manage the M770 ATM Switch using SNMP management running over UDP IP over an Emulated LAN ELAN Connect the management station to the ELAN that the management
165. e on line Help nsrisusrirs ieiunia 272 Managing the Flash Filing system uu ccc ceeeeeeeeeesseeneeeeenseeneeees 274 Contents of the flash memory cccsescscesesceceeseseeteteteeseeteteseeeeenes 274 Viewing the default image oo cee ceeseeee cess ssseseeeseeeeeeees 274 Changing the main image cccccceccceeeseececeeeeececeeeeeneteseneneees 275 Viewing the default boot loader image ccccceseteeeeteseseetees 275 Changing the default boot loader image cccccsceeeeeeeenees 275 Activating a configuration file cccceccccesesesesesceeeecscnenseeeeesees 276 Deactivating an active configuration file ccccccteecceeeeeteneees 276 Deleting a file from the flash memory bank 0 0 276 Renaming a file in the flash memory bank cc eee 277 Hardware Commands ccccccssscessecsscecsecesssesaecescecsseccaecsseseaecessecsseeeaaeeeees 278 Wiping flash and eerom memory in an Avaya M770 ATM Switch 278 Setting Displaying the speed for the serial port eee 278 System wide Commands ni sriti se sessessesesssesssseesesessseseseseseseseees 279 Viewing the invariant information in BOOT Loader 00 279 Viewing a list of fatal system exceptions cece ee eeeeeeeees 280 Clearing the list of fatal system exceptions cccccceeteeeeetees 280 Running all the hardware tests cccccccseccceeee cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeenes 280 Downloading over XMODEM c cccccccceeesee ce ceeeecececseen
166. e one of the three methods described in this section use the td setup VBR command 1st Method Command M15 155s8 gt td setup VBR lt td_id gt pcr0 l lt pcr0 1 gt pcr0 lt pcr0 gt Example M15 155s8 gt td setup VBR 3 pcr0 1 64000 pcr0 48000 Parameters lt td_id gt An unique identifier for this traffic descriptor lt pcr0 1 gt The combined PCR for all cells regardless of whether the CLP bit is set in the ATM cell header lt pcr0 gt An optional PCR for cells where the CLP bit is not set in the ATM cell header This PCR must be less than or equal to the combined PCR 2nd Method Command 15 155s8 gt td setup VBR lt td_id gt pcr0 1 lt pcr0 1 gt scr0 1 lt scr0 1 gt mbs0 1 lt mbs0 1 gt Example M15 155s8 gt td setup VBR 4 pcr0 1 128000 scr0 1 64000 mbs0 1 1000 Parameters lt td_id gt An unique identifier for this traffic descriptor lt pcr0 1 gt The combined PCR for all cells regardless of whether the CLP bit is set in the ATM cell header lt scr0 1 gt The SCR for all cells regardless of whether the CLP bit is set in the ATM cell header lt mbs0 1 gt The MBS for all cells regardless of whether the CLP bit is set in the ATM cell header 3rd Method Command M15 155s8 gt td setup VBR lt td_id gt pcr0 1 lt pcr0 1 gt scr0 lt scr0 gt mbs0 lt mbs0 gt Example M15 155s8 gt td setup VBR 4 pcr0 1 128000 scr0 48000 mbs0 800 114 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 8 Permanent
167. e script run command is invoked on multiple modules e Recursive running of the same script will most probably cause crash of the modules software Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 265 Chapter 21 Command Line Interface Scripts 266 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide AppendixA Default Settings on a New Avaya M770 ATM Switch The factory configured default settings for an Avaya M770 ATM Switch are shown in Table 1 Table A 1 Default settings for an Avaya M770 ATM Switch System default parameters Community password PUBLIC Serial Telnet password No password Date 01 JAN 1970 Time 00 00 00 IP address Will use BOOTP to obtain an IP address SNMP Secure mode Disabled IP for the management LEC Enabled LANE Services default parameters LECS location Remote at WKA Internal LES Enabled Default Ethernet ELAN default Default Unspecified ELAN default The above ELAN is used when the name and type of ELAN is not given Ethernet LES name default Management LEC status Enabled Management LEC ELAN Will join the default ELAN Management LEC type Ethernet Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 267 Appendix A Default Settings on a New Avaya M770 ATM Switch Table A 1 Default settings for an Avaya M770 ATM Switch Continued Default port configurations parameters per port configurations
168. e stored in the script log The script log may be viewed later using script log show command see below Otherwise if console specified the script output will be redirected to that terminal from which the script was started i e serial terminal or Telnet window If neither specified log is used by default Note that log console parameter has only local significance On remote modules an output will always be redirected to the log delay lt delay Insert delay between running of consequent value gt commands of the script measured in milliseconds The lt delay value gt may vary between 0 5000 ms If is not specified zero is used lt slot list gt A simple list of slot numbers of modules which are required to run the script In case of split backplane all the modules in the list must belong to the same switch as the Master Agent module If all specified in the list of modules all the modules of the switch are required to run the script If nothing specified in the slot list only local Master Agent module will be required to run the script Example M15 155s8 gt script run script txt log delay 100 1 2 3 Upon receiving the script run command the Master Agent validates the slots specified in the lt slot list gt parameter If one or more elements is invalid for example slot number is wrong or specified slot is empty or belongs to another switch or its software version doesn t support scripts
169. e system was up Note The pport show ds3counters command displays counter information specific only to DS3 modules Command M4 DS3s8 gt pport show ds3counters ne fe current total interval lt pport id gt Example M4 DS3s8 gt pport show ds3counters ne current Parameters ne To specify that the counter information is supplied from the near end fe To specify that the counter information is supplied from the far end current To specify that the ne fe counter information is supplied from the current interval for all ports total To specify that the ne fe counter information is supplied for the last 24 hours for all ports interval pportid To specify that the ne fe counter information is supplied in all intervals up to 96 for all ports If the physical port identifier is entered only the interval counters for the specified DS3 port are displayed If no value is specified then the interval counters for all DS3 ports are displayed 44 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 5 Managing Physical Ports Note The pport show ds3counters command displays several parameters for near end ne counter information PESS PSESS LCVS PCVS LESS that are not displayed for far end fe counter information To display DS3 counter information for all near end DS3 physical ports for the current interval use the pport show ds3counters ne current command Command 4 DS3s8 gt pport show ds3counters ne cur
170. e the flash config command Command M15 155s8 gt flash config lt filename gt Example M15 155s8 gt flash config new_cfile Parameters lt filename gt The name of the configuration file that you wish to activate D Note The restored configuration file will only be activated when the switch is next rebooted Deactivating an active configuration file To deactivate an active configuration file use the flash config disable command Command M15 155s8 gt flash config disable Output Active configuration file has been disabled Deleting a file from the flash memory bank To delete a file from the flash memory bank use the flash delete command You will be asked to confirm the deletion Command M15 155s8 gt flash delete lt filename gt Example M15 155s8 gt flash delete m770ATM Parameter lt filename gt The name of the file you wish to delete from the flash directory Note Once a file is deleted it cannot be recovered The file must be downloaded again You must not delete the config data file without consulting Avaya Technical Support 276 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Appendix B Using BOOT Loader Renaming a file in the flash memory bank To rename a file in the flash memory bank use the flash rename command Command M15 155s8 gt flash rename lt old_name gt lt new_name gt Example M15 155s8 gt flash rename Avaya M770 1 2 0 fieldrelease Parameters lt old_name gt The curre
171. e vcl show Output VCL_ID Xid Oper LastChan Type anj TD_RX TD_TX ge 9 2 0 801 27000000 UP 0 00 34 3 3 I p2p 9 2 0 802 27000000 UP 0 00 34 3 3 1 p2p 9 2 0 803 27000000 UP 0 00 34 p2mple 0 3 2 af 9 2 0 804 27000000 UP 037 33 p2mple 0 3 2 af 9 2 0 805 27000000 UP 0 40 48 p2mple 0 3 2 af 2 15 0 803 27000000 UP 0 00 34 p2mpro 3 0 2 ot The pvc vcl show command displays the information described in Table 8 2 Table 8 2 Output from the pvc vcl show command Field Description VCL ID The unique VCL identifier is displayed TD RX The receive traffic descriptor identifier TD TX The transmit traffic descriptor identifier Xid The PVC connection that is using this VCL if there is one Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 107 Chapter 8 Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs Table 8 2 Output from the pvc vcl show command Field Description Oper The operational state of the corresponding PVC connection If the state is UP then the PVC is functional If the state is DOWN then the PVC is not functional This may be because either the PVC is disabled or a port on this switch used by the PVC is down If the state is NULL then the VCL in question has no PVC associated with it LastChange Indicates when the operational state of the VCL last changed This is displayed as hours minutes and seconds At po
172. e with the remote device If ILMI cannot discover a value for the parameter the parameter remains at the default setting You can reset the following virtual port parameters using the vport reset command e Signalling profile e Stack type e Signalling VPCI range e Signalling VCI range e VPI range ona root virtual port e ILMI version e Waitqsaal Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable a virtual port see Disabling a virtual port on page 65 To clear a parameter for a virtual port you must perform the following steps 1 Disable the virtual port 2 Reset the parameter for the disabled virtual port 3 Enable the virtual port Resetting the signalling profile parameter If you reset the virtual port s signalling profile parameter the port will re learn what is on the other end of the link when it is enabled and a remote device is connected For more information about this parameter see Setting the signalling profile parameter on page 69 Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable a virtual port see Disabling a virtual port on page 65 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 75 Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports To reset the profile parameter for a virtual port use the vport reset profile
173. eating or changing to a remote LECS e Ifa local LECS already exists on the switch then you are warned that it will be deleted and the switch will look for a LECS at the specified remote address To change the location of the remote LECS use the lane lecs remote command Command M15 155s8 gt lane lecs location remote elected wka lt address gt Parameters remote elected Module will wait for notification via a proprietary protocol of the address of the elected resilient LECS wka Module will seek a remote LECS that is advertising the WKA lt address gt Module will seek a remote LECS that is advertising the specific ATM address on the network Note Changing the LECS location may disrupt all LANE connections and any change will take effect immediately 192 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 14 Managing the LECS Setting priority level for a resilient LECS You can rig the election of a resilient LECS by placing it on a higher priority level than other LECSes The higher the priority assigned to a resilient LECS the better the chances of it winning the election By default all resilient LECSes when created are assigned a priority of 128 Avaya recommends that you set the priority of one of the resilient LECS to have a higher priority than the others This will ensure that this LECS will be elected as the active LECS You can stop a resilient LECS being elected by assigning it a priority of zero
174. ed rx or transmitted tx STAT The number of STAT PDUs that were received rx or transmitted tx USTAT The number of USTAT PDUs that were received rx or transmitted tx Sequenced Data Messages Transmitted not including retransmissions Number of sequenced data messages transmitted Sequenced Data Messages Retransmitted Number of sequenced data messages retransmitted Sequenced Data Messages Acked Number of sequenced data messages acknowledged Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 87 Managing Virtual Ports Table 6 6 All protocol statistics displayed by the vport sig stats all command Field Description Sequenced Data Messages Received Number of sequenced data messages received Sequenced Data Messages Delivered from SSCS to Signalling Number of sequenced data messages delivered Sequenced Data Messages Duplicated Number of retransmission requests sent and received Retransmission Request Sent The number of retransmission requests sent Retransmission Request Received The number of retransmission requests received Transmission Window Empty Number of times we have run out of credit to send SD PDUs Has SSCS credit to send SD PDUs Indication of whether we Currently have Credit to send SD PDUs MAA Errors Encountered Number of MAA errors encountered protocol Errors in received PDUs Number of times the
175. ed Address for the management Te Ge ces ae e a a ast it acates acto e A a RE A E 166 Restarting the management LEC ss sssssssssssssstsessssstesstesteesneentessseetee 167 Displaying the LANE ARP cache ceccccseeeesecescteeeseecsceetseseeeeees 167 Viewing the management LEC statistics ccccceseeteeteeeeeees 168 Chapter 12 Managing SNMP nasip teii neei E E A testes casa aeh aloes Seeetise 171 Using SNMP Commands iiajn a ar alayi 171 Viewing the system group information sss ssssssssrisssstsrtsssersterstes 171 Show the list of community NAMES s s ssssssssessissississessresieriesesssesees 172 Set the read only community NAME 0 0 estes eete tees esesteeneeees 172 Delete the read only community name cccccceeteeteteteee cece 172 Show the list of read only community NAMES ccc eee eee 173 Set the read write community NAME oo sees esses cette eee 173 Delete the read write community NAME ou estes teteeeeee 173 Show the list of read write community NAMES s ssssessssss s111 1111 173 Set the trap community NAME cece esses eee es eset eeeeeeeees 174 Show the trap community NAME o cece ees e tees es ee eeeeeeeeees 174 Using Permanent Managers Configuration Commands 0 ceeee 175 Adding a new manager to the list 0 c cece cesecsetesesesceeeeeeeeees 175 Listing all the current managers cect eee sees eee eset nets eeeees 175 Updating an existing Manager
176. ed on the remove device Note The above information except for the SysUpTime is only retrieved when ILMI comes up on the link and therefore it will not be current This is only a problem when the ILMI MIB information is changed for the remote device Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 93 Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports 94 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 7 Managing Module Hardware This chapter describes how to use the command line interface to manage modules installed in an Avaya M770 ATM Switch For information about how to access and use the Avaya M770 ATM Switch command line interface see Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface Managing Modules This section describes the commands that allow you to manage the modules installed in the Avaya M770 ATM Switch Viewing the Clock Source Ports You can display the source of the ATM module s clock by the hardware clock show command Only M770 ATM switches that have an M SPS installed have the ability to synchronize its clock If the M770 Supervisory Module is the M SPX the module will always use its local clock Command M15 155s8 gt hardware clock show Output From a module whose port is not being used to synchronize the ATM Switch Clock synchronization information of slot 8 The ports on this module are using a clock from the M SPS No ports on this module are driving clock source ATM A or By From a m
177. eet e 225 0 225 feet 0 68 meters e 450 225 450 feet 68 137 meters The default cable length is 225 i e 0 225 feet Note You must disable the physical port before you can change clear or reset any physical port parameters For more information about how to disable a physical port see Disabling a Physical Port on page 49 To configure the coaxial cable length for a DS3 port use the pport set length command Command Example Parameters M4 DS3s8 gt pport set length lt lt slot gt lt port gt gt 225 450 M4 DS3s8 gt pport set length 8 1 225 lt pport id gt The physical port identifier in the form lt slot gt lt port number gt 225 Sets the allowable coaxial cable length to 0 225 feet 0 68 meters 450 Sets the allowable coaxial cable length to 225 450 feet 68 137 meters Specifying a mapping mode for a DS3 port You can specify for a DS3 port the mapping mode used for the transport of ATM cells over DS3 The mapping mode is either ADM or PLCP The default mapping mode is ADM Note You must disable the physical port before you can change clear or reset any physical port parameters For more information about how to disable a physical port see Disabling a Physical Port on page 49 To set the mapping mode for a DS3 port use the pport set mapping command Command Example Parameters M4 DS3s8 gt pport set mapping lt lt slot gt lt port gt gt adm plcp M4 DS3s8 gt
178. egardless of the LECS up time For information on the commands used to change the priority of a resilient LECS see Setting priority level for a resilient LECS in Chapter 14 Managing the LECS 184 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 13 LANE Services The LES and BUS in an Avaya M770 ATM Switch Each module can provide up to 16 combined LES BUS pairs By default all modules have one Ethernet LES BUS named default that will try to register with the LECS The M770 ATM Switch LESes support a proprietary automatic LES address determination method Therefore all the M770 ATM Switch LESes can automatically register with an M770 ATM Switch LECS The benefit of this is that a LES can be re located without reconfiguring the LECS or the LECs on the ELAN hosted by the re located LES The M770 ATM Switch LESes support two proprietary mechanisms for Resilient and Distributed LES BUS services as described below These features require that the LECS LES and BUS will be hosted on M770 ATM Switch modules Note Since by default all modules have a LES BUS named default as soon as the number of modules in your entire network exceeds the maximum number of LESes per ELAN as defined in lane elan max les default 5 maximum 10 you should start deleting or disabling servers LUNI 2 0 capability By default a LES in M770 ATM switch has LUNI 2 0 capability This means that when it registers to an M770 ATM LECS it will tr
179. elect the speed at which the serial interface port will communicate 278 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Appendix B Using BOOT Loader System wide Commands This section describes system commands that are available in the BOOT Loader Viewing the invariant information in BOOT Loader Invariant information is shared between the BOOT PROM image the BOOT Loader image and the main image This is common information in all the image files To view invariant information use the system invariant command Command Output BIA is set to Loader 1 Loader 2 Selected boot image Done Software is running BIA is set to Loader is started Selected boot image M15 155s8 gt system invariant Software is running in 1 1 mode 0000 6123456 start OX12345678 start OXb2615678 length 345841 length 345841 2 Indicates the software image that is currently running on the switch The BIA of the switch The BOOT Loader start address in hexadecimals and the length of the BOOT Loader file The BOOT Loader image that has been selected Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 279 Appendix B Using BOOT Loader Viewing a list of fatal system exceptions A fatal system exception occurs when the Central Processing Unit CPU detects an error such as a division by zero or accesses to non existent memory A fatal exception causes the M770 ATM Switch to reboot A breakpoint is a special type of exception whi
180. ent LECS 184 The LES and BUS in an Avaya M770 ATM Switch eee 185 EUNI220 capability iee eos ena eA Ee eE RE EER 185 Proprietary resilient standby LESes csccescceeeseseseeteneeseseeneenes 185 Proprietary Distributed LANE Services 00 0 eee eens 186 Virtual Channel Connection VCC requirements 186 Setting up Distributed LANE Services ccccceceeseeeeteeeeeteseeeenenes 186 LEC Assigned for a Distributed ELAN ou eee eeeeeeeeeeees 186 Round robi o5 oases kiii E neue E E E EEEE 187 Group address sitsit ites ei in Teee ar 187 Longest Match with LEC address ccccseceeceeteesteneees 187 The Management LEC in an Avaya M770 ATM Switch cccseeseeees 187 Managing the LECS ss iscscss annuitant elena E deed waned ane 189 LECS Locations iene annaa Schein Gite chien aaa Sede deeb ies 189 Advertised address of a LECS ie cccccccccccsccsscesscessecesseceseeeneeeeseenes 189 Viewing the Location of the LECS oo cceeeesecesssssenesesenensesesees 190 Changing the location of the LECS ccccccsssesesceneeesnsneneteneeees 191 Local simple LECS iss ssccsesiicivsdees tie ninar idia 191 Local resilient LECS sscscccssdicssvssies vegensicecebeavsseecs a n a 191 Remote LECS oraa ainar orar ena a a a EA AEE A EE n 192 Setting priority level for a resilient LECS cece 193 Managing Resilient LECS Candidates c cccccccssesessteteteeseeeeteseeeeeenes 194 Displaying a resilient LECS election c
181. er you may have a number of standby LECS on the network The LECS maintains a list of all LESes The LECS provides each LEC that contacts it with the ATM address of the LES hosting the ELAN that it should join The LECS is usually located locally or remotely at the following ATM Forum Well Known Address WKA 47 00 79 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 a0 3e 00 00 01 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 297 Appendix E Components in LANE Services Communication on an Emulated LAN It is the LEC in an ATM device that will perform most of the work of LAN emulation To do this it must join an ELAN Discovering the ATM address of the LES Before a LEC can join an ELAN it typically gets the ATM address of the LES from the LECS The LECS decides which LES to direct a LEC to on the basis of the information that the LEC gives it For example the LEC may provide the name of the ELAN it expects to join Alternatively the LECS may be configured to associate a particular LEC with a specific ELAN Discovering the ATM address of another LEC Every LEC has one or more LAN addresses for example MAC address and an ATM address associated with it When the network operating system passes a frame to a LEC to transmit the LEC checks whether it already has a connection set up to that frame s LAN destination address If there is no existing connection the LEC must discover the ATM address for that destination end station signal to the network fo
182. erformed on both modules The order of the VCLs should NOT switch places The root VCL comes first and the branch VCLs come second 292 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide AppendixD Creating PVPs This appendix describes the procedure for creating PVPs on Avaya M770 ATM Modules Creating PVPs What do you do when you want all VCs from a particular VPI to be switched from one endpoint to another You would define a Permanent Virtual Path PVP When a PVP is configured the cell is switched using only its VPI the VCI is ignored The VPI on the ingress port can be the same or different than the VPI on the egress port This section contains examples on defining PVPs The following 2 examples show in detail how to define PVPs between ports on the same module and between ports on different modules in the ATM switch Example 1 Define a PVP that takes all VCs coming in on slot 1 port 1 for VPI 6 and switch them to slot 1 port 2 VPI 7 Example 2 Define a PVP that takes all VCs coming in on slot 1 port 1 for VPI 6 and switch them to slot 3 port 2 VPI 7 There are four steps in creating a PVP on the M770 ATM switch 1 Define the VPI range that is used for VP switching 2 Define the VPI range to be used for Signalled VPs The rest are used for Permanent VPs 3 Create the Traffic Descriptor TD that will be used for the PVP 4 Create the PVP Before you get started there is an additional command feature in the M770 ATM sw
183. ers For more information about how to disable a physical port see Disabling a Physical Port on page 49 To specify framing for a physical fiber optic port use the pport set framing command Command M15 155s8 gt pport set framing lt pport gt sonet SDH Example M15 155s8 gt pport set framing 8 1 SDH Parameters lt pport id gt The physical port identifier in the form lt slot gt lt port number gt Sonet Sets the framing mode for the physical port to Sonet The default setting is Sonet SDH Sets the framing mode for the physical port to SDH 50 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 5 Managing Physical Ports To specify framing for a DS3 physical port use the pport set framing command Command M4 DS3s8 gt pport set framing lt pport gt CBIT M23 Example M4 DS3s8 gt pport set framing 8 2 CBIT Parameters lt pport id gt The physical port identifier in the form lt slot gt lt port number gt CBIT Sets the framing mode for the physical port to CBIT The default setting is CBIT M23 Sets the framing mode for the physical port to M23 Configuring transmit rate limit for the M15 155 module This command is supported only by M15 155 ATM modules The M770 ATM Switch hardware enables you to configure the peak output cell rate of any port to be restricted to control congestion on the network This feature is used for traffic shaping mainly when you have a WAN connection For example if a 155Mbps po
184. erval 8 3 Output Link far end interval counters for port 8 3 Intvl CESS CSES CCVS UASS LCVS PCVS S 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 47 Chapter 5 Managing Physical Ports Displaying PLCP counter information for DS3 physical ports You can view PLCP Physical Layer Convergence Protocol counter information for physical ports on DS3 modules that have their mapping mode set to PLCP To view PLCP counter information use the command pport show plcpcounters Note The pport show plcpcounters command does not display PLCP counter information for DS3 ports that have their mapping mode set to ADM To display DS3 counter information for all DS3 physical ports enter the pport show plcpcounters command Command M 4 DS3s8 gt pport show plcpcounters Output Physical port plcp counters Port BIP FERR FEBE ID 8 1 0 0 0 8 2 0 0 0 8 3 0 0 0 8 4 0 0 0 The pport show counters command displays the information described in Table 5 4 Table 5 4 Output from the pport show plcpcounters command Field Description BIP Bit interleaved errors B1 FERR Framing Pattern Octet Errors and Path Overhead Identification Octet Errors FEBE Far End Block Errors 48 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 5 Managing Physical Ports Disabling a Physical Port Before any physical port parameters can be changed clea
185. es to existing calls can be added using the existing trunk ID The format is lt slot gt lt index gt where lt slot gt is the slot number of the module that holds the root of the call Disabling a PVC connection To temporarily disable an established PVC connection use the pvc disable command Command M15 155s8 gt pve disable lt vclindex gt Example M15 155s8 gt pvc disable 9 2 0 805 Parameter lt vclindex gt Index is one of the VCLs of the PVC connection Note If PP PVC the PVC is disabled If P2MP PVC If the VCL is Root VCL the entire PMP tree and associated VCLs are disabled If the VCL Branch VCL the designated PVC and it s associated VCLs are disabled 106 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 8 Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs Enabling a PVC connection To enable a disabled PVC connection use the pvc enable command Command M15 155s8 gt pvc enable lt vclindex gt Example M15 155s8 gt pve enable 9 2 0 805 Output PMP PVC 270000002 Branch VCL 9 2 0 805 admin up Parameter lt vclindex Index is one of the VCLs of the PVC connection gt Note If PP PVC the PVC is enabled If P2MP PVC If the VCL is Root VCL the entire PMP tree and associated VCLs are enabled If the VCL Branch VCL the designated PVC and it s associated VCLs are enabled Listing all the VCLs To list details of all VCLs use the pvc vcl show command Command 15 155s8 gt pvc
186. esesessseseseseneneseseees 241 Viewing Software Version Information cccccsessesesesssessseseeseeesesees 241 Upgrading Software via TFTP from the Command Line Interface CLI sancy siti tte ca etterechwa ae ters Seca eons trates 242 Downgrading the Main Software Version via TFTP from the CLI 244 Managing the Flash Filing system uu eseeeseeeesesseeneseneeseseees 245 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Contents Chapter 20 Chapter 21 Viewing the contents of the flash memory 00 0 eee 245 Viewing the default image ccccceeccsecesseeescseseeesescscsseeseecenees 245 Changing the main image ccccccssesesescseteescsesesesesescscssaneseeesees 246 Viewing the default boot loader image cece eset 246 Changing the default boot loader image cccceeeeeeteeseenees 246 Activating a configuration file cccecceccssessesescsenenesescsneseeeeees 247 Deactivating an active configuration file ccccceeeesteteteeees 247 Deleting a file from the flash memory bank ccceeeesseeeeeeees 248 Renaming a file in the flash memory bank cccscesseteeeeeeees 248 Signaling Security Access Control Commands cccce cece 249 Signaling Security State cess teeseeeeee te csseeseeseseseseneseeeneeeees 251 Managing Signaling Security State ccc csteteeseeteteseeeenenes 251 Displaying Signaling Security State 0 0 eee cee teenies 251 Signaling Security Templates 0 0c ccc
187. esilient standby LECSes Note To ensure that a standby LECS can smoothly take over the running of the G network should the active elected LECS fail it must be configured with the same LANE services information as the active elected LECS There is no checking of database consistency between switches that are hosting resilient LECSes The status of the elected active LECS is continually monitored by the other resilient LECS Should the elected active LECS fail another election process will take place to elect a new active LECS from one of the resilient LECSes Providing all resilient LECS have the same database configurations then there should be no disruption in the working of LANE services in the ATM network If your switch is hosting a local LECS then you can view the details of other resilient LECS on the network For more information about displaying details of other resilient LECS on the network see Displaying a resilient LECS election candidate in Chapter 14 Managing the LECS The example below shows the M770 ATM Switch across a third party switch It is recommended that if you have a M770 ATM Switch connected via a third party switch then that M770 ATM Switch should not host a resilient LECS Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 183 Chapter 13 LANE Services Figure 13 1 M770 ATM Switches connected via third party switch i Hosts a resilient LECS Looking for
188. est of the ATM network e All ports of C S 2 0 modules can be used by the M SPS to synchronize its clock Managing Packet Discard Thresholds for a Module There are two packet discard thresholds for each module called Early Packet Discard EPD and Partial Packet Discard PPD By default both thresholds have a set limit see below and are enabled The M770 ATM Switch uses EPD to discard entire AAL5 frames for UBR traffic rather than random cells from different frames when it determines that it is about to become congested The M770 ATM Switch still passes through the last cell of each AALS frame so that end stations are aware of the discard that has taken place You can configure a threshold at which the EPD will be invoked The threshold is a percentage of the overall shared buffer space The default for EPD is set at 80 of the buffer fill PPD works similarly to EPD but it is generally invoked at higher levels of congestion The difference is that while with EPD the M770 ATM Switch can wait for the start of a suitable frame PPD is involved when congestion is too serious to wait that long Therefore packet discarding will start in the middle of the frame The value for PPD threshold cannot be set by the user It is higher than the default for EPD Under normal circumstances EPD would deal with the congestion before the buffer capacity is reached and PPD should never be invoked 96 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide
189. etermines the limits of the VPI range that can be supported MaxVciBits The maximum VCI bits This together with the MaxVcc determines the limits of the signalling VCI range that can be supported MaxVpc The maximum Virtual Path Connections VPCs that the remote device can support MaxVcc The maximum Virtual Circuit Connections VCCs that the remote device can support SysObjectId The value for the SysObjectld in RFC 1213 MIB SysUpTime The number of days hours minutes and seconds that the remote device has been on line SysName The administratively assigned name for this node LECS address The ATM address of the LECS Probe MIB The probe is used to locate proprietary features on the remote device If the probe is not supported on the remote device then remaining fields in ILMI show command will be displayed has Not Available Min Interop Specifies the minimum interoperability version supported on the remote device IISP Admin Specifies the administration preference state supported by the State remote device when setting up an IISP link IISP Oper Specifies the operational preference state supported by the State remote device when setting up an IISP link 92 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Table 6 8 Output from the ILMI show command for a specific virtual port Continued Field Description LECS Election Specifies if LECS redundancy is support
190. eteteseeceneseseeeenenesesesesneeneeees 130 PNNI Local Topology Information ccccccccse cece ceseeececssenseseeceeeees 131 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide v Contents Eocal PNNI Links ciiee ntti ch iis Actes e tee EtA 131 Local Memory Information ccccccceccccccseseseeceeeeecececseensneceeenees 133 Local P er Neighbors iics ciciie tesventei detest e 133 Local Reachable Addresses ccccccsccessecesseesseceseecsseeeaeceseeesseeeaeeenes 136 PNNI Local Switch Information cccccceccessecessecssceeseceseeesseeeeeees 137 Local Switch lin kS esse estes asia ceased taste leans sede hase E 137 Local Switch Reachable Addresses ccccccccssesseeseeseeseenees 138 Local Switch Uplinks 0 deene ee 141 PNNI Configuration Commands e cee eecseeseeenensseseeeees 142 Showing all PNNI configured variables 00 0 0 eee 142 PNNI Administrative Status cccccccccccsccsscessecsssecsseeesseeseeesseeeseeees 144 Showing PNNI node admin status ccccceeeceeeneeeeeeeees 144 Setting PNNI node admin status ccccsesseseesenesee eee 145 PNNI ATM addresses 0 ccccccccssccesseesseessceesscecseceseecesseeaseceeeecseeesecees 145 Setting PNNI defaults for all parameters cccseceeeeeseseeetees 145 PNNI Interfaces gerseenn an i eie 146 Showing all PNNI interfaces sssssssssesessesssesisseeseessessestessess 146 Setting the PNNI interface aggregation token 147 Setting the PN
191. etting Started For example if you are connecting an Avaya M400 Gate Switch LSA module which does not support ILMI to port 8 4 0 on the M770 ATM Switch you should configure port 8 4 0 on the M770 ATM Switch by performing the following steps M15 155s8 gt vport disable 8 4 0 M15 155s8 gt vport disable 8 4 0 ILMI M15 155s8 gt vport set stacktype 8 4 0 UNI 3 0 M15 155s8 gt vport set vpirange 8 4 0 0 0 M15 155s8 gt vport set vcirange 8 4 0 32 1023 M15 155s8 gt vport enable 8 4 0 Routing Configuration PNNI Configuration When you configure your network you have to decide whether you re going to use a single peer group flat configuration or multiple peer groups hierarchy configuration In case you have devices that do not support PNNI please refer to Section Connecting to another ATM switch which doesn t support PNNI Flat PNNI Configuration Connecting to another ATM switch which supports PNNI If you are attaching another ATM switch that supports PNNI ensure that the following conditions exist e All switches should have a different ATM prefix although the network will work even if some have the same prefix To check this in the ATM switch type address prefix on the Master Agent modules e All switches must have a different node_id By default it will be taken from the switch address e All switches in the same peer group must have the same pg_id e All switches in the same peer group must have
192. f the following e An ATM switch e A dedicated workstation e Anexisting or dedicated server For example the services could be implemented as NetWare Loadable Modules NLMs on a NetWare server Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 299 Appendix E Components in LANE Services 300 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Appendix F Routing and Signalling Concepts This chapter describes how the Avaya M770 ATM Switch switches ATM cells through an ATM network and provides background information about the concepts of routing and signalling Switching ATM cells through the ATM network There are two types of connection that can be used to switch ATM cells through an ATM network e Permanent Virtual Circuits PVCs which are created manually by the network administrator Every switch through which the connection will pass will need to be configured separately PVCs are used for communication between two endpoints through a pre configured circuit until the administrator disables the PVC and frees the connection e Switched Virtual Circuits SVCs which are established on demand by UNI User to Network Interface NNI Network to Network Interface signalling protocols SVCs are used for communication between two endpoints until one endpoint clears the connection There are two types of SVCs Point to point virtual circuits Point to multipoint virtual circuits In an ATM network an end station can establish a SVC
193. fault ELAN names are defined in a M770 ATM Switch e an Ethernet type ELAN default e an Unspecified type ELAN default The ELAN name specified here will be used when a LEC does not provide the ELAN name nor the ELAN type that it wants to join Note You can only view and configure the defaults if you are using the local LECS in the M770 ATM Switch or hosting a resilient LECS To display the default ELANs that have been specified in the LECS use the lane lecs default command Command M15 155s8 gt lane lecs default Output No default Token Ring ELAN Default Ethernet ELAN default Default ELAN for unspecified type default To change the ELAN names for the default ELAN names see Specifying default ELANs on page 198 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 197 Chapter 14 Managing the LECS Specifying default ELANs For information on default ELANs see Viewing default ELANSs earlier in this chapter To specify a default ELAN use the lane lecs default command Command M15 155s8 gt lane lecs default lt type gt lt ELAN name gt Example M15 155s8 gt lane lecs default ethernet default Parameters lt type gt The type of ELAN that a LEC or LES asks to join or host You can select one of the following types ethernet an Ethernet ELAN type unspecified to be used when neither an ELAN name nor a specific ELAN type has been specified lt ELAN name gt The name of the ELA
194. following command Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config admin show Output Admin Status Level 1 Up Level 2 Up Level 3 Down Level 4 Down 5 Level Down Setting PNNI node admin status Use the following command to set pnni node admin status It takes effect only for logical levels greater than 1 Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config admin set lt level gt lt up down gt PNNI ATM addresses The following command displays the ATM address of the PNNI node The PNNI node s ATM address is advertised in Nodal Information PTSE and is important when the node is a PGL LGN In this case an SVC RCC shall be opened between LGNs i e between the PNNI node s ATM addresses Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config atm_addr show lt level gt Output Atm address Level 1 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 B8 81 Level 2 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 B8 82 Level 3 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 B8 84 Level 4 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 B8 85 Level 5 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 B8 86 Setting PNNI defaults for all parameters Use the following command to set PNNI configuration with default parameters Command 15 155s8 gt route pnni config default lt level gt This request will set defaults for all configurable variables PNNI node level node id peer group id restrict transit flag p
195. g M770 The sX X current slot number should not be written as a system prompt Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 235 Chapter 17 Managing System Commands 236 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 18 Managing Events This chapter describes how to use the command line interface to set and display event priority levels that occur on an Avaya M770 ATM Switch For information about how to access and use the Avaya M770 ATM Switch command line interface see Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface Assigning an Event Priority Level All events in the Avaya M770 ATM Switch are assigned a priority level between 1 and 16 in order of severity Examples of priority levels e Priority 1 is assigned to low priority events such as setting up a Telnet connection e Priority 8 is assigned to informational events such as LANE services e Priority 15 is assigned to fatal events that do not cause the M770 ATM Switch to reboot e Priority 16 is assigned to fatal events that cause the M770 ATM Switch to reboot Note The event log is a temporary file and will not be saved when the M770 ATM Switch is restarted Displaying or setting the event logging priority level All events in the M770 ATM Switch are assigned a priority level between 1 and 16 in order of severity For examples of priority levels see Assigning an Event Priority Level earlier in this chapter You can specify a priority level fo
196. g a virtual port on page 65 Enabling ILMI polling on a virtual port To enable ILMI polling on a virtual port use the vport enable command Command Example Parameters M15 155s8 gt vport enable lt vport id gt poll M15 155s8 gt vport enable 8 1 0 poll lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt poll ILMI polling isa mechanism used by the M770 ATM Switch to ensure that the same device is still attached Since ILMI polling isan enhancement to ILMI ILMI must already be enabled Enabling ILMI multiple registration A given address can be registered via ILMI on multiple ports To enable ILMI registration on multiple port use the vport enable command Command Example Parameters M15 155s8 gt vport enable lt vport id gt ilmimultireg M15 155s8 gt vport enable 8 1 0 ilmimultireg lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt ilmimultireg ILMImultireg isan enhancement to ILMI when ILMI is disabled ILM Imultireg is also disabled By default i lmimultireg is enabled Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 67 Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Setting the ILMI version on a virtual port This parameter changes the ILMI version used on this vport By default this parameter is ILMI 4 0 which is backwards compatible with devices using ILMI 3 1 To set the ILMI version on the virtual port u
197. ge e VPI range ona root virtual port e ILMI version e Waiting for incoming Q SAAL connection Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable a virtual port see Disabling a virtual port on page 65 To set a parameter for a virtual port you must perform the following steps 1 Disable the virtual port 2 Set the parameter for the disabled virtual port as required 3 Enable the virtual port Setting the signalling profile parameter You can set the signalling profile on a virtual port to either user or network One side of the link must be set to user and the other side to network If ILMI is enabled then normally end stations are always the user side of a link For more information on which signalling profile should be used for an attached device see ATM Port Configuration on page 12 Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable a virtual port see Disabling a virtual port on page 65 To set the signalling profile for a virtual port use the vport set profile command Command M15 155s8 gt vport set profile lt vport id gt user network Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 69 Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Example M15 155s8 gt vport set profile 8 1 0 user Parameters
198. ge lt vport id gt Example M15 155s8 gt M15 155Fs2 gt vport reset sigvpcvpirange 2 15 0 Parameter lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt 0 Output Clearing sigvpcvpcirange value Done 76 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Resetting the signalling VPCI range For more information about this parameter see Setting the signalling VPCI range on page 71 Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable a virtual port see Disabling a virtual port on page 65 To reset the signalling VPCI range for a virtual port use the vport reset sigvpcirange command Command M15 155s8 gt vport reset sigvpcirange lt vport id gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport reset sigvpcirange 8 1 0 Parameter lt vport The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt virtual port number gt id gt Resetting the signalling VCI range If you reset the virtual port s signalling VCI range the port will re learn the signalling VCI range supported by the remote device when it is enabled and a remote device is connected For more information about this parameter see Setting the signalling VPC VPI range on page 72 Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable a v
199. ge 3 1 0 32 100 M 770s3 gt vport enable 3 1 0 Before the vport parameter may be set it must be disabled as shown in the example Creating the P2MP PVC In this example we are using td traffic descriptor 5 and Trunk ID 150 which was defined in the steps above We are setting up a P2MP PVC from 1 1 0 114 to 2 1 0 115 and 3 1 0 115 Command M15 155s8 gt pve setup pmp lt vcilindex gt lt vci2index gt lt vciNindex gt lt trunkId gt lt fwd td gt Example M15 155s8 gt hardware trunkidrange 200 Module 1 M15 155s1 gt pvc setup pmp 1 1 0 114 25s ORS 3810 394 5 S50 65 Module 2 M15 155s2 gt pvc setup pmp 1 1 0 114 QI OILS TL50 5 Module 3 M15 155s3s1 gt pvc setup pmp 1 1 0 114 3 1 0 115 1 150 5 Parameters lt vcilindex gt The first VCL for the PVC connection in the format lt slot port number vpi vci gt lt vci2index gt lt vciNi The branch VCLs until the Nth branch for the PMP ndex gt PVC connection in the format lt slot port vpi vci gt lt trunkId gt The identifier of the P2MP call It must be the same on both the root module and the branch module The format is lt slot gt lt index gt where the slot is the slot of the root port and the range of trunk IDs are determined by the module that holds the root lt fwd td Index of the traffic descriptor for the forwarding direction rx for the root VCL and tx for the branch VCLs If the P2MP PVC is from one module to another the PVC setup must be p
200. ge The VPI range assigned to a physical port VPC VPI The VPC VPI range used for VPCs Virtual Path Connections Range VCI Range The VCI range assigned to a physical port Cell Mode The empty cell generation mode for a physical port This can be either Idle or Unassigned The default setting is Unassigned Payload The payload scrambling mode for a physical port This can be Scrambling enabled or disabled The default setting is set to On Media Type The media type for a physical port MMF Multi Mode Fiber cable SMF Single Mode Fiber cable UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair cable Coaxial BNC cable Media Mode The Media Mode shows the status of the physical port which is normally UP Last Change The Last Change shows the time when the port entered it s current state The time format dd hh mm ss ds Cell The Cell Mapping shows the mapping mode used for the Mapping transport of ATM cells over DS3 The Mapping mode is either DS3 only ADM ATM Direct Mapping or PLCP Physical Layer Convergence Protocol The default setting is ADM Line Code The supported Line Code is always B8ZS DS3 only Cable The BNC coaxial cable length can be either 0 225 feet or Length 225 450 feet The default setting is 225 450 feet DS3 only Tx Clock The transmit clock source is either local derives the clock DS3 only internally or loop derives the clock from the received signal The default setting is local Loopback Loopback is either line loopback t
201. ginning of the file It consists of a set of strings of pre defined format and contents The purpose of the Script File Header is to identify the file as a CLI Script file and to specify the Script File name in the Flash File System at the file download The Script File Header The Script File Header looks like the following TYPE M770 ASCII FILE NAME lt file name gt END e The first string TYPE notifies the switch that the file is a CLI script This string has to be the very first string in the script file e The second string NAME specifies name which will appear as the script file s name in the M770 ATM Flash File System The lt file name gt is be a set of up to 32 printable ASCII characters which doesn t contain white spaces The name is case sensitive e The third string END simply closes the Script File Header Any number zero or more of comment strings that begin with in the first column of the string may be included in any place of the script file below the TYPE string The comment strings are ignored when the script is executed The Script File Command List The Script File Command List is simply a list of usual CLI commands where each command is terminated by Carriage Return lt Enter gt Comment strings lines that start with the character may be inserted in any place of the Command List They are ignored when the script is running Empty strings are interpreted as pressing on lt Ente
202. gister this address with the LAN Emulation Server LES that is hosting the Emulated LAN ELAN the LEC wishes to join The M770 ATM Switch management LEC by default is assigned to register to an Ethernet ELAN named default Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 163 Chapter 11 Managing the Management LEC Viewing information about the management LEC To view information about the management LEC use the lane lec show command Command M15 155s8 gt lane lec show The lane lec information command displays the information described in Table 11 1 Table 11 1 Output from the lane lec show command Field Description BIA The switch s BIA which will be used as the management LEC s MAC address if the LAA address is not set LAA The LAA which will be used as the management LEC s MAC address if set If zeros are displayed the management LEC will use the BIA LEC State The operational state of the management LEC e Initial State e LECS Connect e configure e join e initial Registration e bus connect e operational This is the final state of the LEC ELAN name The name of the ELAN that the management LEC is actual currently registered with ELAN name The name of the ELAN that the management LEC will configured attempt to register with when it is restarted ELAN type The type of ELAN that the management LEC is currently actual registered with LAN type The type of EL
203. gle parameters svce parameters and all the timers for the pysical level Changes won t take effect until the next reboot except for timers restrict transit flag and PGLE parameters For logical levels changes will take place immediately Note Make sure the admin status of that level is down when you use this command on the logical level Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 145 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing PNNI Interfaces Showing all PNNI interfaces Use the following command to display the current configuration of the PNNI interfaces Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config interfaces show Examples Port Interfac PNNI Port Aggr VP Admin Weight Id e Index Toke Cap CBR RtVB NrtVB ABR UBR R R 1 6148 06 01 00 0 True 504 5040 5040 504 504 00 0 0 0 2 6150 06 02 00 0 True 504 5040 5040 504 504 00 0 0 0 3 6152 06 03 00 0 True 504 5040 5040 504 504 00 0 0 0 4 6154 06 04 00 0 True 504 5040 5040 504 504 00 0 0 0 5 6156 06 05 00 0 True 504 5040 5040 504 504 00 0 0 0 6 6158 06 06 00 0 True 504 5040 5040 504 504 00 0 0 0 7 6160 06 07 00 0 True 504 5040 5040 504 504 00 0 0 0 8 6162 06 08 00 0 True 504 5040 5040 504 504 00 0 0 0 9 6164 06 09 00 0 True 504 5040 5040 504 504 00 0 0 0 0 6166 06 10 00 0 True 504 5040 5040 504 504 00 0 0 0 i 6168 06 11 00 0 True 504 5040 5040 504 504 00 0 0 0 2 6170 06 12 00 0 True 504 5040 5040 504 504 00 0 0 0 3 6172 06 13 00 0 True 504
204. h the root module and the branch module The format is lt slot gt lt index gt Must bein the range of trunk IDs are determined by the module that holds the root lt fwd td gt Index of traffic descriptor for the forwarding direction rx for the root VCL and tx for the branch VCLs Freeing a PVC connection To free a PVC connection and associated VCLs use the pvc free command Command M15 155s8 gt pve free lt vcl_index gt lt all gt Use Either M15 155s8 gt pvce free lt vclindex gt 104 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 8 Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs lt vclindex gt Index is one of the VCLs of the PVC connection Note If PP PVC the PVC and associated VCLs are free If P2MP PVC if lt vclindex gt Root VCL the all PMP tree PVCs and their associated VCLs are free If lt vclindex gt Branch VCL the designated PVC and it sassociated Branch is free If last Branch PVC then Root VCL is free too Or M15 155s8 gt pvce free all to free all PVC connections and associated VCLs In order to free a PVC connection between two modules you must type the command example above in the CLI of each module Type the appropriate vcl_id for each module Listing the current PVC connections To list all current PVC connections which are set up on the M770 ATM Switch use the pvc show command Command M15 155s8 gt pvc show Output ZASI DA SSS VCLTSsso S a2 VCL2 Admin Oper
205. he CLI When returning to a previous Main S W version it is recommended to use the configuration file that was created using the previous version If a snapshot was not taken with the previous version a configuration file was automatically taken for you and stored in flash after downloading and rebooting the module with the latest Main S W version This file is called oldconfiguration X Y Z where X Y Z is the Main Software version To return to a previous version you need to perform the following 1 Change the main image that will be run on the next reboot by using the flash default command Command M15 155s8 gt flash default lt filename gt Example M15 155s8 gt flash default m770ATM 2 0 16 Parameter lt filename gt The name of the image that the M770 ATM Switch will next run 2 Restore the appropriate configuration file the one that was used with the version changed in step 1 above by typing the following Command M15 155s8 gt gt flash config lt filename gt Example M15 155s8 gt flash config oldconfiguration 1 2 14 Parameters lt filename gt The name of the configuration file that you wish to activate 3 After changing the configuration file and main image on each of the modules in the M770 ATM switch reboot the switch using the system reboot switch command to run the previous version Note It is recommended that all modules in the M770 ATM switch use the same software version To check which software is
206. he authorized manager 178 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 12 Managing SNMP Deleting an authorized destination station To delete an authorised manager station from the SNMP Allowed Table use the snmp secure allowed delete command Command M15 155s8 gt snmp secure allowed delete lt index gt Example M15 155s8 gt snmp secure allowed delete 1 Parameter lt index gt The index number for the NMS that received the trap The index value must be an integer in the range 1 to 15 Disabling the authorized managers table To disable the SNMP secure mode use the snmp secure allowed disable command Command M15 155s8 gt snmp secure allowed disable D Note This command takes immediate effect Enabling the authorized managers table Before enabling SNMP security you should ensure that you have up your NMS in advance as an authorized managers in the Allowed Secure Table otherwise you will not be able to manage the M770 ATM Switch via SNMP To enable the SNMP secure mode use the snmp secure allowed enable command Command M15 155s8 gt snmp secure allowed enable Output SNMP secure mode disabled Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 179 Chapter 12 Managing SNMP 180 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 13 LANE Services This chapter describes the features of the LANE Services in an Avaya M770 ATM Switch LANE Components in an Avaya M770 ATM Switch Each module
207. he details of all SVCs use the vport connections svcs command Command M15 155s8 gt vport connections svcs nomesh addr td lt vport id gt src dst lt vportid gt dir Example M15 155s8 gt vport connections svcs nomesh addr 8 1 0 Parameters nomesh Lists SVCs passing through the vport except for LANE mesh SCVs addr Lists the ATM addresses where available td Displays the ATM Traffic Descriptor lt vport id gt Lists all SVCs passing through the vport lt vport id gt Lists the incoming outgoing SVCs from to the vport src dst lt vport id gt Lists all SVCs between the two vports lt vport id gt lt vport id gt Lists all SVCs from the 1st vport to the 2nd vport lt vport id gt dir Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 89 Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports The vport connections svcs command displays the information described in Table 6 7 Listing permanent virtual circuits To list the details of all PVCs enter the vport connections pvcs command Command M15 155s8 gt vport connections pvcs td lt vport id gt lt vport id gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport connections pvcs 8 2 0 Parameters Displays the ATM Traffic Descriptor lt vport id gt Lists all PVCs passing through the vport lt vport id gt Lists all PVCs between the two vports lt vport id gt Note When the above command is used both PVCs that are enabled and disabled will be listed The vport connections
208. he receiver loops back the DS3 only received line signal or payload loopback the receiver loops back the received payload or none The default setting is none 42 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 5 Managing Physical Ports Displaying Counter Information for a Physical Port You can view general counter information for all physical ports by using the command pport show counters There are two additional counter commands available only for DS3 modules that will display DS3 specific counter information pport show ds3counters pport show plcpcounters Displaying counter information for all physical ports To display counter information for all physical ports enter the pport show counters command Command M4 DS3s8 gt pport show counters Output Physical Port Counters Port TX Rx TX Rx Rx ID Cells Cells Discar Discar Errors ds ds 8 0 151971 128993 0 0 0 8 1 0 0 0 0 0 8 2 0 0 0 0 0 eee 279163 101045 0 0 0 8 4 310163 131011 0 0 0 Port 5 Backplane Port 0 Cpu The pport show counters command displays the information described in Table 5 2 Table 5 2 Output from the pport show counters command Field Description Port Id The physical port This is displayed in the format lt slot gt lt port gt Tx Cells The number of cells that have been transmitted through the physical port Rx Cells The number of cells that have been received through the physical port
209. her virtual ports can be created when you need them Connections are set up between virtual ports and you can perform operations on virtual ports such as enabling and disabling them The maximum number of non root vports that can be defined in the system is 32 The maximum number of vports root vports plus non root vports that can be defined on a physical port depends on the number of vpi bits configured for the module For example if the number of VPI bits is 3 then the maximum number of vports that can be defined on a physical port is 8 That is 1 root vport 0 and 7 non root vports 1 7 A virtual port will use a single VPI or a range of VPIs for all calls set up through that virtual port Note Only the root virtual port can have a range of VPIs Subsequent virtual ports can only be assigned a single VPI A virtual port has a range of VPIs so that e Itcan support a larger number of circuits than it could on the basis of its VCI range alone e It can contain several virtual paths that are to be tunnelled up to a certain point in the network after which they will diverge A virtual port in the M770 ATM Switch is represented by lt slot number gt lt port number gt lt virtual port number gt 302 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Appendix F Routing and Signalling Concepts For example 2 1 1 represents a virtual port number of 1 on physical port number 1 on module number 2 Root virtual ports are all
210. hould be zero Output Warning This request will change the peer group id It will also change the node level and the first byte of the node id to lt level scope in hex gt Do you want to continue Y N Setting PNNI peer group ID to default value Use the following command to set the PNNI Peer Group ID to its default value The default value is derived from the PNNI level and the switch s prefix The first byte of the peer group ID is the level indicator The following bytes must be prefixes of ATM End System Addresses as defined in the PNNI specification af pnni 0055 000 The peer group is encoded with the 104 n rightmost bits set to zero where n is the level Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config pg_id default lt level gt Output This request will set default value extracted from ATM address for peer group id Do you want to continue Y N PNNI PGLE Parameters The Peer Group Leader Election PGLE submenu is important in hierarchical PNNI where this protocol takes place while electing the PGL The most important parameter here is the Leadership Priority which indicates the priority of each node for becoming a PGL Leadership Priority of 0 indicates that the node will not become a PGL 152 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Showing PNNI PGLE parameters Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config pgle show lt level gt Output Svcc Table Level 1 Name Inde
211. ics displayed by the vport sig stats all command Field Description Setup Attempts e Count of call SETUP messages transmitted and received e not including retransmissions Note the same cause For the following fields cause values received and transmitted on RELEASE RELEASE_COMPLETE ADD_PARTY_REJECT or STATUS messages are counted does not apply to RELEASE_COMPLETE received in response to RELEASE with The Causes are detailed in the UNI 3 1 ATM Forum Specification Unavailable Routes Causes 1 2 3 88 Unavailable Resources Causes 35 37 38 41 45 47 49 51 58 63 92 Called Party Events Causes 17 18 21 22 23 27 31 Message Errors Causes 10 36 81 82 89 96 97 99 100 101 104 111 Also includes e call reference length errors e all reference flag incorrectly set to 1 on received SETUP e call reference unknown on received RELEASE COMPLETE e SETUP received for call already in progress e message too short Calling Party Events Causes 28 43 57 65 73 78 91 93 Timer Expired e Cause 102 received e Any network timer expiry e Local timer expiries Restarts RESTART receptions and transmissions Active Calls Number of active switched calls incoming and outgoing Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 83 Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Table 6 6 All protocol statistics displayed by the vport sig stats all c
212. id gt lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt all Displays all protocol statistics for the virtual port see Table 6 5 If a11 is omitted only high level statistics are displayed see Table 6 5 The vport sig stats command displays the high level statistics see Table 6 5 The vport sig stats all command displays all protocol statistics for the virtual port see Table 6 6 Table 6 5 High level statistical output from the vport sig stats command Field Description Statistics Info The number of times signalling has been started and stopped on the virtual port Stack up count The number of times signalling has come up since it was last started on the virtual port Stack down count The number of times signalling has gone down since it was last started on the virtual port Number of restarts The number of times signalling has been restarted since it was last started on the virtual port Q SAAL up count The number of times Q SAAL data link protocol has established a link to its peer since it was last started on the virtual port Q SAAL down count The number of times Q SAAL data link protocol has lost the connection to its peer since it was last started on the virtual port Signalling type The signalling version on this virtual port i e UNI 3 1 Signalling side The signalling profile on this virtual port i e Network 80 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Gui
213. idth allocated according to SGCAC 38 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 5 Managing Physical Ports This chapter describes how to use the command line interface to manage and configure physical ports For information about how to access and use the M770 ATM Switch command line interface see Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface Listing Information About All Physical Ports You can view information about all of the physical ports When a module is installed in the M770 ATM Switch default physical ports are created for all of its ports Each of these default physical ports is assigned a physical port id The physical port id consists of the slot number in which the module is installed and the port number Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 39 Chapter 5 Managing Physical Ports To display information for all physical ports enter the pport show command Command M15 155s8 gt pport show Output Physical Port Information Port Admin Oper Speed Framing VPI VPC VPI VGL Id State State Kbps Mode Range Range 8 0 Up Up 0 0 0 4095 0 1023 851 Up Down 155520 Sonet O02 O gt 1023 8 2 Up Down 155520 Sonet 0 67 ESS 0 1023 8 3 Up Down 155520 Sonet Oe eames 0 42023 8 4 Up Down 155520 Sonet Ben FJ Sa 01023 8 13 Up Down 155520 Sonet LO s COs 10231 8 14 Up Down 155520 Sonet Vasa 0 1023 8 15 Up Down 155520 Sonet 0 7 aaa 0 1023 8 16 Up Down 155520
214. ied ELAN Changing the Maximum Number of LESes in an ELAN This command is only valid if the specified ELAN supports distributed LANE Services You must be aware of the following if you change the number of distributed LESes that the ELAN supports e If the maximum is increased the change will take effect immediately and additional standby LES es will be promoted to active if there are any e If the maximum is decreased the change will not affect the number of LESes currently providing LE Services but rather will determine whether active LESes which get timed out get re admitted or replaced by a standby LES Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 223 Chapter 16 Managing an ELAN To change the maximum number of LESes in an ELAN enter the lane elan maxles command Command 15 155s8 gt lane elan maxles lt name gt lt maxles gt Example M15 155s8 gt lane elan maxles accounts_elan 5 Parameters lt name gt The name of the ELAN that supports distributed LANE Services The name must be 32 characters or less lt maxles gt Themaximum number of LESes supported in this ELAN The largest value allowed is 10 The default value is 5 If this last parameter is omitted then the current maximum number of LESes will be displayed for the selected ELAN Note The above change does not affect the ELAN until the next time it is activated LANE 2 0 Capability The LANE 2 0 capability of an ELAN is by default aut
215. image that the M770 ATM Switch will load use the flash loader command Command M15 155s8 gt flash loader lt filename gt Example M15 155s8 gt flash loader boot_loader 1 2 7 Parameter lt filename gt Thename of the default boot loader image that the M770 ATM Switch loads Note This command checks the integrity of the selected image therefore it may take a few seconds for the cursor to return 246 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 19 Upgrading Avaya M770 ATM Switch Software Activating a configuration file You can restore an old configuration file stored in the flash directory that was generated with the system snapshot command To activate a configuration file use the flash config command Command M15 155s8 gt flash config lt filename gt Example M15 155s8 gt flash config new_cfile Parameters lt filename gt The name of the configuration file that you wish to activate Note The restored configuration file will only be activated when the switch is next rebooted Note After activating a new configuration file and performing a reset to the module the module takes longer than usual to boot because it is using the new values Because of this when activating a configuration file that has switch wide parameters such as the ATM prefix or IP address different from the current RAM settings the module needs to be alone in the switch If there are other modules in the switch the module
216. in the Avaya M770 ATM Switch can host one LECS and multiple combined LES and BUS This means that on one switch there can be several resilient LECS and for one ELAN several distributed LES The LES does not have to reside in the same device as the LECS The elected master module in each switch hosts the management LEC For a list of the factory configured default settings for the LANE components in an M770 ATM Switch see Appendix A Default Settings on a New Avaya M770 ATM Switch LANE configuration file config data A module s LANE configuration is saved in a flash file called config data After a change is made to the module s LANE configuration it is written to this file If there is not enough room in flash memory greater than 14 files or not enough memory left for new LANE changes to be saved you will receive the following message There is not enough room in flash to save your latest change If a reset occurs this change will be lost If this occurs you need to delete at least one of the unused files in flash in order for the LANE configuration to be saved Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 181 Chapter 13 LANE Services LANE 2 Capability LANE servers in M770 ATM switch are capable of supporting LUNI 2 0 By default each ELAN supported by the M770 LECS is configured in auto mode meaning that the first LES that registered at the LECS for this ELAN determines whether the ELAN would use a LUNI 1
217. in the usual way using the command td setup on the required modules If one of the specified VCLs already exists this VCL s traffic descriptors will be used in preference to any other VCLs specified by the user If both VCLs already exist their traffic descriptors must be compatible that is the transmit and receive traffic descriptor identifiers for the command to succeed 102 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 8 Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs To create a PVC connection use the pvc setup pp command Command M15 155s8 gt pve setup pp lt vcllindex gt lt vcl2index gt lt tdl gt lt td2 gt Examplel Setting up a PP PVC between 2 ports on the same module M15 155s8 gt pve setup pp 8 1 0 1001 8 2 0 1002 6 2 Example2 Setting up a PP PVC between 2 ports on different modules but on the same switch M15 155s8 gt On module 8 M15 155s8 gt pvce setup pp 8 1 0 1001 9 1 0 1002 6 2 M15 155s8 gt On module 9 M15 155s9 gt pvce setup pp 9 1 0 1002 8 1 0 1001 2 6 Parameters lt vcllindex gt The first VCL for the PVC connection in the format i lt slot port number vpi vci gt lt vcl2index gt The second VCL for the PVC connection in the format lt slot port number vpi vci gt tdl This refers to the transmit traffic descriptor of the first VCL and the receive traffic descriptor of the second VCL on the PVC connection td2 This refers to the receive traffic descriptor of the first VC
218. ing Started imeota is ante Beal ESEE P AERE a n EENE E rE ER a dees 9 Powering up the Avaya M770 ATM Switch s ss sssssssssssssssssresressessesnssseesesses 9 Managing an Avaya M770 ATM Switch s s ss ssssssessssiesssssessesrersessesnsssesseesesses 9 Management from a local or remote console sssssssssssessessissiseeseese 9 Management from a network management station cce 10 Setup Procedures on an Avaya M770 ATM SWitch ccccsccceseseeeteteens 10 Setting the IP address vv csieceieeevee sees seen evesscesetgs En r E 11 ATM Port Configura tioti cis tevsrescbiseue sores coaversnebecsnessnse cvsdatesstsstnacseesteehcuties 12 Setting the virtual port to its default configuration 0 0 12 Connecting to a device supporting ILMI ou ccceceeeeteteeee eens 12 Connecting to a device not supporting ILMI 0 cece tees 12 Routing Configuratio Msiingie iea SEE 13 PNNI Configuration sssini msi ioeie 13 Flat PNNI Configuration s sssssessessessesseesiesissesssesiertenressesseseesne 13 Configuring Hierarchical PNNI ssssssssssssesssssssissessesrsesiesessee 14 Connecting to an end station or edge device not supporting IEM eer coh tes sees A a e AAP HAA ced 15 Setting up LAN Emulation cc cece cece ities hee iai elii iesieta 16 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Contents Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Recommended Redundant LANE Services Setup cceccseseees 17 Example for LANE Configuration
219. ip_address gt The IP address of the remote TFTP server lt filename gt The full name of the file on the TFTP server If the file is contained in a sub directory the complete path and filename must be supplied lt gateway gt The gateway through which you should perform the download lec through the LANE Client mspv through the M SPV M SPX M SPS optional default value lec Uploading over TFTP In order to upload over TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol the remote file server must be accessible from the ELAN to which the management LEC belongs or from the MSPV Ethernet Sideband port To verify this connectivity you should ping from the file server to the IP of the LEC or to the IP of the MSPV To upload a file over TFTP use the system upload tftp command Command M15 155s8 gt system upload tftp lt ip_address gt lt flashfile gt lt destination_filename gt lt gateway gt Example M15 155s8 gt system upload tftp 194 31 222 23 m770ATM m770ATM_new Parameters lt ip_address gt The IP address of the remote TFTP server lt flashfile gt The full name of the filein flash memory lt destination_filename gt The full destination file name on the remote TFTP server If the file is contained in a sub directory the complete path and filename must be supplied lt gateway gt The gateway through which you should perform the upload e lec through the LANE Client e mspv through the M SPV M SPX M SPS optional def
220. irtual port see Disabling a virtual port on page 65 To reset the signalling VCI range for a virtual port use the vport reset vcirange command Command M15 155s8 gt vport reset vcirange lt vport id gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport reset vcirange 8 1 0 Parameter lt vport id gt Thevirtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 77 Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Resetting the VPI range If you reset the virtual port s VPI range and the remote device is an end station the port will re learn the VPI range supported by the end station when it is enabled and a remote device is connected For more information about this parameter see Setting the VPI range on a root virtual port earlier in this chapter Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable a virtual port see Disabling a virtual port on page 65 To reset the VPI range for a virtual port use the vport reset vpirange command Command M15 155s8 gt vport reset vpirange lt vport id gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport reset vpirange 8 1 0 Parameter lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt sot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt Resetting the Waitqsaal parameter For more information about this parameter see Setting the QSAAL wait parameter on a virtual port ear
221. isabled or the physical layer is down NoContact The physical layer is up but the remote ILMI entity is not responding CStartSent The M770 ATM Switch is attempting to start an ILMI dialogue a cold start trap has been sent GNTimeout The M770 ATM Switch has received no response to a getnext request from the ILMI prefix table of the remote device GetRemoteInfo The M770 ATM Switch is interrogating the remote device to determine link characteristics SwDoRegPrefix The M770 ATM Switch telling the remote device about the switch prefix of the M770 ATM Switch SwWaitAddress The M770 ATM Switch has set the prefix and is waiting to receive the address from the remote device SwHaveAddress The M770 ATM Switch has received the address from the user side SwToSwPause There is a pause in the ILMI dialogue between two switches Ready ILMI is up on an UNI link not between two switches InterSwitch ILMI is up on a link between two switches NoPrefixes ILMI has tried repeatedly to tell the remote device its prefix without success It will try to bring signalling up but remains in this state Disabled ILMI is disabled on this port Shutting Down Disabled Port is in the process of disabling ILMI on this port 58 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Listing the link configuration information for all virtual ports You can view the link configuration information for all virtual
222. it for PGLE when it is operating in overload state Reachable Indicates whether the node is reachable Reasons for a node to be unreachable are indicated in General topology information on page 124 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 127 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Global Topology PTSEs The following command displays the database of PTSEs Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni topology ptse lt index gt Parameter lt index gt Index of specific ptse 0 for all This is optional parameter to show the ptse in full format mode Example M15 155s8 gt route pnni topology ptse Output Ptse table Orig Node Id 60 a0 39 84 0f 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 40 00 00 00 6 00 00 40 00 Slot Index 0 Index Ptse Id Type Seq NumLife TimeCheckSum 1 0x00000001 nodalInformation6696756137 2 0x02000003 internalReachableAddress10265655917 3 0x02000005 internalReachableAddress6696751421 Orig Node Id 60 a0 39 84 0f 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 40 00 00 00 6 00 00 40 00 Slot Index 3 Index Ptse Id Type Seq NumLife TimeCheckSum 4 0x34000008 horizontalLinks111056758 Orig Node Id 60 a0 39 84 0f 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 40 00 00 00 6 00 00 60 00 Index Ptse Id Type Seq NumLife TimeCheckSum 5 0x00000001 nodalInformation211066922 6 0x02000003 internalReachableAddress1108416206 7 0x94000007 horizontalLinks111066918 Done This command lists all the PTSEs in the local database It organizes them by their originator
223. itch to help you configure PVPs This is the ability to change the maximum number of VPIs on the module For example the default configuration for the M15 155 is 3 bits for the VPI range and 12 bits for the VCI range This gives you a total of 8 VPIs 23 to play with If more VPIs are needed you can steal them from the VCI range By using the command hardware vpivcirange you can allocate up to 6 bits for the VPI range 26 or 64 VPIs For more information on changing the VPI and VCI bit range please see section Managing the number of VPI and VCI bits on page 98 For our examples it is assumed that the module is an M15 155 and its VPI and VCI bits are set to 3 and 12 accordingly Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 293 Appendix D Creating PVPs The next three subsections explain how to setup a PVP on the M770 ATM switch Define a VPI range for VP switching By default all VPIs on a module are used for VC switching and VP switching is disabled The following command defines the range of VPIs that will be used for Virtual Path VP switching for all ports on the module The command must be executed on all modules that will perform VP switching For our examples we need to configure the VPI range 5 7 for VP switching Command M15 155s1 gt hardware vpcvpirange lt minVpcVpi gt Example 1 Module 1 M15 155s1 gt hardware vpcvpirange 5 Example 2 Module 1 M15 155s1 gt hardware vpcvpirange 5 Module 2 M15 155s2 gt h
224. itch will be wiped 270 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Appendix B Using BOOT Loader How the BOOT Loader Command line Interface Works The command line interface provides a set of commands that you can use to configure the BOOT Loader in a M770 ATM Switch These commands are arranged in a hierarchy such that related commands are grouped together in a single functional group A functional group can also contain one or more functional groups and so forth When you login to the BOOT Loader command line interface you will be placed at the root of the hierarchy To perform an operation using a command you will need to specify the full hierarchical path followed by the command For example M15 155s8 gt hardware wipe This command shows hardware wipe commands that are contained in the hardware functional group Alternatively you can descend the hierarchy by typing M15 155s8 gt hardware This will cause the prompt to change displaying the position in the hierarchy Monitor hardware gt You can now perform the command simply by typing wipe Monitor hardware gt wipe The advantage of descending the hierarchy is that you can perform multiple related commands without having to type them out in full that is specifying their full hierarchical path Table B 1 lists the commands that are used to navigate the hierarchy Table B 1 Navigational commands Command Description top Returns you to the root of the hiera
225. l be used for the virtual port The upper range can be 0 1 3 or 7 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 73 Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable a virtual port see Disabling a virtual port on page 65 Setting the QSAAL wait parameter on a virtual port This parameter changes this vport to wait indefinitely for an incoming QSAAL connection By default this parameter is disabled To set the waitqsaal parameter on the virtual port use the vport set waitqsaal command Command M15 155s8 gt vport set waitqsaal lt vport id gt on loff Example M15 155s8 gt vport set waitgqsaal 8 1 0 on Parameters lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt on off Turns waitqsaal parameter On or Off Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable a virtual port see Disabling a virtual port on page 65 74 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Resetting Virtual Port Parameters You can reset a virtual port parameter so that the value returns to the default value When the virtual port is re enabled ILMI will where possible attempt to learn a value for the parameter through its dialogu
226. l wordwrap enable Viewing the linewrap status To display the linewrap status use the terminal linewrap command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal linewrap Output no linewrapping 234 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 17 Managing System Commands Setting the linewrap To set the linewrap use the terminal linewrap command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal linewrap none pager terminal Example M15 155s8 gt terminal linewrap pager Parameter none The line wrapping is carried out by the terminal The M770 ATM Switch will not try to calculate how many lines have actually been used on the terminal In fact it will assume that no wrapping has occurred when performing pager functions pager When the line output by the M770 ATM Switch reaches the defined terminal length the M770 ATM Switch will insert a line break and assume that no line wrapping is carried out by the terminal terminal The line wrapping is carried out by the terminal The M770 ATM Switch will keep a record of the number of lines using the terminal width Viewing the prompt To display the current system prompt use the terminal prompt command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal prompt Output prompt is M15 155s8 Changing the prompt To change the system prompt use the terminal prompt command Example M15 155s8 gt terminal prompt Caj770 Output Caj770s8 gt Note The only value that should be changed is the prefix e
227. le the pager use the terminal pager enable command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal pager enable Output pager enabled 286 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Appendix B Using BOOT Loader Disabling the pager To disable the pager use the terminal pager disable command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal pager disable Output pager disabled Viewing the prompt To display the current system prompt use the terminal prompt command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal prompt Output prompt is Monitor Changing the prompt To change the system prompt use the terminal prompt command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal prompt Monitor_M770 Output Monitor_M770 gt Note The Boot Loader prompt is not saved when changed The next time the loader is run the prompt will revert to the default setting of Monitor Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 287 Appendix B Using BOOT Loader Viewing Software Version Information You can list information about the BOOT PROM and the BOOT Loader images that have been loaded on the M770 ATM Switch To view the software version information use the version command Command M15 155s8 gt version Output Avaya M770 ATM Switch Version Information MAC Address 00 40 0C 87 00 0E Boot ROM Version Lisliee Software Version 2 0 18 Build Time Sun Dec 26 21 13 21 IST 1999 Built By release Build Directory home0 users release Build Host 5 linalphal 288 Ava
228. lier in this chapter Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable a virtual port see Disabling a virtual port on page 65 To reset Waitqsaal for a virtual port use the vport reset waitqsaal command Command M15 155s8 gt vport reset waitqsaal lt vport id gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport reset waitqsaal 8 1 0 Parameter lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt 78 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Resetting all configurable parameters on a specific virtual port You can reset all configurable parameters for a specific virtual port to their default values Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable a virtual port see Disabling a virtual port on page 65 To reset all configurable parameters on a disabled virtual port to their default values use the vport reset all command Command M15 155s8 gt vport reset all lt vport id gt Parameter lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt Managing the Probe Method Setting the managing probe method for proprietary features You can set the method of probing that the switch will use to find proprietary features
229. ll resilient LECS are configured with the same i LANE services information Should the active LECS fail a newly elected active LECS can smoothly take over the running of the network No checking of database consistency between LECS is done by the switches Note Changing the LECS location may disrupt all LANE connections and any change will take effect immediately Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 191 Chapter 14 Managing the LECS To change the location and type of the local LECS use the lane lecs location local command Command M15 155s8 gt lane lecs location local wka lt selector gt simple resilient Parameters wka simple An active local simple LECS is created using the WKA Remote clients that make requests for the WKA will be routed to this LECS via PNNI lt selector gt simple An active simple LECS is created using the modules address with the specified selector wka resilient A resilient LECS is created This LECS will enter the election process and if elected will be the active LECS Remote clients that make requests for the WKA will be routed to this LECS via PNNI lt selector gt resilient A resilient LECS is created using the modules address with the specified selector The created LECS will enter the election process and if elected will be the active LECS Modules that are configured to use the elected resilient LECS will direct clients to this LECS Remote LECS When cr
230. lt elan name gt Parameters lt elan name gt The ELAN name that hosts the LES This parameter is case sensitive Example M15 155s8 gt lane les stats default Output Number of successful Join responses 23 Number of version not supported errors 0 Number of invalid request parameters errors 0 Number of duplicate LAN destination errors 0 Number of duplicate ATM address errors 0 Number of insufficient resources to grant errors 0 Number of access denied for security reasons errors 0 Number of invalid LEC ID errors 0 Number of invalid LAN destination errors 0 Number of invalid ATM address errors 0 Number of mal formed request 0 Number of registration failures 0 Number of LE_ARP_REQUEST frames received by the LES 4498 Number of LE_ARP_REQUESTs that the LES forwarded 2 Enabling or disabling a LES To enable or disable a LES use the lane les state command Command M15 155s8 gt lane les state lt elan name gt lt param gt Parameters lt e lan name gt The name of the ELAN that currently hosts the LES that you wish to change or display This parameter is case sensitive lt param gt To activate the LES enter either on or enable To deactivate the LES enter off or disable Note The above command will take immediate effect The command must be used with care as all LECs will be thrown off the ELAN hosted by the LES 204 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 15 Managing the LES BUS T
231. mation is then used to setup a point to point and point to multipoint VCC mesh between the BUSes LEC Assigned for a Distributed ELAN When the LEC starts up it will connect to the LECS in the usual way If there are several different possible LESes for an ELAN then the LECS will select which one of the distributed LES addresses to assign the LEC to One of the following methods can be configured 186 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 13 LANE Services Round robin This is the default method set when creating a new ELAN No user configuration is required The LEC is assigned to the next distributed LES address in sequence each distributed LES is used in turn LECs assignment to the most suitable LES is left to chance Group address User configuration is required Every distributed LES on the ELAN is assigned a group address Note the same group address is used by all the distributed LESes It is this address that is returned to every LEC by the LECS when requesting to join the ELAN The LEC will then connect with the nearest distributed LES if PNNI routing is enabled the switch that offers the least number of hops will be selected Longest Match with LEC address No user configuration is required The LES address supplied by the LECS is the one which best matches the ATM address of the LEC This in practice should also provide the nearest distributed LES to the requesting LEC Note this may no
232. mber of times signalling has been started and stopped on the virtual port Stack up count The number of times signalling has come up since it was last started on the virtual port Stack down count The number of times signalling has gone down since it was last started on the virtual port Number of restarts The number of times signalling has been restarted since it was last started on the virtual port Q SAAL up count The number of times Q SAAL data link protocol has established a link to its peer since it was last started on the virtual port Q SAAL down count The number of times Q SAAL data link protocol has lost the connection to its peer since it was last started on the virtual port Signalling type The signalling version on this virtual port i e UNI 3 1 Signalling side The signalling profile on this virtual port ie Network SSCOP Connection Events This counts the sum of e number of TNO_RESPONSE timeouts e number of establishment failures maximum number of TCC expiries or receipt of BGRE e number re establishment attempts receipt of BGN or RS PDUs SSCOP Errored PDUs This counts the sum of e invalid PDUs incorrect length invalid PDU type or not 32 bit aligned e PDUs resulting in MAA error codes A M and Q T and are discarded Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Table 6 6 All protocol statist
233. mmand Line Interface Scripts ccccccsesesecceceeececscseseseececesessneseeenenes 259 What CLI Scripts ATena ioiei oea piernas etan aai aata E aa paaa SEa LEa aasa 259 Structure of the CLI Script File sisihin 260 The Seript File Header si iscissiiaeciastnnatnci amid sirens 260 The Script File Command List srcssisisenaniiarndisa 260 CLI Script File Downloading and Maintenance cccceee cece 261 Running a CLS Crip testiste aaa etiigan aointean asien ki 261 Running a CLI script on a single module ccc cee 261 Monitoring CLI Script Execution ss sssssssesesseessseeseserrereereres 262 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide xi Contents Stopping a CLI Script Sisiane ep net e ni E a 262 Script Execution LOG a ir iraia asanes kisini baana 263 Running a CLI script on a multiple modules 0 0 00 eee 263 Remote Script Execution Status ccccceeeeseseeseeeeeeeeneees 265 CLI Scripts Restrictions isseire eana aea aE E EA 265 Appendix A Default Settings on a New Avaya M770 ATM Switch cece 267 Appendix B Using BOOT Loa det snein as cates se Gain heatrs esse ciate 269 Start Up Process nerean Seats raae aa aranana tas a Eai Ea iaai 269 Getting connected to the BOOT Loader s ss ssssssssssissiesssssssereeesese 269 How the BOOT Loader Command line Interface WorkS c cccceee 271 Command hierarchy nieistnienie ode ict d dense 272 Conventions used to describe commands cccscesecssceseeteeeeeeeeees 272 Using th
234. module or switch use the system reboot module switch command You will be prompted to confirm the operation Command M15 155s8 gt system reboot module switch Parameters module The module will be restarted losing all connections to the module switch The switch will be restarted losing all connections to the switch Example M15 155s8 gt system reboot module Output This will restart the module losing all connections do you want to continue y n Note When the M770 ATM Switch is rebooted all connections will be lost Viewing the current switch memory allocation You can view the current breakdown of memory allocation on the modules The total amount of memory is equal to the amount of RAM memory you have in the module To display the current M770 ATM Switch memory allocation use the system memory command Command M15 155s8 gt system memory Output Free memory 22000 kbytes Total memory 32768 kbytes Viewing time received from the time server A time server is a server that provides the date and time as specified by RFC 868 such as a UNIX machine running timed to the M770 ATM Switch For information about setting up a time server see Viewing or Changing the IP Time Server Address in Chapter 4 Managing Miscellaneous Commands To view the current time received from the time server use the system time command Command M15 155s8 gt system time Output The time is 14 28 04 1
235. mulation cccccsccscceseseeneneeseeeeteseseenenes 297 Communication on an Emulated LAN ccccccccceseececeseeeseceseeees 298 Discovering the ATM address of the LES ou 298 Discovering the ATM address of another LEC 298 Setting up the connection cccccceeseeeseseteseeteneesesesneeneseeees 298 Transmitting the data cnccssceicdecnncicceeeiiientee 298 Locating the LECS LES and BUS service cccceccesseseneeeeees 299 Appendix F Routing and Signalling Concepts 0 cece ceeseesesesssesesesesessseseseeeeeseeeee 301 Switching ATM cells through the ATM network eee 301 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide xiii Contents Appendix G Virtual Circuits and Virtual Paths ccc ieecccccseceesssecesesceessseeesssseesesens 301 Varta OLtS isthe Focees Ae eats see LNE T NTE E E ETETEA 302 DEI 2st ROR eta Nees ie Be a ERE ENR ot Sh TON ao 303 Setting UP SV CGS i poires ea EEEn EAEE vicar E E E a a a esa 303 Setting Address Prefixes to Match Hierarchical PNNI cccceees 307 Algorithm for Automatic Setting of ATM Prefixes 0 cc cece 307 Example torann n E e ae E E fis 307 ndek ee era e nera eea iae cosines E e soso roses c eth exes E EE aa loas OE 309 How t Contact U Sai a a a s a R aa aA 315 In the United States een an A A E E ES A 315 In the EMEA Europe Middle East and Africa Region 315 In the AP Asia Pacific Region oo ee eseeeeeeeeneneeeeeneees 317 In the CALA
236. munity ro delete 172 snmp community ro show 173 snmp community rw add 173 snmp community rw delete 173 snmp community rw show 173 snmp community show 172 snmp community trap set 174 snmp community trap show 174 snmp permngr add 175 snmp permngr remove 175 snmp permngr show 175 snmp permngr update 175 snmp secure allowed add 178 snmp secure allowed delete 179 snmp secure allowed disable 179 snmp secure allowed enable 179 snmp secure allowed show 178 snmp secure current 177 snmp secure show 176 snmp secure timeout 177 snmp show 171 summary info 29 summary lane 30 system breaklog 229 system breaklog clear 229 280 system default 230 system download serial 281 system download tftp 228 system download xmodem 273 281 system halt 229 system invariant 279 system memory 231 system reboot 232 system reboot sw 231 system snapshot 230 242 system test 280 system time 231 system time set 232 system time zone 232 system upload tftp 228 T td free 115 td setup CBR 113 td setup UBR 114 td setup VBR 114 td show 115 terminal lines 233 terminal linewrap 234 terminal pager 233 terminal pager disable 233 terminal pager enable 233 terminal prompt 235 terminal width 234 terminal wordwrap 234 tree 24 V version 241 vport connections all 89 vport connections pvcs 90 vport connections svcs 89 vport create 64 vport delete 65 vport disable 65 vport disable ilmi 66 vport disable
237. n Number 358 981 710 081 33 1 4993 9009 49 69 95307 680 31 70 414 8044 31 70 414 8013 00800 3122 1288 06800 13839 0800 8125 353 160 58 479 1 800 93 00 900 39 02 7541 9636 31 70 414 8045 31 70 414 8020 31 70 414 8049 Country Local Dial In Country Number Albania 31 70 414 8001 Finland Austria 43 1 36 0277 1000 France Azerbadjan 31 70 414 8047 Germany Bahrain 800 610 Ghana Belgium 32 2 626 8420 Gibraltar Belorussia 31 70 414 8047 Greece Bosnia 31 70 414 8042 Hungary Herzegovina Bulgaria 31 70 414 8004 Iceland Croatia 31 70 414 8039 Ireland Cyprus 31 70 414 8005 Israel Czech Rep 31 70 414 8006 Italy Denmark 45 8233 2807 Jordan Egypt 31 70 414 8008 Kazakhstan Estonia 372 6604736 Kenya Estonia 372 6604736 Kuwait 31 70 414 8052 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 315 How to Contact Us Comi Local Dial In Country Local Dial In Number Number Latvia 371 721 4368 Saudi Arabia 31 70 414 8022 Lebanon 31 70 414 8053 Slovakia 31 70 414 8066 Lithuania 370 2 756 800 Slovania 31 70 414 8040 Luxemburg 352 29 6969 5624 South Africa 0800 995 059 Macedonia 31 70 414 8041 Spain 34 91 375 3023 Malta 31 70 414 8022 Sweden 46 851 992 080 Mauritius 31 70 414 8054 Switzerland 41 22 82
238. n manage the switch Note The secure commands do not affect Telnet sessions access to a M770 ATM Switch Telnet sessions use password security Listing the status of the SNMP security You can list all NMSs that are assigned access as authorized managers Also displayed are the NMS s that are currently accessing the M770 ATM Switch For each NMS in the table the following information is displayed an index entry number for the NMS the address type of the NMS the IP address of the NMS and when the current NMS last accessed the M770 ATM Switch To display all the security information for the M770 ATM Switch use the snmp secure show command Command M15 155s8 gt snmp secure show Output Secure mode is currently Disabled SNMP Security Information currently active NMS s Index Type IP AddressTime Since Last Access H M S 1 IP 194 32 220 1290 02 50 2 IP 194 32 220 260 02 20 Secure mode is currently Disabled No entries specified in MStack secure allowed table 176 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 12 Managing SNMP Viewing or changing secure current table row timeout Timeout is the duration of time before the NMS s are removed from the secure current tables By default timeout is set to 300 seconds To display or set the timeout for security information use the snmp secure timeout command Command M15 155s8 gt snmp secure timeout lt timeval gt Output Current table row timeout is 300
239. n a separate switch and if there are less than 5 switches configure a LES on multiple modules in each switch Example for LANE Configuration The default LANE configuration of the Avaya M770 ATM Switch ELAN Ethernet ELAN named default LES BUS Ethernet LES named default LECS Remote at the well known address wka LEC Configured to join the Ethernet ELAN default Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 17 Chapter 2 Getting Started Following is a simple configuration example which will enable you to start working with the LANE services and to connect a network management station which uses SNMP and CajunView Management 1 You need to decide where you want the LECS The following command creates a local resilient LECS with priority 0 which advertises the well known address on the module while the LECS priority is 0 it will not be elected as active M15 155s8 gt lane lecs priority 0 To see all of the resilient LECS on the network type the following M15 155s8 gt lane lecs resilient show If the location of the LECS is resident on a different switch or module at the wka change the location of the LECS to be remote at the wka using the following command M15 155s8 gt lane lecs location remote wka If your management station is on an ELAN different than default you might need to create a new ELAN In order to create a new ELAN two things must be performed First an entry for the ELAN must be defined in the LEC
240. n download software updates via TFTP from the CLI determine how many S W Main images and Boot Loader versions are in flash memory To display a listing of the flash memory use the flash directory command Command M770s8 gt flash directory Output Flash Filing System contains 5 files BOOT 423865 m770ATMb1 2 0 3 TEXT 8611 config data do not delete MAIN C 1005795 m770ATM 1 1 7 MAIN C 1012725 m770ATM 1 2 14 CONFIG 1024 snapshot_1 1 The Main S W image is of the type MAIN and the means that this image will be used on the next reboot to see the current Main S W version type the command version The Boot loader image is of the type BOOT and the next to it means that this Boot loader will be used on the next reboot The M770 ATM module flash memory can hold a maximum of two Main S W versions and two Boot loader versions This means that before you can TFTP a new Main or Boot loader software version there can only be one of that type in flash memory To delete a file from flash memory use the flash delete command and confirm the deletion M15 155s8 gt M770s8 gt flash delete lt filename gt Command Example M15 155s8 gt M770s8 gt flash delete m770ATM 1 2 14 Parameter lt filename gt The name of the file you wish to delete from the flash directory 242 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 19 Upgrading Avaya M770 ATM Switch Software 3 In order to download via TFTP the remote file
241. n page 65 To set the signalling VPC VPI range used for SVPs on a root virtual port use the vport set sigvpcvpirange command Command M15 155s8 gt vp set sigvpcvpirange lt root vport id gt lt range gt Example Defining one vpi 6 to be used for SVPs on this virtual port 2 15 0 M15 155s8 gt vp set sigvpcvpirange 2 15 0 6 6 Parameters lt root vport Virtual port identifier in the form lt slot gt lt port gt 0 id gt lt range gt in the form dower bound gt lt upper bound gt dower bound gt must be the minimum VPI number for VP switching as defined by hardware vpcvpirange In this example if the hardware was configured to have 4 bits for VPIs and 11 bits for VCIs Managing the number of VPI and VCI bits on page 98 And the VPIs for VP switching was configured to be in the range of 6 15 refer to Managing VPI range for VP switching on page 99 Then the range of VPIs that is left for PVPs is 7 15 72 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Setting the signalling VCI range You can set the signalling VCI range used for SVCs on a virtual port Usually the VCI range is reduced in order to create PVCs on these VCs To increase the VPI range or vice versa please see the command hardware vpivcibits on page 98 Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable
242. nable the physical port Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 49 Chapter 5 Managing Physical Ports Configuring payload scrambling You can configure payload scrambling on or off The default setting on When payload scrambling is enabled the transmitted data will be passed through a self synchronizing scrambler with the polynomial x341 This provides security against false cell and frame delineation Note You must disable the physical port before you can change clear or reset any physical port parameters For more information about how to disable a physical port see Disabling a Physical Port on page 49 To configure payload scrambling for a physical port use the pport set payloadscrambling command Command M15 155s8 gt pport set payloadscrambling lt pport gt on off Example M15 155s8 gt pport set payloadscrambling 8 3 on Parameters lt pport id gt The physical port identifier in the form lt slot gt lt port number gt on off To specify the whether payload scrambling is on or off Specifying the framing mode for a port You can specify that the framing mode used for a physical fiber optic port is either Sonet or SDH The default setting is Sonet For DS3 modules you can specify that the framing mode used for a DS3 physical port is either CBIT or M23 The default setting for DS3 ports is CBIT Note You must disable the physical port before you can change clear or reset any physical port paramet
243. name gt auto lt atm addr gt Example M15 155s8 gt lane elan les elanl auto Parameters lt name gt The name of the ELAN auto Select only if an M770 LES will host the ELAN lt atm addr gt Enter the full ATM address of the LES that will host the ELAN Note You can set a specific automatic registering mode for an ELAN For more information see Changing the Automatic Registration Mode of an ELAN later in this chapter Changing the Automatic Registration Mode of an ELAN You can set the automatic registration mode for an ELAN The automatic registering modes are e resilient the ELAN will adopt the resilient automatic registering mode e distributed the ELAN will adopt the mode that supports distributed LANE Services e autosense the ELAN will adopt the mode from the first registering LES For more information about the above automatic LES address determination methods see Chapter 13 LANE Services To change the automatic registration mode of an ELAN use the lane elan autovers command Command M15 155s8 gt lane elan autovers lt name gt lt automode gt Example M15 155s8 gt lane elan autovers accounts_elan distributed ELAN autoregistration mode set to distributed Parameters lt name gt The name of the ELAN this must be 32 characters or less lt automode gt Select one of the following automatic registration modes resilient distributed or autosense If this last parameter is not entered then
244. nd PVPs Use the hardware trunkidrange command to display the current configuration of Trunk ID range Command M15 155s8 gt hardware trunkidrange Output Allowed reserved Trunk Id range 0 895 Configured reserved Trunk Id range 0 0 Current reserved Trunk Id range 0 0 Use the hardware trunkidrange lt maxTrunkId gt disable command to set the Truck ID range Command M15 155s8 gt hardware trunkidrange lt maxTrunkId gt disable Parameters lt maxTrunkId gt Maximum trunk ID for P2MP PVCs on all ports of the module disable The trunk ID reservation will be disabled after the next reboot i e the new range will be 0 0 Note Changes to the Trunk ID range applies to all ports of the module and they take effect only after the next reboot of the module Managing VPI range for VP switching When the user wishes to configure Virtual Path VP switching the VPI range has to be set to meet this need By default all VPIs are used for VC switching therefore the default configuration is Command M15 155s8 gt hardware vpcvpirange Output Configured VPC VPI VP Switching is disabled range Current VPC VPI range VP Switching is disabled To change the default VPI range for Virtual Path Connections VPC use the hardware vpcvpirange command Command M15 155s8 gt hardware vpcvpirange lt minVpcVpi gt Note These changes take effect only after the next reboot of the module Avaya M770 ATM Switch
245. ndix C Creating PVCs Limiting the Signaling SVC range for the virtual port Before a VCI may be used for a PVC the signaling SVC range on that vport must be limited to prevent this VCI from being used by an SVC In this example we are using the VCIs 114 and 115 so we will limit the signaling SVC range to VCI 100 Command M15 155s8 gt vport set vcirange lt vport id gt lt range gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport disable 1 1 0 M15 155s8 gt gt vport disable 1 2 0 M15 155s8 gt gt vport set vcirange 1 1 0 32 100 M15 155s8 gt vport set vcirange 1 2 0 32 100 M15 155s8 gt vport enable 1 1 0 M15 155s8 gt vport enable 1 2 0 Before the vport parameter may be set it must be disabled as shown in the example Creating the P2P PVC In this example we are using td traffic descriptor 5 which was defined in the steps above Command M15 155s8 gt pve setup pp lt vcilindex gt lt vci2index gt lt tdl gt lt td2 gt Example M15 155s8 gt pve setup pp 1 1 0 114 1 2 0 115 5 5 Parameters lt vcilindex gt The first VCL for the PVC connection in the format lt slot port number vpi vci lt vci2index gt The second VCL for the PVC connection in the format lt slot port number vpi vcdi gt lt td1 gt This refers to the transmit traffic descriptor of the first VCL and the receive traffic descriptor of the second VCL on the PVC connection lt td2 gt This refers to the receive traffic descriptor of the first VCL and
246. nt name of the flash file lt new_name gt The new name you wish to assign to the file Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 277 Appendix B Using BOOT Loader Hardware Commands This section describes hardware commands that are available in the BOOT Loader Wiping flash and eerom memory in an Avaya M770 ATM Switch To wipe non volatile memory in an Avaya M770 use the hardware wipe command Command M15 155s8 gt hardware wipe eerom flash all Parameters eerom Wipes the eerom memory This will clear all configuration information that has been setup in the switch flash Wipes the flash memory This will erase all the image files from flash memory all Wipes both the eerom and flash memory Note Use this command with care you cannot reverse the operation and the effect is immediate Note You must download a boot loader and main image if you wipe flash memory before you reset the switch Setting Displaying the speed for the serial port To display the current speed for the serial interface port use the hardware serial speed command Command M15 155s8 gt hardware serial speed Output M15 155s8 gt 9600 To set up the speed for the serial interface port use the hardware serial speed command and type the desired speed after the command as shown Command M15 155s8 gt hardware serial speed 4800 9600 19200 38400 Example M15 155s8 gt hardware serial speed 9600 Parameters 4800 38400 S
247. nt number of vpi bits 33 vei bits 12 Use the hardware vpivcibits lt vpibits gt lt vcibits gt command to change the maximum number of VPI and VCI bits that will be used for all ports on the module It takes effect only after the next reboot Command M15 155s8 gt hardware vpivcibits lt vpibits gt lt vcibits gt Example M15 155s8 gt hardware vpivcibits 4 11 Parameters lt vpibit gt The maximum number of VPI bits for all ports on the module lt vcibits gt The maximum number of VCI bits for all ports on the module The number of bits that can be used varies with each ATM module See the table below on the allowed parameters Table 7 1 Allowed Parameters for the hardware vpivcibits command Parameters M15 155 Modules M3 622 Modules Total Number of VPI VCI bits 15 16 VPI bit Range 0 6 0 7 VCI bit Range 9 15 9 16 98 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 7 Managing Module Hardware Managing Trunk ID range for P2MP PVCs When the you wish to set a P2MP PVC you need to assign trunk ID to the P2MP call manually The trunk ID is used as a unique identifier for the P2MP call on both the ingress module on which the root of the call is connected and on the egress modules on which the leaves of the call are connected Trunk IDs are defined on a module basis using the following commands They are used in the PVC setup for more details see Chapter 8 Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs a
248. nterface UND ATM User Network Interface Specification V3 0 af uni 0010 001 ATM User Network Interface Specification V3 1 af uni 0010 002 UNI Signaling 4 0 af sig 0061 000 ILMI Integrated Layer Management Interface ILMI 4 0 af ilmi 0065 000 Traffic Management Traffic Management 4 0 af tm 0056 000 PNNI Interim Inter Switch Signaling Protocol af pnni 0026 000 PNNI V1 0 af pnni 0055 000 LAN Emulation LAN Emulation over ATM 1 0 af lane 0021 000 LANE v2 0 LUNI Interface af lane 0084 000 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 7 Chapter 1 Introduction 8 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 2 Getting Started This chapter describes how to get started with an Avaya M770 ATM Switch This includes an overview of the management and configuration tasks that you should perform soon after installation Powering up the Avaya M770 ATM Switch During the system startup of an Avaya M770 ATM Switch the switch automatically performs a number of self tests on its internal hardware The startup process is documented in each module s Installation Guide which includes information about the self tests that are carried out and how the LED indicators on the switch indicate the status of the self tests If any non critical hardware self test fails then the Boot Loader will be entered From the Boot Loader you may be able to diagnose and remedy the problem For mor
249. number of terminal lines is set to 24 To display the current number of lines use the terminal lines command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal lines Output terminal ines 24 auto detected or user configured Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 233 Chapter 17 Managing System Commands Setting the number of lines To set the number of lines use the terminal lines command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal lines lt rows gt Example M15 155s8 gt terminal lines 48 Parameter lt rows gt The number of lines to be displayed on the terminal Viewing the terminal width By default the terminal width is set to 79 To display the current terminal width use the terminal width command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal width Output terminal width 79 auto detected or user configured Setting the terminal width To set the terminal width use the terminal width command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal width lt columns gt Example M15 155s8 gt terminal width 90 Parameter lt columns gt The number of columns to be displayed on the terminal Viewing the wordwrap status To display the wordwrap status use the terminal wordwrap command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal wordwrap Output wordwrapping enabled or wordwrapping disabled Setting the wordwrap To set the wordwrap use the wordwrap command Command M15 155s8 gt terminal wordwrap on enable off disable Example M15 155s8 gt termina
250. o Meaning that the first LES registers to this ELAN determines the capability of the ELAN To display and change the LANE 2 0 capability of an ELAN use the lane elan lane2 command Command M15 155s8 gt lane elan lane2 lt name gt onloff auto Parameters lt name gt The name of the ELAN Example M15 155s8 gt lane elan lane2 default Output Default s LANE 2 capability configured to auto actual on Note If the ELAN capability was changed dramatically e g from on to off or vice versa the ELAN has to be restarted in order for the change to take effect The restart of the ELAN may cause temporary disruption 224 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 16 Managing an ELAN MAX Frame Size LANE 2 0 capable servers can work with maximum frame size of 1516 and 1580 bytes The default configuration is 1516 bytes Use the lane elan maxframesize command to display or change the current configuration Command 15 155s8 gt lane elan maxframesize lt elan name gt 1516 1580 Parameters lt e lan name gt The name of the ELAN It must be 32 characters or less Example M15 155s8 gt lane elan maxframesize default Output Maximum Frame Size is 1516 Note The change of the max frame size of an ELAN does not affect the ELAN until the next time it is activated Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 225 Chapter 16 Managing an ELAN 226 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapte
251. o clear the log use the script log clear command Command M15 155s8 gt script log clear Output Done Running a CLI script on a multiple modules It is possible to run the same command script on several or all modules of the M770 ATM switch simultaneously Simultaneous execution of a script can significantly minimize effort needed for initial configuration of switch containing many modules In order to run a script on multiple modules connect to Master Agent module via a serial terminal Telnet or MSP X connection Note You should ensure that there is enough space in all of the modules flash file system see Chapter 19 before you download and run the script 1 Download the script file to the Master Agent module system download 2 Perform the script run command Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 263 Chapter 21 Command Line Interface Scripts On the Master Agent module the script run command has an additional optional parameter which specifies the set of modules that are required to run the same script Command 15 155s8 gt script run lt script file name gt log console delay lt delay value gt lt slot list gt all Parameters lt script file The name of the script file in the Flash File System eas as it appears in the output of the flash dir command log console The destination of the output of the executed commands contained in the script file If log specified the output will b
252. o display the current status of a LES specify the name of the ELAN that currently hosts the LES Command M15 155s8 gt lane les state lt elan name gt Example M15 155s8 gt lane les state default LES default is enabled Restarting a local LES and BUS Certain changes made to the characteristic of a LES are not immediate for these changes to take effect you must restart the LES Note When restarting a LES all attached LECs will be thrown off the ELAN hosted by the LES but they will rejoin the ELAN when the LES restarts if the LEC criteria is still met The restart command also affects the BUS functions To restart a local LES and BUS use the lane les restart command Command M15 155s8 gt lane les restart lt elan name gt Parameters lt elan name gt The name of the ELAN that currently hosts the LES that you wish to restart This parameter is case sensitive Changing the ELAN name that the LES will host You can change the name of the ELAN that is currently hosted by a LES The new ELAN must be somewhere on the network and be known to the LECS that your LES is hosting Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 205 Chapter 15 Managing the LES BUS To change the ELAN name that the LES will host use the lane les elan command Command M15 155s8 gt lane les elan lt old name gt lt new name gt Example M15 155s8 gt lane les elan marketing_eth mrk_eth Parameters lt old name gt The current name
253. odule whose port is being used to synchronize the ATM Switch Clock synchronization information of slot 8 The ports on this module are using a clock from the M SPS Port 1 is assigned as clock source ATM B From a module which cannot be used to synchronize the ATM Switch Clock synchronization information of slot 8 The ports on this module are using a local clock No ports on this module are driving clock source ATM A or Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 95 Chapter 7 Managing Module Hardware Note e OC 3 Modules M15 155F SF MS In order to provide DEFINITY support all the OC 3 modules in the chassis must be C S 2 0 or higher The C S of the module can be located on the unit s box or on the module itself If the module is already inserted in the M770 switch type the command summary info from the ATM module s Command Line Interface to see the C S version e Only ports 1 and 2 can be used by the M SPS to synchronize its clock All ATM ports can be used to connect the DEFINITY to the M770 ATM Switch e OC 12 Modules M3 622F SF Currently the DEFINITY does not support OC 12 connections however the M3 622 module may be used as backbone links between ATM switches Only M3 622 modules with C S 2 0 or higher can provide clock synchronization to the network or deliver clock to the switch Newer and older C S s of the modules can be mixed in the same chassis but the older modules will not be synchronized to the r
254. of signalling stack that will be used for the virtual port 70 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Setting the signalling VPCI range You can set a signalling VPCI range for a virtual port This range can only be changed on the root virtual port Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable a virtual port see Disabling a virtual port on page 65 To set a signalling VPCI range for a virtual port use the vport set sigvpcirange command Command M15 155s8 gt vport set sigvpcirange lt vport id gt lt range gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport set sigvpcirange 8 1 0 0 2 Parameters lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt lt range gt Selects the signalling VPCI range that will be used for the virtual port Setting the signalling VPCI base You can set a signalling VPCI Base for a non root virtual port This command enables the switch to interoperate with switches that use the VPI value for the VPCI in the setup signalling message The default VPCI value is 0 Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable a virtual port see Disabling a virtual port on page 65 To set a signalling VPCI base for a virtual port
255. of the ELAN that is hosted by the LES that you want to change This parameter is case sensitive lt new name gt The new ELAN that is somewhere on the network and is known to the LECS that the local LES will host This parameter is case sensitive Note The above command will take immediate effect The command must be used D with care as all LECs will be thrown off the ELAN hosted by the LES If a LEC is configured to use the old ELAN name then it must be reconfigured manually to use the new ELAN name Changing the LES registration mode Before you change the registration mode of a LES you must be aware of the mode of the ELAN that it will be hosting and that the choice of mode is supported by the device containing the LECS Refer to Table 15 3 a list of compatible LES and ELAN modes that should be used Table 15 3 Compatible LES and ELAN modes LES mode LECS ELAN mode distributed auto standby auto manual manual By default for the pre defined ELANs the LES mode is set to register automatically and the LES modes are set to distributed To change the registration mode of the LES enter the lane les mode command Command M15 155s8 gt lane les mode lt elan name gt distributed standby manual Example M15 155s8 gt lane les mode marketing_eth standby 206 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 15 Managing the LES BUS Parameters lt elan name gt distributed
256. of the script execution using the script showprogress command Command Output M15 155s8 gt script showprogress Script file execution progress 11 If the script is still running No script file execution in If the script file hasn t been run or progress Stopping a CLI Script You can abort a running script execution using the script stop command has already finished running Note The script will stop only when currently executed script command is finished 262 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 21 Command Line Interface Scripts Script Execution Log When script output was directed into a log use the script log show command to observe results of the script s commands running Command M15 155s8 gt script log show Output If the script file execution finished this command will print results of each command executed If no output was produced or the log was cleared see below the following message will appear Log is empty If the script execution is currently in progress the following message will appear This command can not be accessed for the moment because a script file is currently running You can use script stop command to abort the execution Execution progress 57 Note The script execution log will be destroyed automatically if isn t accessed during 30 minutes in order to release memory allocated for the log The log may also be cleared on demand T
257. of unsuccessful multicast forward connection attempts 0 LANE 2 0 Capability To display the LANE 2 0 capability of a LES you should type the following Command M15 155s8 gt lane les lane2 lt name gt onl off Parameters lt name gt The name of the ELAN which hosts the LES Example M15 155s8 gt lane les lane2 default Output LES BUS default has LUNI 2 capability Enabled The on off parameter shall be used when the LANE 2 0 capability has to be changed 208 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 15 Managing the LES BUS MAX Frame Size LANE 2 0 capable servers can work with maximum frame size of 1516 and 1580 bytes The default configuration is 1516 bytes Use the following command to display or change the current configuration Note You must not change the maxFrameSize of the ELAN to which the mangement LEC is joined to 1580 If you do so the LEC will not be able to join the ELAN and switch management will be lost Command M15 155s8 gt lane les maxframesize lt elan name gt 1516 1580 Parameters lt elan name gt The name of the ELAN hosted by the LES that you want to change Example M15 155s8 gt lane les maxframesize default Output LES default has max frame size 1516 Note The LES must already be disabled when you use this command The change only takes effect when the LES is enabled Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 209 Chapter 15 Managing the LES BUS 210 Avaya
258. olling isa mechanism used by the M770 ATM Switch to ensure that the same end station is still attached to it Since ILMI polling isan enhancement to ILMI when ILMI is disabled polling is also disabled Disabling ILMI multiple registration Disables the registration of the same address via ILMI on multiple ports To disable ILMI registration on multiple ports use the vport disable command Command M15 155s8 gt vport disable lt vport id gt ilmimultireg Example M15 155s8 gt vport disable 8 1 0 ilmimultireg 66 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Parameters Enabling ILMI on a virtual port lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt ilmimultireg ILMImultireg is an enhancement to ILMI when ILMI is disabled ILM Imultireg is also disabled By default i lmimultireg is enabled on a M770 ATM Switch To enable ILMI on a virtual port use the vport enable command Command Example Parameters M15 155s8 gt vport enable lt vport id gt ilmi M15 155s8 gt vport enable 8 1 0 ilmi lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt ilmi ILMI is a protocol used by a switch to learn about an attached device Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable a virtual port see Disablin
259. ommand Field Description Q93B Statistics The following 13 rows show errors detected in the contents of received messages Protocol Discriminator Errors The number of messages received with invalid protocol Discriminator either an unrecognized value or a value that did not match the protocol type in use on the signalling stack Call Reference Length Errors The number of messages received with call reference length errors Call Reference Flag Bad on Setup SETUP messages received with call reference flag incorrectly set to 1 Call Reference Errors The number of messages received with a call reference that was invalid This includes invalid use of the dummy and global call reference and incorrect call reference direction flags on these call references Message Passed along Requests The number of unrecognized messages received with the pass along request bit set Unrecognized Message Errors The number of unrecognized messages received and discarded Message Length Errors The number of messages received with incorrect message length fields Mandatory IE missing Errors The number of mandatory IE missing from message errors Unrecognized IE Errors The number of unrecognized IEs received General IE Errors The number of general IE errors this includes coding standard errors and IE length errors Mandatory IE Content Errors The number of man
260. on a remote device This can be either via the mib or the sysobject id library By default the method of probing is set to mib You will need to change the method of probing to sysobjectid if your remote device does not allow probing of its mib To set the method of probing for a virtual port use the vport probe command Command M15 155s8 gt vport probe lt vport id gt mib sysobjectid Parameters lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt mib Sets the method of probing for proprietary features on a virtual sysobjectid port either via the mib or the sysobject id library Displaying the method of probing for proprietary features To display the method of probing for a virtual port use the vport probe command Command M15 155s8 gt vport probe lt vport id gt Output Method of probing for proprietary features MIB Parameter lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 79 Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Virtual Port Signalling Information Virtual port signalling information To display signalling information for a virtual port enter the vport sig stats command Command M15 155s8 gt vport sig stats lt vport id gt all Example M15 155s8 gt vport sig stats 8 3 0 Parameters lt vport The virtual port identifier is displayed as
261. on described in Table 8 4 Table 8 4 Output from the pvp vpl show command Field Description VPL The unique VPL identifier in terms of slot port vpi X CONNECT ID The PVP connection that is using this VPL FWD TD The forward traffic descriptor identifier REV TD The reverse traffic descriptor identifier State The management state of the corresponding PVP connection 112 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 8 Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs Managing Traffic Descriptors A Traffic Descriptor defines the service category that will be used to transport traffic and the bandwidth that is required Each service category has its own set of parameters The M770 ATM Switch can support up to 32 different user configured traffic descriptors for the creation of PVCs The M770 ATM Switch supports three service categories e Constant Bit Rate CBR traffic such as uncompressed voice or video For CBR traffic you will need to specify the dedicated Peak Cell Rate PCR per second Bandwidth for CBR traffic is guaranteed for the duration of the connection e Variable Bit Rate VBR traffic such as compressed voice or video For VBR traffic you will need to specify a dedicated Peak Cell Rate PCR a Sustainable Cell Rate SCR and a Maximum Burst Size MBS Bandwidth for VBR traffic is guaranteed for the duration of the connection e Unspecified Bit Rate UBR traffic such as broadcast
262. onfigure Current 38 A0 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 16 00 38 A0 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 16 00 Level 2 30 38 39 04 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 B8 00 Level 3 28 30 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 B8 00 Level 4 20 28 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 B8 00 Level 5 18 20 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 01 B8 00 Setting PNNI node ID Use the following command to set PNNI node ID For the physical level this takes affect only after next switch reboot For logical levels this change requires that the node would be administratively down before the set takes place Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config node_id set lt level 1 5 gt lt node id gt Parameters Level 1 5 Internal level number 1 is the lowest physical node Node id 22 hexadecimal bytes separated by a decimal The first byte is the level 1 104 in Hex Setting PNNI node ID to default value Use the following command to set PNNI node ID to its default value The default value is derived from the switch s ATM address and the PNNI level that is currently being configured For the lowest level physical the scope level gets into the first byte of the node ID then comes the value 160 and then the full ATM address of the switch Further changes to the switch ATM address won t be reflected in the PNNI node ID unless s
263. or to the advertising node Reachable Indicates whether the node advertising the address is reachable If it is not reachable there is an incorrect connection in the network Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 129 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Field Description Scope This field indicates the scope of advertisement of the address The scope value indicates up to which hierarchical level the address will be advertised The lower the value is the wider the domain that gets the address Value of 0 indicates that the address will be advertised through out the entire PNNI domain The advertisement scope is mapped from the UNI scope For more details refer to the Static Routing chapter Global Topology Uplink Use the following command to display the global topology uplinks in the network Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni topology uplink lt level gt Output Node Id 38 A0 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 16 00 Aggregation Token 0 Uplink Port 02 12 00 00 gt Node Id 30 38 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 F6 00 00 0E 00 lt Node Id 38 A0 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 16 00 Aggregation Token 0 Uplink Port 09 13 00 00 gt 4 Node Id 30 38 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 F6 00 00 0E 00 lt The first node is the originating node its level scope is lower in the hierarchy than the destina
264. orts distributed LANE Services You need to change the ELAN autovers to distributed before you can change the LES address that a LEC will call For information about the different LES address formulas that can be selected for a distributed ELAN see LEC Assigned for a Distributed ELAN in Chapter 13 LANE Services Note You must manually change the ELAN autovers to distributed in order to execute the command If the ELAN is in autosense and has learned that the registration mode is distributed displayed as distributed this command will not be executed 222 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 16 Managing an ELAN To change the formula for LES address that a LEC will call enter the lane elan lesaddress command Command M15 155s8 gt lane elan lesaddress lt name gt lt les address formula gt lt group address gt Example M15 155s8 gt lane elan lesaddress accounts_elan longest_match Parameters lt name gt The name of the ELAN The name must be 32 characters or less lt les address formula gt Select one of the following formulas that the LEC will used to locate the LES address group_address round_robin or longest_match lt group address gt This parameter is only required if anew group ATM address is being supplied It must be a 20 byte ATM address Note If only the name of the ELAN is entered then the LES address formula currently in use will be displayed for the specif
265. otal number of control bytes received and sent SVCs In The number of incoming SVCs to the management LEC Out The number of outgoing SVCs from the management LEC Failure Out The number of outgoing SVCs that have failed to be set up 168 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 11 Managing the Management LEC The data plane information for the lane lec statistics command is shown in Table 11 3 Table 11 3 Output from the lane lec statistics command data plane Field Description unicasts In The number of data frames received and sent to a Out single destination multicasts In The number of data frames received and sent to a Out group MAC address broadcasts In The number of data frames received and sent to all Out MAC addresses packets sent to The number of packets sent to the BUS by the management BUS LEC BUS packets The number of packets sent to the BUS that have been discarded discarded errors In The number of data frames discarded for example due to an unrecognised MAC address or an illegal data format Out The number of oversize data frames that have been discarded unknown The number of data frames received for unassigned Link Layer protocols Control LLC protocols raw data In Out The total number of data bytes received and sent bytes Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 169 Chapter 11 Managing the Management LEC
266. ou add modules e Signaling security access control e Support for Single domain and Dual domain M770 ATM switch Upper Backplanes e SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol management over IP over LAN emulation using the following MIBs Management Information Bases MIBI RFC 1213 Interface MIB RFC 2233 ATM MIB ATM 2 MIB RFC 1695 SONET SDH MIB RFC 1595 PNNI MIB LEC MIB LANE Server MIB Private MIB DS3 MIB RFC 2496 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 5 Chapter 1 Introduction Supported Standards Operational Standards Safety Standards UL1950 United States CSA C22 2 No 950 Canada EN60950 Europe AS3260 AUSTEL TSO01 Australia EMI FCC Part15 Class A United States EN55022 Class A and B Europe VCCI Type 1 Japan EMS IEC801 2 ESD up to 8kV K IEC801 3 RFI 3V m IEC801 4 Electrical Fast Transients level 2 S Power amp Environmental Conditions IEC555 2 Power Factor Correction 5 IEC555 3 Ac Input Transients e Audible noise IS07779 paragraph 7 max 50dBA 6 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction ATM Forum Standards Approved ATM Forum Specs Specifications Physical Layer 155 52 Mbps SONET SDH STS 3c Physical Layer af uni 0010 002 Issued as part of UNI 3 1 622 08 Mbps Physical Layer af phy 0046 000 User Network I
267. owest priority and stop at the first match No Not permitted Permitted L Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 249 Chapter 20 Signaling Security Access Control Commands Note Once signaling security is enabled the default behavior is to reject calls Note Any Signaling Security configuration also has an effect on existing calls i e when setting up a security configuration you should be aware that any existing call that would not have been accepted once the configuration is set up will be torn down All Signaling Security related commands are located under vport sig sigsecurity gt CLI directory 250 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 20 Signaling Security Access Control Commands Signaling Security State Managing Signaling Security State The entire switch s signaling security can be set to Enabled or Disabled mode When the switch is in the Disabled mode all configured security parameters have no effect and calls are never rejected by the Signaling Security application The commands for managing the switch s security state are available only in the Master Agent MA module Command Command M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity disable M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity enable Displaying Signaling Security State Command Output M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity show Current overall signaling security configuration The switch security access
268. pecified by the address prefix command For logical levels the default value is derived from the lower level peer group ID The level gets into the first byte of the node ID then come 14 bytes of the lower peer group ID that this node would represent if it becomes LGN Then come the ESI 6 bytes of the physical system implementing this LGN The last byte is zero Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config node_id default lt level gt 150 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Examples Note This request will set default value extracted from ATM address for node id Do you want to continue Y N PNNI Operational Status The operational status of a physical node is always up The operational status of a logical node may be either up or down It will be up if the logical node is active i e the lower level node is PGL and the logical node is LGN This is determined by the Peer Group Leader Election PGLE protocol between the nodes at the lower level Peer Group To show the operational status of a node use the following command If the level parameter is omitted the operational status of all levels will be displayed Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config oper show lt level gt Output Admin Status Level 1 Up Level 2 Up Level 3 Down Level 4 Down Level 5 Down Note The operational status cannot be set by the user The user determines the administrative
269. ports on a module or for a specific virtual port Any virtual port information that is marked with an asterisk has been learned by the M770 ATM Switch during the ILMI dialogue with the remote device Information that is not marked with an asterisk has either been configured by the user or is the default setting for the virtual port To view the link configuration information about all virtual ports use the vport show config command Command M15 155s8 gt vport show config lt vport id gt Parameter lt vport The virtual port id gt This is displayed in the format lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt If a virtual port number gt parameter is not supplied then the link configuration summary information is displayed for all virtual ports Example M15 155s8 gt vport show config Output Virtual Port Configuration Information Virtual Admin OperILMIPollMultiStrictSig SSCOPWait for Port IdState StateEnabledModeRegAALRx WindowPeer SSCOP 8 0 0 Up UpNo DisabledOnOffDefaultNo 8 1 0 Down DownYesNoneOn OffDefault No 8 25 0 Up UpYes Port ESIOnOffDefaultNo 8 330 Up DownYesNoneOn OffDefault No 8 4 0 Down DownYesNoneOn OffDefault No The vport show config command displays the information described in Table 6 2 Table 6 2 Output from the vport show config command Field Description Virtual Port Id The virtual port This is displayed in the format lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt
270. put buffers 16K cells per slot input buffers 168K Virtual Channels per module 56K Virtual Channels per port M4 DS3 module features Supports a line distance of up to 137 meters of coaxial cable Supports Vport Virtual Port traffic shaping on DS3 ports For more information see Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports 30K Virtual Channels per module for both Permanent and Switched Virtual Circuits 16K cells per slot input buffers 32K cells per slot output buffers Additional 256K cells per slot output buffers for traffic shaping Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 3 Chapter 1 Introduction Software Features ATM Forum PNNI Private Network Network Interface protocol for routing within large ATM networks Support for ATM Forum hierarchical PNNI including all 4 base subsets of configurations Mimimum function single peer group Boarder node PGL LGN Boarder with LGN peer support Support for optional ATM Forum PNNI features Exterior addresses Alternate routing ATM traffic descriptors negotiating ATM Forum IISP Interim Inter switch Signalling Protocol for signalling between switches and static routing across the ATM network ATM Forum ILMI UNI 3 0 UNI 3 1and UNI 4 0 signalling selectable on a per port basis supporting point to point and point to multipoint Virtual Circuits Translation between UNI 3 0 UNI 3 1 and UNI 4 0 signalling Statistics for each Virtual Channel Virtual po
271. pvcs command displays the information described in Table 6 7 Table 6 7 Output from the vport connections command Field Description slot port vpi vci The physical port VPI and VCI that are assigned to the connection For a PVC this is the Virtual Circuit Link VCL rXcount The number of cells received on this connection PD Indicates whether or not packet discard is enabled N indicates that it is not enabled SCAT The service category that is used for the virtual circuit Up Time Indicates how long the virtual circuit has been active in days hours minutes seconds and hundredths of a second 90 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Table 6 7 Output from the vport connections command Continued Field Description Type The type of connection PP Point to Point SVC PMP Point to Multipoint SVC PVC PP Point to Point PVC PVC PMP _ Point to Miltipoint PVC RES Reserved circuit DD_802 5 LANE Data Direct Token Ring VC DD_802 3 LANE Data Direct Ethernet VC MC_802 5 LANE Multicast Token Ring VC MC_802 3 LANE Multicast Ethernet VC CONTROL LANE Control VC LES_MESH Distributed LES SVC mesh BUS_MESH Distributed BUS SVC mesh DIAGNSTIC Diagnostic ILMI ILMI SIG Signalling Viewing ILMI information for a virtual port To display ILMI MIB information for the remote end of a virtual port use the
272. r 17 Managing System Commands This chapter describes how to use the command line interface to manage the system and terminal commands For information about how to access and use the Avaya M770 ATM Switch command line interface see Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface Using System Commands This section describes system commands that are used to monitor or perform operations on the Avaya M770 ATM Switch You can carry out the following system operations e Download and upload microcode e View system exceptions e Controlled shutdown of the switch e Take a snapshot of the current system configuration e Reboot the switch e View memory allocations e View time received from time server e Set the module to its factory defaults Downloading over TFTP In order to download over TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol the remote file server must be accessible from the ELAN to which the management LEC belongs or from the MSPV Ethernet Sideband port To verify this connectivity you should ping from the file server to the IP of the LEC or to the IP of the M SPV M SPX M SPS Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 227 Chapter 17 Managing System Commands To download a software image over TFTP use the system download tftp command Command M15 155s8 gt system download tftp lt ip_address gt lt filename gt lt gateway gt Example M15 155s8 gt system download tftp 194 31 222 23 m770ATM Parameters lt
273. r a connection and then transmit the data To discover an ATM address the LEC consults its list of ATM stations that it has communicated with If the LEC cannot find the address it requires from its own list it will communicate with the LES for the required address When a LEC needs an ATM address it sends a LANE ARP Address Resolution Protocol request to the LES If the LES knows the ATM address it sends it to the LEC If it does not know the ATM address the LES may forward the address request to any LECs that are registered with it so that they can respond directly to the LES The LES will then forward the response to the LEC Setting up the connection When the LEC has discovered the ATM address of the required LEC it signals to the ATM network for a Virtual Circuit Connection VCC to that LEC Transmitting the data When the VCC is set up the LEC transmits its data through the ATM network to the destination LEC 298 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Appendix E Components in LANE Services Locating the LECS LES and BUS services An ATM network may contain several ELANs The network must only have one LECS and each ELAN must have one active LES and one BUS which may be part of a distributed LES BUS The LECS LES and BUS constitute the LANE Services These elements must reside on hosts that all the LECs on a network can access They can be located on the same host or on different hosts which may be one o
274. r changing the IP time server address cece eee 34 Using PING vs sscisicsnsassvasevectstaxsseasivoneeds sateedbssinsteensias secestbies ietenestetatasisoasins 35 Managing the IP Cache scsi ctcnkiathaeiadtidiiantin indiana cubits 36 Listing the contents of the Avaya M770 ATM Switch s IP ARP CACHE 3 pes AA T E O S shi bike TAES 36 Deleting an entry from the Avaya M770 ATM Switch s IP ARP fertel a1 PAE EEES E EE TEE E ES EE 36 Listing the contents of the Avaya M770 ATM Switch s IP route CACHE ten na a a a E A R A A EA A E AREE E 37 Connection Admission Control CAC sseseeessesssssssrseseereresssseseseereressse 37 Allocating VBR bandwidth according to the SGCAC algorithm 38 Allocating VBR bandwidth according to the PCR oc 38 Viewing VBR bandwidth allocation method cc cece 38 Managing Physical Portgas iaaa 39 Listing Information About All Physical Ports cccccseseseeneee tee eeeeees 39 Displaying Counter Information for a Physical Port 43 ii Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Contents Displaying counter information for all physical ports 000 43 Displaying counter information for DS3 physical ports 44 Displaying PLCP counter information for DS3 physical ports 48 Disabling a Physical Port ccccccc ce seccceeseecsceeseseeceseeeeseenessseseneseeseneeeees 49 Enabling a Physical Portsea a E ai Ee E i 49 Setting Physical Port Parameters sessssssssses
275. r events that will be logged Once you have assigned a priority level all events assigned with this priority or higher that occur will be logged in the event log file By default all events on the M770 ATM Switch are logged To display the event logging priority level use the event log command Command M15 155s8 gt event log Output All events are being logged If you change the event priority this will not affect the existing contents of the event log Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 237 Chapter 18 Managing Events To set the event logging priority level use the event log command Command M15 155s8 gt event log lt number gt all none Parameters lt number gt An event priority level is assigned where events with the same priority or higher will be logged all All events will be logged This can cause the event log to fill up quickly none No events will be logged Displaying or setting the event trap priority level When an event occurs the switch will dispatch a trap via SNMP to all attached SNMP network management stations All events in the M770 ATM Switch are assigned a priority level between 1 and 16 in order of severity For examples of priority levels see Assigning an Event Priority Levelearlier in this chapter You can specify a priority level for event traps that will be dispatched Once you have assigned a priority level all event traps assigned with this priority or higher that occu
276. r gt key on usual CLI i e moving one step towards root of the CLI tree Almost any command may be part of the Command List See CLI Scripts Restrictions on page 265 for the list of commands not allowed in the scripts 260 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 21 Command Line Interface Scripts CLI Script File Downloading and Maintenance A CLI Script File may be downloaded in the same manner as any other type of file like executable or configuration file using system download tftp command please refer to Downloading over TFTP on page 227 Note that during download the Script File Header is converted into internal representation After being downloaded the Script File may be manipulated as a file of any other kind it may be copied deleted or uploaded Running a CLI Script Running a CLI script on a single module To run a CLI script on a single module perform the following steps 1 Download the script file to the file system of this module as described above Make sure that the download succeeded Note A file download may fail due to the lack of contiguous memory in the Avaya M770 ATM switch file system or due to there being more than 15 files the maximum allowed in the flash memory file system 2 You may examine contents of the script file using the script dump command not mandatory but recommended This command will just dump the script file to the console Telnet window Command M1
277. r on the switch will be reported By default all events on the M770 ATM Switch are dispatched as traps To display the event trap priority level use the event trap command Command 15 155s8 gt event trap Output All events are being dispatched as traps To set the event trap priority level use the event trap command Command M15 155s8 gt event trap lt number gt all none Parameters lt number gt An event priority level is assigned where events with the same priority or higher will be dispatched via SNMP traps all All events will be dispatched via SNMP traps none No events will be dispatched via SNMP traps 238 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 18 Managing Events Displaying logged events You can list the 100 most recent event messages that have been logged on the Avaya M770 The most recent event is displayed first D Note This event log will not be saved when the M770 ATM Switch is restarted To display any logged events use the event show command Command M15 155s8 gt event show Output 09 13 53 04 Jun 09 13 53 04 Jun 94 32 220 154 7 16 03 03 Jun closed 09 09 25 03 Jun 09 09 25 03 Jun 94 32 220 154 7 07 18 31 May closed 6 35 21 31 May 1 52 10 31 May 1 52 10 31 May 94 32 220 154 00 00 14 01 Jan 00 00 11 01 Jan 00 00 00 01 Jan Resetting logged events 996 996 996 996 996 996 996 996 996 970 970 970 GMT GMT GMT GMT GMT
278. ration When two different outside links to the same peer group has the same derived aggregation token the PGL LGN will aggregate them into one higher level horizontal link However if their derived aggregation tokens are different two higher level horizontal links shall be advertised This may be useful if the network administrator has a reason to distinguish between the two links Note A derived aggregation token is calculated from the configured aggregation token at both ends using the following formula If the configured aggregation token at both ends is the same the derived aggregation token gets this value If one configured aggregation token has a non zero value and the other one is zero the derived aggregation token gets the non zero value If both ends have a non zero configured aggregation token and these values are not the same the derived aggregation token is zero Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 147 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Command Parameters M15 155s8 gt route pnni config interfaces aggrToken lt ifIndex gt lt aggrToken gt lt ifIndex gt Index number of the interface or all lt aggrToken gt Aggr Token value Setting the PNNI interface administrative weight Use the following command to set administrative weight to PNNI interfaces Command Parameters M15 155s8 gt route pnni config interfaces weight lt ifIndex gt lt type gt lt value gt lt ifIndex g
279. rchy The level range is 1 104 It is recommended to use the range 8 96 The recommended value should be a multiple of eight For all switches set the L 8 left most bytes to be the same as those bytes in the pre assigned prefix Select a group of switches that will be in the same level peer group start from the higher level peer group lower number and go down the hierarchy higher numbers Determine at which level this peer group should reside and make this level L1 Never select a level that is higher lower in number than a level that was previously selected For all the switches in a peer group L1 set an unused level index 1 255 to the L1 8 byte and mark this index used Determine whether this is the lowest level If so set to each one of the switches in the peer group an unused index for the next byte and mark this index used Repeat steps 5 8 until the user decides that the process ends At this point all bytes up to the 13 are set to 0 The pre assigned prefix is 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Here is the list of switches A B C D E F G The highest level of the hierarchy user input 40 The first five 40 8 bytes of all prefixes will be 39 00 00 00 00 The user selects switches A B C D to be together at level 48 Assign the sixth 48 8 6 byte to be 1 mark the index 1 for byte six used The prefix for switches A B C D so far is 39 00 00 00 00 01 The user selects s
280. rchy up Returns you to the previous level in the hierarchy Note If you press the RETURN key immediately after the prompt it has the same effect as entering the up command If you are at a particular point in the hierarchy and you need to perform a command elsewhere in the hierarchy you must enter the slash symbol followed by the full hierarchical path followed by the command For example Monitor hardware gt flash directory This command will list all files in the flash directory while you are inthe hardware functional group After the command has been executed you will still be in the Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 271 Appendix B Using BOOT Loader hardware functional group Command hierarchy The hierarchy of the commands in the BOOT Loader command line interface can be obtained at any time by typing tree Note Certain functional groups in the hierarchy are also commands on their own Conventions used to describe commands Throughout this chapter the following conventions are used e All command examples are given in relation to the root of the hierarchy That is this is how you would enter the command if you were at the root of the hierarchy e The syntax of commands are described using the symbols displayed in Table 3 2 on page 24 Using the on line help On line help is always available and can be obtained at any time by typing help The following information will be displayed
281. red or reset you must disable the physical port To disable a physical port use the pport disable command Command M15 155s8 gt pport disable lt pport id gt Example M15 155s8 gt pport disable 8 1 Parameter lt pport The physical port identifier in the form lt slot gt lt port number gt id gt Enabling a Physical Port To enable a physical port use the pport enable command Command M15 155s8 gt pport enable lt pport id gt Example M15 155s8 gt pport enable 8 1 Parameter lt pport The physical port identifier in the form lt slot gt lt port number gt id gt Setting Physical Port Parameters You can set individual parameters for a physical port Once a physical port parameter has been set ILMI will not override the parameter when the physical port is re enabled You can set the following parameters for all physical ports e payload scrambling e framing mode e transmit rate limit You can set the following parameters only for physical DS3 ports e cable length e mapping mode e loopback type e Tx clock source Note You must disable the physical port before you can change clear or reset any physical port parameters For more information about how to disable a physical port see Disabling a Physical Port on page 49 To set a parameter for a physical port you must perform the following steps 1 Disable the physical port 2 Set the parameter for the disabled physical port as required 3 E
282. rent Output Link near end current counters Port PESS PSES UASS LCVS PCVS LESS CCVS CESS CSES ID S S BaL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The pport show ds3counters ne current command displays the information described in Table 5 3 Table 5 3 Output from the pport ds3show ne current counters command Field Description Port Id The physical port This is displayed in the format lt slot gt lt port gt PESS The number of P bit errored seconds PSESS The number of P bit severely errored seconds UASS The number of unavailable seconds LCVS The number of line coding variations PCVS The number of P bit coding variations LESS The number of line errored seconds CCVS The number of C bit coding violations CESS The number of C bit errored seconds CSESS The number of C bit severely errored seconds Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 45 Chapter 5 Managing Physical Ports To display DS3 counter information for all far end DS3 physical ports for the current interval use the pport show ds3counters fe current command Command Output M4 DS3s8 gt pport show ds3counters fe current Link far end curent counters Port CESS CSES CCVS UASS ID S 8 1 0 0 0 0 8 2 0 0 0 0 8 3 0 0 0 0 8 4 0 0 0 0 Note The pport show ds3counters command displays several parameters for near end ne counter information PESS PSESS LCV
283. route pnni config pg_id default 152 route pnni config pg_id set 152 route pnni config pg_id show 151 route pnni config pgle default 153 route pnni config pgle set 153 route pnni config pgle show 153 route pnni config restrict_transit default 154 route pnni config restrict_transit set 154 route pnni config restrict_transit show 154 route pnni config show 142 route pnni config summary default 158 route pnni config summary disable 157 route pnni config summary enable 157 route pnni config summary remove 158 route pnni config summary set 157 route pnni config summary show 155 route pnni config svcc default 159 route pnni config svcc set 160 route pnni config svcc show 159 route pnni config timers default 161 route pnni config timers set 161 route pnni config timers show 160 route pnni local link 131 148 261 route pnni local memory 133 route pnni local nbr 133 route pnni local ra 136 route pnni local switch link 137 141 route pnni local switch ra 138 route pnni topology general 124 route pnni topology hlist 125 route pnni topology link 125 126 route pnni topology node 127 Il Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide List of Commands in the Command line Interface route pnni topology ptse 128 route pnni topology ra 129 route pnni topology uplink 130 route show 120 S script log clear 263 script log show 263 script run 264 script showprogress 262 script status 265 snmp community ro add 172 snmp com
284. rt is connected to another service at a lower rate lt 155Mbps then this will require the data cell rate ignoring idle cells to be rate limited at the output port of the switch The outcome of this command can be seen in pport show in the speed column Note You must disable the physical port before you can change clear or reset any physical port parameters For more information about how to disable a physical port see Disabling a Physical Port on page 49 To configure Tx rate limiting for a physical port use the pport set txrate command Command M15 155s8 gt pport set txrate lt pport gt lt rate gt Example M15 155s8 gt pport set txrate 8 3 100 Parameters lt pport id gt The physical port identifier in the form lt slot gt lt port number gt lt rate gt To specify the port transmit rate in Kbits per second You can set the minimum rate capping to 64K bit per second Note The M770 ATM Switch CAC feature is aware of any rate limit set on a port D and will not allow connections to be setup which could exceed the current limit All UBR connections are accepted as usual however these may suffer cell loss if the total traffic rate exceeds the current rate limit Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 51 Chapter 5 Managing Physical Ports Specifying a cable length for a DS3 port You can specify the coaxial BNC cable length for a DS3 port The coaxial cable length is up to these numbers in f
285. rt sig sigsecurity template show accept all permit block r amp d deny 39 03 00 00 00 reject 1 deny 39 30 20 K M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity template show lt name gt M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity template show accept all accept all permit DIRECTION STATE Incoming On Outgoing On M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity template remove lt name gt M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity template remove block r amp d Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 253 Chapter 20 Signaling Security Access Control Commands Signaling Security Filters A signaling security filter is the assignment of a template to a vport for specific direction incoming outgoing with a specific priority Up to 16 filters can be created for a vport direction coupling Filter priority a number in the range 1 16 where 1 represents the highest priority and 16 the lowest The filters priority defines the order of the filters i e if filter A has a higher priority then B filter A will be checked prior to filter B when testing a call setup Direction the direction specifies if the filter is assigned to calls incoming to the vport or outgoing from the vport Filter s state A filter may be in one of two states ON or OFF When a filter is in the OFF state it is ignored when testing a call setup and has no effect Creating a filter Command M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity filter
286. rts for Virtual Path VP tunnelling Virtual Path VP Switching capability both PVP and SVP Centralized PVC configuration Point to Multipoint PVCs Up to 1K of PVCs per module SNMP Network Management using LANE Client Command line Interface CLI management available remotely by using Telnet and or directly by using the serial RS 232 port on the module front panel Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP for software and configuration download and for configuration uploads stores the configuration in a server Full LAN Emulation LANE suite consisting of a LECS LAN Emulation Configuration Server a combined LES LAN Emulation Server and BUS Broadcast Unknown Server and a management LEC LAN Emulation Client ATM Forum LUNI 2 0 protocol Proprietary Resilient LECS Proprietary Resilient and Distributed LAN Emulation Services Multiple LES BUS per module up to 16 LECS support of multiple ELANs up to 64 LECS ELAN client mapping for secure ELANs Efficient Point to Multipoint support using a minimal duplication scheme patented Up to 1K Point to Multipoint roots per module Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction e Up to 5460 Point to Multipoint branches or leaves per module e Up to 210 OC 3 ports in a single switch e Up to 42 OC 12 ports in a single switch e Up to 56 DS3 ports in a single switch e Signaling performance of 130 setups sec with PNNI running per Module Performance improves as y
287. s e Ifthe switch is looking for a remote elected resilient LECS then the following output will be displayed Output There is no local LECS Local LECS clients will use the elected resilient LECS The elected LECS is at the ATM Forum well known address 190 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 14 Managing the LECS Changing the location of the LECS You can configure the LECS in a M770 ATM Switch to be either local or remote If you configure a local LECS then you can specify it to be advertised as either a simple LECS or a resilient LECS If you do not specify the type of local LECS then by default a resilient LECS is created Local simple LECS When creating or changing to a local LECS e Ifa local LECS does not already exist on the switch then a local LECS is created e Ifa resilient LECS exists then it is made simple Local resilient LECS When creating or changing to a resilient LECS e Ifa local LECS does not already exist on the switch then a resilient LECS is created Note when you create a resilient LECS it will join the election process and it is this election process that will elect the active LECS For more information about the election process see Proprietary resilient LECS in Chapter 13 LANE Services e Jfa simple LECS exists then it is made resilient The address of the LECS is set as specified The priority of the LECS is set to the default of 128 Note You must also ensure that a
288. s as database synchronization is not performed between peer groups Link Indicates the status of the link between this node and its neighbor A Status uni directional link indicates that the Nbr State is not full This could be due to another parallel link to the same neighbor and the synchronization is done over that link or due to a problem in the synchronization protocol This field is not applicable for outside links as database synchronization is not performed between peer groups Active For an Inside Link or Logical Link this indicates the time in seconds Time that the neighbor s database is synchronized i e the Nbr State is full For an Outside Link it indicates the time in seconds since the Hello reached a commonOutside state Remote This is the port ID at the other end Port Remote The 22 bytes node ID of the remote node Node 132 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Field Description Svc State This field is applicable only for logical links in which the Hello protocol runs over an SVC RCC It indicate the SVC RCC state If the state is open it means that the PNNI control channel between LGNs was opened correctly and now the PNNI protocols should get to their final states Local Memory Information The following command displays the PNNI memory usage Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni local memory E
289. s frames UBR connections will always be accepted but bandwidth will not be guaranteed This is also referred to as best effort traffic B Note When creating traffic descriptors all cell rates are specified as cells per second If the CLP bit is not set in the ATM cell header it indicates high priority traffic Creating a CBR traffic descriptor To create a CBR traffic descriptor use the td setup CBR command Command M15 155s8 gt td setup CBR lt td_id gt pcr0 1 lt pcr0 1 gt pcr0 lt pcr0 gt Example M15 155s8 gt td setup CBR 2 pcr0 1 64000 pcr0 48000 Parameters lt td_id gt An unique identifier for this traffic descriptor lt pcr0 1 gt The combined PCR for all cells regardless of whether the CLP Cell Loss Priority bit is set in the ATM cell header lt pcr0 gt An optional PCR for cells where the CLP bit is not set in the ATM cell header This PCR must be less than or equal to the combined PCR Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 113 Chapter 8 Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs Creating a UBR traffic descriptor To create a UBR traffic descriptor use the td setup UBR command Command M15 155s8 gt td setup UBR lt td_id gt Example M15 155s8 gt td setup UBR 1 Parameter lt td_id gt An unique identifier for this traffic descriptor Creating a VBR traffic descriptor There are three types of VBR traffic descriptors that can be created To create a VBR traffic descriptor us
290. s gt This can be either the 19 byte hexadecimal address or a partial lt vport id gt A virtual port that was used to route to the specified ATM address D Note Itis not recommended that you delete routes that were added dynamically by ILMI Note Internal routes that have been added to the routing table by an entity that is internal to the switch for example by LANE services cannot be deleted Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 119 Chapter 9 Managing Static Routing Listing the routing entries in a routing table To list the routing table of a specific module including routes that have been disabled use the route show command Command M15 155s8 gt route show Output Port ATM Prefix Status Origin Scope 6 0 0 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Up Internal 35 6 0 0 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 0D 00 40 0D 87 00 0D Up Internal LS 6 0 0 47 00 79 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 A0 3E 00 00 01 Up Internal AsO 6 10 0 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 0D 00 40 0D 63 01 F5 Up ILMI 15 The route show command displays the information described in Table 9 2 120 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 9 Managing Static Routing Table 9 2 Output from the route show command Field Description ATM Prefix The full ATM address or a truncated ATM address Port The virtual port to route through Status The status of the entry
291. s that will be required when you rename an ELAN e Any LECs that specified the old ELAN name must be configured to use the new ELAN name Otherwise when the LECs on this ELAN lose their connection with the LES they will not be able to use the renamed ELAN e Any LES or LESes that used the old ELAN name should be renamed to use the new ELAN name wherever the LES may be located in the network To rename an ELAN enter the lan lan rename command Command M15 155s8 gt lane elan rename lt oldname gt lt newname gt Parameters lt oldname gt The current name of the ELAN lt newname gt The new name of the ELAN D Note The above change will take effect immediately Changing the Operating Mode of an ELAN You can change the expected operating mode of LESes on a specified ELAN This is the method that LESes will learn the location of the specified ELAN If you are using a M770 LES and wish it to determine the method of registration for the ELAN then you should set the ELAN operating mode to auto For more information about the different automatic LES address determination methods see Chapter 13 LANE Services Otherwise you must supply the full ATM address of the LES that will host the specified ELAN 214 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 16 Managing an ELAN To change the operating mode of LESes for a specific ELAN use the lane elan les command Command M15 155s8 gt lane elan les lt
292. s usually composed by combining the switch network prefix with the End Station Identifier ESI of the attached device Note Static routing should be configured on the module through which the route is performed e g if you want to add a route to virtual port 8 4 0 you need to configure this in module number 8 The static routes shown in module 8 will be only the routes of module 8 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 117 Chapter 9 Managing Static Routing To add a new routing entry to the routing table use the route add command access the module where you want this route to be added Command M15 155s8 gt route add lt address gt lt vport id gt lt vport id gt Examples M15 155s8 gt route add 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 6 e0 00 21 11 31 6f 00 28 01 8 1 0 M15 155s8 gt route add 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 6 c0 00 22 8 2 0 8 2 3 M15 155s8 gt route add 39 00 8 4 0 Parameters lt address gt ATM address to be added to the routing table lt hex byte gt lt hex byte gt lt hex byte gt eg 12 ab CD de ad 00 up to 19 hex bytes lt vport id gt ID of the virtual port which is to be used to route towards the specified ATM address lt org The organizational scope of the address lt 1 15 gt if not specified scope gt default to 15 global scope The organizational scope is a UNI scope translated to PNNI advertisement scope according to Table 9 1 below extracted from the PNNI standard The PNN
293. scriptor for the transmit data path at port A Similarly the traffic descriptor for the transmit data path at port B should be the same as the traffic descriptor for the receive data path at port A For more information about managing traffic descriptors see Managing Traffic Descriptors later in this chapter Creating a PVC connection PVC connections will be re established automatically when the M770 ATM Switch powers up You can have up to 1k 1024 PVC connections on a module Creating a Point to Point PP PVC connection To set up a PP PVC with uni directional traffic on one module you must set up a bi directional PP PVC that has a Peak Cell Rate PCR of zero in one direction To set up a bi directional PVC between 2 ports on different modules on the same switch you must type the command on the CLI of each module The appropriate order of the VCL and the td1 td2 should switch places rx td in one module should be the tx td in the other module The command described below will setup a VCL on each lt slot port vpi vci gt and a PVC connection joining the two The PVC connection will be automatically assigned an id Traffic descriptors do not have to be specified If they are not UBR traffic will be assumed and an existing UBR traffic descriptor will be used If no such traffic descriptor exists one will be automatically set up for UBR traffic If any other type of traffic is required you must first set up the traffic descriptors
294. se the vport set ilmiver command Command M15 155s8 gt vport set ilmiver lt vport id gt 31 40 Example M15 155s8 gt vport set ilmiver 8 1 0 31 Parameters lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt 31 40 Changes the ILMI Version to ILMI 3 1 or 4 0 Resetting the ILMI version on a virtual port If you reset the virtual port s ILMI version parameter the port will re learn the ILMI version when it is enabled and a remote device is connected To reset the ILMI version on the virtual port use the vport reset ilmiver command Command M15 155s8 gt vport reset ilmiver lt vport id gt Example M15 155s8 gt vport reset ilmiver 8 1 0 Parameters lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt 68 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Setting Virtual Port Parameters You can set individual parameters for a virtual port Once a virtual port parameter has been set ILMI will not override the parameter when the virtual port is re enabled If you want ILMI to override a set parameter you must disable the virtual port and clear the parameter You must then re enable the virtual port You can set the following virtual port parameters using the vport set command e Signalling profile e Signalling stack type e Signalling VPCI range e Signalling VPCI base e Signalling VCI ran
295. server must be accessible from the ELAN to which the management LEC belongs or from the M SPV M SPX M SPS Ethernet Sideband port To verify this connectivity you should ping from the file server to the IP of the LEC or to the IP of the M SPV M SPX M SPS To download a software image over TFTP use the system download tftp command Command M15 155s8 gt M770s8 gt system download tftp lt ip_address gt lt filename gt lt gateway gt Example M15 155s8 gt M770s8 gt system download tftp 194 31 222 23 m770ATM 2 0 16 Parameters lt ip_address gt The IP address of the remote TFTP server lt filename gt The full name of the file on the TFTP server If the file is contained in a sub directory the complete path and filename must be supplied lt gateway gt The gateway through which you should perform the download e lec through the LANE Client e mspv through the M SPV M SPX M SPS optional default value lec 4 After downloading the new software version to all ATM modules in the M770 ATM switch reboot the switch using the system reboot switch command to run the new version Note It is recommended that all modules in the M770 ATM switch use the same software version To check which software is currently running on the ATM module use the command version Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 243 Chapter 19 Upgrading Avaya M770 ATM Switch Software Downgrading the Main Software Version via TFTP from t
296. show the global topology nodes in a tabular form Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni topology node lt level gt Output Orig Leade Restri Represen Restri Non Reachabl Node ctTran t ct Transit e Id sit Branch for PGL No No Simple No No Yes 60 a0 39 84 0 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 20 00 00 00 6f 00 0 0 21 00 No No Simple No No Yes 60 a0 39 84 0 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 20 00 00 00 6f 00 0 0 20 00 The information in this table is derived from Nodal Info PTSEs received from the nodes in the domain If the optional lt level gt parameter is used only the nodes of that level shall be displayed Table 10 1 Output from the topology nodes show command Field Description Orig Node Id This is the 22 bytes of the node ID Leader Indicates whether the node thinks it is a Peer Group Leader PGL Restrict Transit Indicates if the node advertises itself as restricted transit If a node is restricted transit no routes can go through that node However setups to from end systems connected to that node are valid Representation Indicates the way the node is represented For LGNs the representations may be either simple or complex Restrict Indicates whether the node can branch point to multipoint Branching calls This attribute is resource related Non transit for Indicates whether the node is ignored when computing PGL Election connectivity in the PGL Election algorithm The node is non trans
297. sit flag to default value 154 PNNI Summary Tables Ajse orana aspie aa iisi keha 155 Showing PNNI summary table o cece eset cece 155 Set the PNNI summary address prefix cccccceceseseeeees 157 vi Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Contents Enable the PNNI summary address prefix cccceees 157 Disable the PNNI summary address prefix cccee 157 Remove the PNNI summary address prefix cccee 158 Set the PNNI summary table to the default 0 158 PNNISV GC titmets tiscali e ore eiia ae iea 159 Showing PNNISVCC timers ss sssssssssssessississessssssesierisserssesees 159 Set PNNI SVCC timers to default values cccceeceseeees 159 Set PNNI SVCC timers oriri irnn ar oas 160 PNNI TIMerS riy tedas ya he a aa case ote ol aa a be 160 Show PNNI node timers ccccccssccesseessceesecsseeesseeeeeesseceseeeee 160 Set PNNI node timers to default values s ssssnssosnseossseseesee 161 Set PNNI node timers ccccccesceeseescessessecssessececsseesseesseeees 161 Chapter 11 Managing the Management LEC cccccsesesescsesesesescscseseseecsesesnseeeeeees 163 Avaya M770 LANE S ryViCeS ie ei ken a i e a 163 Configuring the Management LEC s ssssssssissiessissssssstessessessesisreeressesneene 163 Viewing information about the management LEC nss ssss1sssss01s10 164 Managing the ELAN for the management LEC eee 165 Managing a Locally Administer
298. sneseeenees 281 Downloading over serial interface oo eects teeeneeees 281 Downloading ovet tftp sosibsisssi Sanislau aii 282 Uploading over XMODEM ss sssssssssssississssssssissiesrissesnsntessesnesneneenness 282 Uploading over Hiporita arini ie ie Vaa a 283 Rebooting the Switch c iccccessosesacsstessvescrasscovens via cetendeoevsatdvershedstars 283 Controlled shutdown of the switch 0 cc ccccecssesseesecseceteeteeeeeeeees 284 Terminal Commande genisto a a a a a eaea 285 xii Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Contents Viewing the number Of lines cceeecesecssesssesescseeesescseseseseseeees 285 Setting the number of lines 0 eee se ses seesesescsesesesescseseseseeeeees 285 Viewing the terminal Width ceccssseseseseceeeecscseeeeceeenes 285 Setting the terminal width 00 0 ccc ceeeteesesescsesesescsessenseseeeeees 285 Viewing the Wordwrap Status ss ssssessssissessessissisessesssesiesiesesssesees 285 Setting the WOLrdWIaP saates ean en a a ee a E e a eis 286 Viewing the linewrap status sssssessessessississessiesiesissrssresieniesesssesses 286 Setting the LineWrap cererii isi ie EE ER 286 Viewing the pager Status ss s sesissesssssississessessiesiesiesensresieniesesssesnes 286 Enabling the pager merereise aea a ke Ee ri a a 286 Disabling the paget scsi neern i decease 287 Viewing the prompt sisisisnsy sentesse a es 287 Changing the prompt s s sssssessssssssissesssssississesstsniesiesiesn
299. ss ENTER the M770 ATM Switch will wait for data on the serial interface 3 Start the transmission on the serial link Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 281 Appendix B Using BOOT Loader Downloading over tftp In order to download over TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol the remote file server must be accessible from the MSPV Ethernet Sideband port To verify this connectivity you should ping from the file server to the IP of the MSPV To download a software image over TFTP use the system download tftp command Command M15 155s8 gt system download tftp lt ip_address gt lt filename gt lt gateway gt Example M15 155s8 gt system download tftp 194 31 222 23 m770ATM Parameters lt ip_address gt The IP address of the remote TFTP server lt filename gt The full name of the file on the TFTP server If the file is contained in a sub directory the complete path and filename must be supplied lt gateway gt You should perform the download using the MSPV M SPX gateway optional field Uploading over XMODEM The following sequence shows you how to upload a file over XMODEM 1 Connect the serial cable to the serial interface port For more information about the default settings and pin out of the serial port refer to the Module Installation Guides 2 Enterthe system upload xmodem command Command M15 155s8 gt system upload xmodem lt file gt lt baud_rate gt Example M15 155s8 gt system upload xmodem
300. ssessssssestsstestissessestessesresnesnteniesessesneene 227 Using System Commands sesser oreen te ei i eie e a 227 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide ix Contents Chapter 18 Chapter 19 Downloading over TFTP o cccccccc cece ceceenseecececesensnecsnenees 227 Uploading over PR GP ciswssscssctrasesdeveitiactsrte sevcsbendencteatetecnecestu s 228 Viewing a list of fatal system exceptions ccceceeeeeeeeseseseenenes 229 Clearing the list of fatal system exceptions 0 229 Controlled shutdown of the module cccccecessessceseeeeseeeeseeeeeeee 229 Taking a snapshot of the current system configuration 230 Resetting the module to its factory defaults 0 0 ccc cece 230 Rebooting the module or switch 0 0 ceeeseesesceceseseeteteteseseeteteseeeeenes 231 Viewing the current switch memory allocation 0 0 0 cc eee 231 Viewing time received from the time server oo ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 231 Manually changing the date or time on an Avaya M770 ATM SWAUC A VREE EEE AEA E EAEE E I E E EE 232 Viewing the current time Zone s ssssssssessesssissesisrsesrissesstssisisresneneenees 232 Manually changing the time zone ssssessssssssssssssesttssssestesssesstnterstes 232 Using Terminal CommandS ss sessssessesiessissessisssssiesissssnsentestesreseesneneeseess 233 Viewing the pager status ssesseessesieriestssesssstenresressesterrinressessees 233 Enabling th pager mesem hiienare oirne hiie 233
301. ssnesienresenssestes 287 Viewing Software Version Information ss ssssssesississsereestesissessresieseene 288 Appendice Creatine PVCS stuck civceseee cccssusiee n o e e E A 289 Creating P2P 26 Nineties e a sons Ea e aaa a e 289 Creating a Traffic Descriptor e ssesseesissississsssesiesiesrssresiesrenressesses 289 Limiting the Signaling SVC range for the virtual port 290 Creating the P2P PVE iiei ceded eet E E E E ae 290 Creating P2MP PVCS iiss nipin aea ai hpi e aen arde aia ade N a a 291 Creating a Traffic Descriptor s ssesssesissississesssesisisssssresiestensessesses 291 Setting the Trunk ID range for the module cece 291 Limiting the Signaling SVC range for the virtual port 291 Creating the POMP PVG dismessa abs thet eiei 292 Appendix D Creating PVPS visisccissesiccssiessstersseessct arscsssteviveesist sasatstss sieacsistiesecunessneeseaiass 293 Creatine PVPS ssi is acti veal tom e outed aE A deaths 293 Define a VPI range for VP switching ccccceceseseseseseeceeneeeeeees 294 Define the VPI range to be used for Signaled VPS ccccecee 294 Creating a Traffic Descriptor ssesseesissississsseesisiesisssesiesrenressesses 295 Appendix E Components in LANE Services sesssiiniessnies ieii 297 LAN Fmila tion s a cisscessecdeies boeesgecd dos is adee E E tae eats ds eredi ness 297 The principles of LAN Emulation ccccccceceteneeeseeteteeeeeees 297 Components of LAN E
302. sssseetisessesstestestesesstenteneeneessens 49 Configuring payload scrambling c ccsceccsceseeeeneteeseeceteteeeeeenes 50 Specifying the framing mode for a port cc eee eeseeesee ee teeeeees 50 Configuring transmit rate limit for the M15 155 module 51 Specifying a cable length for a DS3 port c ccecceceeeeteseseeteteeeeeees 52 Specifying a mapping mode for a DS3 port 0 cecceeseeteeesteteeeeeenes 52 Specifying loopback type for a DS3 port cccceceeseeteteeeeeteteeeeeenes 53 Specifying the Tx Clock source for a DS3 port oo eee 53 Resetting Parameters on a Physical Port ccccccsessessseseetsteseeceneesesnsnenenees 54 Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports cccicestscecsicvtversescvssense siteesiaiecbeseestacusetsedvactesteesesnatees 55 Showing Virtual Port Information cccccsesescsssesescsceeseeceeseeeseeeessees 55 Listing information about Virtual ports oo eects eeeeeeees 55 Listing the link configuration information for all virtual ports 59 Listing the status information for all virtual ports ee 60 Listing the VPI and VCI range information for all virtual ports 62 Listing bandwidth information for all virtual ports 0 00 63 Configuring Virtual Ports cic ce iste E E E E asian Se 64 Creating a virtiial port ou iscsenveckiedese citsesavsreeccenesettecedterteucuenseueees 64 Traffic shaping for DS3 virtual ports 0 eee eeeseeeeee ne eeeenees 64 Deleting a Virtual Potte e aa
303. st all the LECs clients currently using a specific LES use the lane les clients command Command M15 155s8 gt lane les clients lt elan name gt Example M15 155s8 gt lane les clients default Parameter lt elan name gt The name of the ELAN that hosts the LES This parameter is case sensitive Output Client ID 16386 Address 39 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 61 81 Registered MAC addresses 00 40 0D 87 00 61 Client ID 16387 Proxy Address 39 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 64 02 DE 81 Registered MAC addresses None Client ID 16388 Address 39 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 77 81 Registered MAC addresses 00 40 0D 87 00 77_ The lane les clients command displays the information described in Table 15 2 Table 15 2 Output from the lane les clients command Field Description Client ID Displays the LEC id for each client that is registered with the LES Address The ATM address of the client Registered MAC The MAC address of the client addresses Registered Route If the client is a source routing bridge then Route Descriptors Descriptors are also displayed Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 203 Chapter 15 Managing the LES BUS Display ATM Forum compliant statistics for a LES To display the ATM Forum compliant statistics for a LES use the lane les stats command Command M15 155s8 gt lane les stats
304. standby manual The name of the ELAN that currently hosts the LES that you wish to change This parameter is case sensitive The LES will register with the LECS using the proprietary automatic LES address determination method and will act as a distributed LES The LES will register with the LECS using the proprietary automatic LES address determination method and will act as a single mode LES but support standby resilient LES The LES will use the ATM Forum compliant method to manually register the LES with the LECS Note For information about the proprietary automatic LES address determination method see Creating a new LES earlier in this chapter Note The above command will take immediate effect The command must be used with care as all LECs will be thrown off the ELAN hosted by the LES Viewing the LES registration mode To display the registration mode of a LES use the lane les mode command Command Example 1 Output Example 2 Output M M L M L 5 155s8 gt lane 5 155s8 gt lane ES M770ElanEt he LES can act 5 155s8 gt lane ES M770ElanEt es mode lt elan name gt es mode M770ElanEth h registers automatically as a standby LES es mode M770ElanEth h registers automatically The LES can act as a distributed LES Listing the peer LESes in a distributed LANE environment A peer LES is defined
305. status and the operational status is determined by the lower level PGLE protocol PNNI Peer Group ID Showing PNNI peer group ID Use the following command to display the PNNI peer group ID Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config pg_id show lt level gt Output Peer group id Level 1 Configure Current 38 39 04 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 38 39 04 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Level 2 30 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Level 3 28 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Level 4 20 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Level 5 18 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 The PNNI peer group ID is used when the PNNI protocol constructs the peer groups in which topology databases are being synchronized A link between two neighbors that share the same peer group ID is considered an inside link and a link between 2 PNNI nodes that don t have the same peer group is considered an outside link Topology databases are synchronized only over inside links Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 151 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Setting PNNI peer group ID Use the following command to set the PNNI peer group ID Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config pg_id set lt level gt lt pg id gt Parameters level 1 5 Internal level number 1 is the lowest physical node pg id 14 hexadecimal bytes separated by a decimal The first byte is the level 1 104 in Hex 104 level rightmost bits s
306. sure that the number of modules hosting a specific LES BUS e g default does not exceed the maximum number of LESes per ELAN as defined in lan elan maxles default 5 maximum 10 5 Determine if secure Closed ELANs are required If required then you will need to set up an ELAN client database in the Avaya M770 For information about setting up ELAN clients see Chapter 16 Managing ELAN Clients By default when ELANSs are created they are set up as Open ELANSs Recommended Redundant LANE Services Setup You have the ability to setup redundant LANE services on every module On each M770 ATM switch that contains N modules you have the flexibility to configure N resilient LECS hosting ELANs that can be redundant N times LANE redundancy is not just switch wide but network wide Each module in every switch can host redundant LANE services We do not recommend that you place redundant LANE services on every module In the event that you want to investigate where clients are registered and to look at the LECS you need to look at every module in his network The Cajun LaneMaster application helps you configure your redundant LANE services To help you decide where to put the LANE services and to minimize configuration time we recommend the following LECS Setup 2 resilient LECS on two different switches One of the LECS should have a higher priority than the other LES Setup 5 distributed LESs for each ELAN Configure each LES o
307. t Index number of the interface or all lt type gt Cbr RtVbr NrtVbr Abr Ubr all lt value gt admin weight range 1 16777216 Notes ifIndex all all interfaces type all all types In the following example the user configures the Administered Weight for RtVBR for interface 5124 to be 10000 Examples M15 155s8 gt route pnni config interfaces weight 5124 RtVbr 10000 Set PNNI interfaces to default values In order to set PNNI interfaces to default values use the following command Command Parameters M15 155s8 gt route pnni config interfaces default lt ifIndex gt lt cos gt lt ifIndex gt Index number of the interface or all lt cos gt Cbr RtVbr NrtVbr Abr Ubr all Notes ifIndex all all interfaces will get default parameters cos all all classes of service for this interface will get default values PNNI Levels Showing PNNI Node Level This command shows the level scopes as configured by the user for all nodes within the switch Command M 15 155s8 gt route pnni config level show lt level gt Output Level Scope Level 1 Configure Current 56 56 Level 2 48 Level 3 40 Level 4 32 Level 4 24 148 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Note The greater the scope is in number the lower the hierarchical level In other words lower level scope numbers indicates higher level nodes Setting PNNI Node Level Use the follo
308. t lt port gt lt virtual port number gt Admin State The administrative state of the virtual port If the state is UP then this virtual port is enabled If the state is DOWN then this virtual port is disabled This will occur when you disable the virtual port using the command line interface or via management Oper State The operational state of the virtual port If the state is UP then this virtual port is functional If the state is DOWN then this virtual port is not functional This could be due to a problem with ILMI or ILMI has been disabled due to a problem with the physical connection Stack Type The type of signalling used This can be UNI 3 0 UNI 3 1 UNI 4 0 IISP 3 0 IISP 3 1 or PNNI 1 0 User Net The signalling profile of the virtual port This can be either user or network For more information on which signalling profile should be used refer to ATM Port Configuration in Chapter 2 Getting Started Q SAAL State The state of the signalling data link layer Q SAAL SSCOP VPI Range The VPI range assigned to the virtual port VCI Range The VCI range assigned to the virtual port Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 57 Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Table 6 1 Output from the vport show command Continued Field Description ILMI State The ILMI state of the virtual port The possible ILMI states are Inactive The virtual port is d
309. t necessarily be true should you be using manual configured addresses or non standard ATM addresses for M770 ATM switches that are hosting the LEC The Management LEC in an Avaya M770 ATM Switch e The M770 ATM Switch has one management LEC for managing the M770 ATM Switch It is located on the Master agent module in the switch and supports several high level protocols such as Telnet for a command line interface UDP for SNMP management and TFIP software upgrades BOOTP for obtaining M770 ATM Switch s IP address from a server ICMP for PING inward and outward for IP network configuration diagnosis e By default the M770 ATM Switch management LEC uses the Burnt In Address BIA as its MAC address This address can be overridden and a Locally Administered Address LAA can be assigned The management LEC will register this address with the LES that is hosting the ELAN that the LEC wishes to join e The M770 ATM Switch management LEC by default requests to join an Ethernet ELAN Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 187 Chapter 13 LANE Services 188 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 14 Managing the LECS This chapter describes how to use the command line interface to manage the LECS in the Avaya M770 ATM Switch For information about how to access and use the Avaya M770 ATM Switch command line interface see Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface LECS Location Any AT
310. tary resilient algorithm to implement LECS redundancy On failure of an elected active LECS resilient LECSes in standby mode will elect a new active LECS No disruption in the working of LANE services in the ATM network will be experienced providing all resilient LECS have the same database configurations 182 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 13 LANE Services Proprietary resilient LECS The proprietary resilient LECS provides automatic redundancy for the active LECS by continuously monitoring the status of all resilient LECS From the list of available resilient LECSes on the network the selection of the active LECS is done by a process of election To carry out this election all ATM switches must be M770s and ILMI between them must be enabled Note If you are not planning to use PNNI routing or want the switches in the third party environments to host resilient LECS then you should contact Avaya Technical Support They can provide you with further information on what manual configuration is required depending on your third party switch to get LECS redundancy on your M770 ATM Switches A proprietary protocol is used to provide automatic LECS redundancy with the following method of establishing an active mesh of SVCs between the switches hosting resilient LECSes discovering and advertising resilient LECSes on the network propagating the address of the active LECS and of the r
311. te ATM address that the resilient LECS uses to Endpoint communicate with other resilient LECSes Address Note all resilient LECS are assigned with selector byte of 7F Type Type of resilient LECS This can be either local manually configured or PVC LECS address The full 20 byte ATM address of the LECS Status The state of the resilient LECS One of these should be active Link State The state of the link to the resilient LECS Priority The priority level assigned to the resilient LECS Uptime The time in days hours minutes and seconds that the resilient LECS has been active Creating a resilient LECS election candidate You can create a communication connection to a remote resilient LECS by specifying its election protocol end point address This is only necessary when using a 3rd party switch Note Remote resilient LECS candidates should only be created in third party environments Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 195 Chapter 14 Managing the LECS To create communication connection to a remote candidate use the lane lecs resilient create command Command M15 155s8 gt lane lecs resilient create lt address gt Parameters lt address gt Thisisthe address the candidate uses in order to communicate with other candidates on the network To construct the address you must append a selector of 7F to the modules address Alternatively typethe lane lecs resilient show command on the remo
312. te device is an end station then address registration will not take place automatically and a static route will need to be added for the attached device To disable ILMI on a virtual port use the vport disable command Command M15 155s8 gt vport disable lt vport id gt ilmi Example M15 155s8 gt vport disable 8 1 0 ilmi Parameters lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt ilmi ILMI isa protocol used by a switch to learn about an attached device Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable a virtual port see Disabling a virtual port on page 65 Disabling ILMI polling on a virtual port If an attached end station does not support ILMI polling the M770 ATM Switch will not poll to ensure the integrity of the link However if the end station does support ILMI polling but is not responding to polls in time the virtual port will not become operational at all or be intermittent Before the virtual port can become operational you will need to disable ILMI polling To disable ILMI polling on a virtual port use the vport disable command Command M15 155s8 gt vport disable lt vport id gt poll Example M15 155s8 gt vport disable 8 1 0 poll Parameters lt vport id gt The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt poll ILMI p
313. te switch and use the end point address at index 0 Note there should only be one election entry for each resilient LECS participating in the election Note When you create a communication connection to a remote switch hosting a resilient LECS the remote M770 ATM Switch will automatically create a respective candidate for the local LECS Deleting a resilient LECS election candidate You can delete any election candidate that you manually created using the 1ane lecs resilient delete command and specifying the endpoint address The connection to the candidate on the remote M770 ATM Switch will be dropped which will result in the deletion of that candidate To delete a resilient LECS election candidate use the lane lecs resilient delete command Command M15 155s8 gt lane lecs resilient delete lt address gt 196 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 14 Managing the LECS Specified ELAN Defaults in the LECS Viewing default ELANs When a LEC contacts the LECS it usually specifies the ELAN name or the ELAN type that it wants to join You can define up to 64 different ELAN names in an M770 ATM Switch LECS You can define default ELANs for switches hosting a local LECS These are the ELANs that a LEC should join if it only specifies the ELAN type and not the name of an ELAN In cases where the LEC has not specified the ELAN name or the ELAN type you can set up a default ELAN that will be used The following de
314. ted during hardware self test e by pressing continuously the lt and gt buttons on the module front panel at the start of the boot up process until the OPR LED turns OFF You can access the Avaya M770 BOOT Loader by direct connection on the serial interface using a VT100 terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program For information about the default settings and pin out of the serial port see the Module Installation Guides When you have connected a VT100 terminal and the BOOT PROM software has been executed the terminal screen will display the BOOT MENU Welcome to M770 PROM 1 2 0 1 Run boot loader image 1 2 Run boot loader image 2 current default 3 Download boot loader image 9600 baud 4 Download boot loader image 38400 baud Select a menu item 1 4 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 269 Appendix B Using BOOT Loader From the BOOT MENU you can view the current default BOOT Loader image that is stored in flash memory You can execute this image file or select the secondary BOOT Loader image If the secondary image is selected then this will become the new default BOOT Loader image when the switch is next booted The last two options on the BOOT MENU enable you to download a BOOT Loader image on to the M770 ATM Switch via XMODEM at either 9600 Baud or 38400 Baud Note The download options should only be used in an emergency since all files and configuration on the M770 ATM Sw
315. ted with a particular virtual circuit through a single link When the M770 ATM Switch receives a cell it examines the ATM cell header to determine the VPI VCI on which the cell was transmitted Using this information the M770 ATM Switch determines the destination port and appropriate VPI VCI for the transmission of the ATM cell For example in a single switch environment the switch can be configured such that a cell received on port A with VPI VCI 0 35 is switched to port B with VPI VCI 0 72 The translation from input port VPI and VCI to output port VPI and VCI is carried out by the switch hardware 304 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Appendix F Routing and Signalling Concepts Figure F 3 Cell switching through a M770 ATM Switch from end station one to end station two e Avaya M770 TO ATM Switch Endstation 1 A veto vores VPI 0 VCI 35 VPI 0 VCI 72 Endstation 2 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 305 Appendix F Routing and Signalling Concepts 306 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide AppendixG Setting Address Prefixes to M atch Hierarchical PNNI Algorithm for Automatic Setting of ATM Prefixes 1 10 Example NR nor W CON Identify a pre assigned prefix possibly given by an ATM Service Provider If none use our factory prefix 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 List switches that exist in the network The user identifies the highest level L for the hiera
316. tents Creating a Point to Multipoint PMP PVC connection 103 Freeing a PVC connection ccccceeesesesesersteeeeseeteneeseecseneetees 104 Listing the current PVC connections ccceeeeseeeeeseeeeees 105 Disabling a PVC connection oo seeesseeseseseeneeseees 106 Enabling a PVC connection seeececec cece eseeteteteeseeneteseeeenenes 107 Histinigvall the VELS irane ie deasets Gane R teens sis toutes 107 Managing PVP Connections ccccccsccsssceeseesssessecsesesssssseseseseeseeenenseeeeees 109 Managing PVP Connections ccccccceesesesesssesseesseeesesenseeseeseneseees 109 Creating a PVP connection 0 ccecescseseseeteeetseseteseeeeeseeseeseeeeeseneeeees 110 Freeing a PVP connection oo cceeccsceseseeeeteeeeseececseeeeeceeseeseeesesenaeeses 111 Listing the current PVP connections 0 0 0 0 cece eens teeeeeees 111 Disabling a PVP connection 0 0 ccccccecesteteteseeteteteeeetenenesesteeneneeeeees 112 Enabling a PVP connection 0 cccccsssseeesescssteesesescsesesesescsssnseseecsees 112 Listing all theV P Lig e See a r E a arit 112 Managing Traffic Descriptors cc cece eee cceeeeeceeeeeeeeececeseseneseeeeneees 113 Creating a CBR traffic descriptor ccccsesceesesteteseeceneesesteteteseseees 113 Creating a UBR traffic descriptor c cece cece cerns teeenees 114 Creating a VBR traffic descriptor cccccsescecseste teres ceneesesesneneneeeees 114 tst Methodi acarin T ee ee ate uiede tle elon aes 11
317. tents of the flash memory You can view all files that are held in flash memory For each file in the directory the following information is displayed The type of file The size of each file in bytes The name of the file The default configuration file is distinguished with a plus sign next to the file type The default boot loader image file is distinguished with a plus sign next to the file type The default main image is distinguished with an type Any main image file that is compressed is indicated with the letter C Any main image file that is uncompressed is indicated with the letter U Also displayed are comments attached to files MUR asterisk next to the file To display a listing of the flash memory bank use the flash directory command Command M15 155s8 gt flash directory Output Flash Filing System contains 6 files BOOT 343557 boot_loader 1 2 7 BOOT 376442 boot_loader 1 2 0 TEXT 5516 snapshot_config 1 2 do not delete MAIN U 1598440 m770ATM MAIN C 494710 m770ATM_new CONF IG 1024 snapshot_1 2 0 Viewing the default image The default image is the software image that will be run when the M770 ATM Switch boots up To display the default image use the flash default command Command M15 155s8 gt flash default Output The current default boot image is m770ATM_new 274 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Appendix B Using BOOT Loader Changing
318. test 9600 Parameters lt file gt Enter the name of the filein flash memory that is to be uploaded lt baud_rate gt The default baud rate is 9600 The higher rate is not recommended but can be set to 38400 3 Start the receiver on the serial link 4 Press ENTER the M770 ATM Switch will send data on the selected serial interface port Note Set up of new calls has priority over the XMODEM upload so on a busy network it may be necessary to disconnect the M770 ATM Switch from the network in order to achieve a successful upload via the bootloader 282 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Appendix B Using BOOT Loader Uploading over tftp In order to upload over TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol the remote file server must be accessible from the MSPV MSPX Ethernet Sideband port To verify this connectivity you should ping from the file server to the IP of the MSPV MSPX To upload a file over TFTP use the system upload tftp command Command 15 155s8 gt system upload tftp lt ip_address gt lt flashfile gt lt destination_filename gt lt gateway gt Example M15 155s8 gt system upload tftp 194 31 222 23 m770ATM m770ATM_new Parameters lt ip_address gt The IP address of the remote TFTP server lt flashfile gt The full name of the file in flash memory lt destination_filename gt The full destination file name on the remote TFTP server If the file is contained in a sub directory the complete path
319. th status cells sec Total BW Alloc BW Curr Curr Virtual In Out In Out PVPC PVCC SVPC SVCG Port ID 8 0 0 34732 34732 0 0 0 0 0 0 dl Al 8 1 0 90118 90118 0 0 0 0 0 0 eal 3 2358 2358 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 1 e5 1792 17 92 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 2 0 43980 43980 0 0 0 0 0 0 82453 47168 47168 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 2 4 3120 3120 0 0 0 0 0 0 830 0426 0426 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 8 8 4 0 0426 0426 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 8 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 63 Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Configuring Virtual Ports Creating a virtual port Note Before you can create a new virtual port you must assign a VPI range To do this you must first reduce the VPI range of the root virtual port For more information about setting the VPI range for a virtual port see Setting Virtual Port Parameters later in this chapter on page 69 To control shaping use the vport create command Command M4 DS3s8 gt vport create lt vport id gt lt VPI gt lt bandwidth gt Example M4 DS3s8 gt vport create 1 2 3 4 2358 Parameters lt vport id gt The new virtual port identifier is an integer which isn t yet used to represent a virtual port on this physical port The virtual port isin the form lt dot gt lt port gt lt virtual port number gt lt vpi gt The virtual path to be associated with this virtual port This virtual path must already exist on physical port lt dot gt lt port gt lt bandwidth gt Applicable for DS3 modules only An optional parameter to set
320. that can be supported per ELAN on multiple modules up to 2 500 LECs per ELAN This is achieved by allowing a single ELAN to be distributed over multiple LES BUS pairs in several modules up to 10 LES BUS s per ELAN Each client connects to a single LES BUS as normal but it could be any of the LES BUS pairs that are supporting the ELAN Virtual Channel Connection VCC requirements In a single ELAN that supports the proprietary Distributed LANE Service e each LES has a point to point and a point to multipoint VCC mesh to each of the other LESes in the ELAN e each BUS has a point to point and a point to multipoint VCC mesh to each of the other BUSes in the ELAN These connections are then used to exchange information about the registered clients in the ELAN Setting up Distributed LANE Services The M770 ATM Switch module sets up distributed LANE services as follows 1 When a distributed LES registers with the LECS it is assigned a LEC id range and given the addresses of other distributed LESes on the ELAN 2 The LES will then setup a point to point and point to multipoint with the other LESes on the ELAN 3 Once connections are setup between the distributed LESes on the ELAN the LESes will exchange information about their LECs clients In this way all the LESes in the ELAN will know of all other clients on the ELAN and which LES they are attached to 4 Each LES will also discover the address of every BUS in the ELAN This infor
321. that still has IP traffic on it there will be a short delay while the ARP process finds the remote host and the IP address is added to the ARP cache again Note If an IP address is moved on the network then you should delete the entry in the IP ARP cache to force the M770 ATM Switch to locate the new MAC address To delete an entry from the M770 ATM Switch s IP ARP cache use the ip arpcache delete command Command M15 155s8 gt ip arpcache delete lt address gt Parameters lt address gt A standard IP address that is to be removed from the ARP cache 36 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 4 Managing Miscellaneous Commands Listing the contents of the Avaya M770 ATM Switch s IP route cache The destination IP address the router address and the network mask are displayed for each entry in the IP route cache The default router address is also displayed This uses the M770 ATM Switch s IP gateway address To display the contents of the M770 ATM Switch s IP route cache use the ip routecache command Command M15 155s8 gt ip routecache Output IP route cache entries Destination Mask Router Interface 127 0 0 0 259s 07070 local m spv 149 49 34 0 255 255 255 0 local lec default x 149 49 34 5 lec Connection Admission Control CAC The M770 ATM Switch carries out Connection Admission Control CAC on both the input and output ports to ensure that there is enough bandwidth to allow the call to b
322. the transmit descriptor of the second VCL on the PVC connection Note if td2 is omitted then it defaults to the same as td1 If the PVC is from one module to another the PVC setup must be performed on both modules 290 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Appendix C Creating PVCs Creating P2MP PVCs There are four steps in creating a P2MP PVC on the M770 ATM switch 1 Create the Traffic Descriptor TD that will be used for the PVC 2 Set the Trunk ID range for the module 3 Limit the Signaling SVC range on the vport s 4 Create the PAMP PVC The next four subsections explain how to setup a P2MP PVC on the M770 ATM switch In this example a PEMP PVC will be setup on the M770 between ports 1 1 2 1 and 3 1 using trunk ID 150 and VPI 0 VCI 115 The M770 ATM switch uses the following system to describe a VC The number 1 2 0 115 indicates that there is a VC on slot 1 port 2 using VPI 0 and VCI 115 Creating a Traffic Descriptor A Traffic Descriptor must be defined with the service class that will be used to transport the traffic and the bandwidth that is required The example below shows a cell rate of 4152 cells per second appropriate for a DS1 24 DSOs times 173 cps Command M15 155s8 gt td setup CBR lt td_id gt pcr0 1 lt pcr0 1 gt pcr0 lt pcr0 gt Example M15 155s8 gt td setup CBR 5 pcr0 1 4152 To determine which td_id is available type td show to display all defined Traffic Descriptors Setting
323. ting number plan used in public networks e 49 The local AFI that defines a structure that can be used by anyone within a private network To display the current switch prefix use the address prefix command Command M15 155s8 gt address prefix Output Current Prefix 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0d 87 00 2c If you have an ATM network that uses its own block of ATM addresses you can make the M770 ATM Switch conform to this scheme by changing the default switch prefix Any end stations directly connected to the M770 ATM Switch will only obtain their new prefix if they re register over ILMI To change the switch prefix for the M770 ATM Switch use the address prefix command Command 15 155s8 gt address prefix lt prefix gt node_id pg_id Parameters lt prefix gt The new switch prefix The prefix must be a 13 byte address and expressed as 13 two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by periods 39 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 aa bb is an example of a switch prefix address The first byte of the switch prefix address must be 39 45 47 or 49 For more information see text in the introduction to this section node_id Optional parameter that indicates that the PNNI node ID shall be changed according to the new prefix pg_id Optional parameter that indicates that the PNNI peer group ID shall be changed according to the new prefix Note You must reboot the switch before the above command will take affect You O must updat
324. tion For information about how to access and use the Avaya M770 ATM Switch command line interface see Chapter 3 How to Use the Command line Interface Setting passwords for local remote connections To protect the Avaya M770 ATM Switch from accidental or unauthorized configuration from a local via the serial port or remote end station via Telnet you may want to set a password for the switch The following sequence shows you how to set a password for the switch for the first time Because no password exists the M770 ATM Switch does not prompt for the old password Command M15 155s8 gt password Output M15 155s8 gt There is no password at the moment M15 155s8 gt Enter the new password does not echo ENTER M15 155s8 gt Enter the new password again does not echo KKK KK KK ENTER M15 155s8 gt Password changed Once you have set a password the CLI will ask you to enter the password each time you connect to the switch To terminate a session and prevent other from configuring the switch use the exit command Once you have enabled password protection there is a timeout period of 15 minutes before the CLI session is terminated To delete a password Enter the old password and press Enter for the new password Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 27 Chapter 4 Managing Miscellaneous Commands Managing the Sub Agents The access command displays or accesses other modules in the s
325. tion upnode The first byte of the Node ID holds the level scope in which the node resides in hex In this example the uplink s originating node resides in level 56 0x38 and the upnode resides in level 48 0x30 The Aggregation Token is a 4 byte integer that marks whether different uplinks to the same upnode shall be aggregated to the same higher level horizontal link If the optional lt level gt parameter is used only uplinks originating at that level will be displayed 130 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing PNNI Local Topology Information Local PNNI Links The PNNI Local Links command gives information about the links on which the Hello protocol and possibly the Database Synchronization DBS take place On the physical level these links would be local to the module On a logical level these links would be local to the LGN i e the PDC slot MA on the switch that acts as PGL LGN The following command displays the state of the local PNNI links Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni local link lt level gt Output for Physical Level Inside Outside Logical Level Port Hello Nbr State Stat e 13 02 00 twoWayInsi full 00 de 38 A0 39 04 01 00 00 00 00 09 13 00 commonOuts 00 ide 38 A0 39 01 01 00 00 00 00 Port Hello Nbr State Stat e 00 02 00 twoWay full 00 38 A0 39 04 01 00 00 00 00 Link Activ Remote Remot e Port e Statu Time Node
326. to If the LES is located in an Avaya M770 then you should use auto ATM address If the LES is located in a device other than the M770 then you must specify its ATM address Deleting an ELAN When you delete an ELAN no new LECs that specify the ELAN name will be able to find it However the LECs currently using the deleted ELAN will be not be affected until they lose connection to the LES and try to re connect You must be aware of the following changes that will be required when you delete an ELAN e Any LECs that specified the deleted ELAN must now be configured to use a new ELAN e Ifthe deleted ELAN was a default ELAN then you should define a new default ELAN to replace the deleted ELAN e Any LES or LESes that hosted the deleted ELAN should be deleted wherever the LES may be located in the network To delete an ELAN enter the lan lan delete command Command M15 155s8 gt lane elan delete lt name gt Parameters lt name gt The name of the ELAN to be deleted Note The above change will take effect immediately Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 213 Chapter 16 Managing an ELAN Renaming an ELAN You can rename an existing ELAN The rename command will change the name known to the LECS If you are renaming a default ELAN then the M770 ATM Switch will update the default ELAN name with the new name therefore no user configuration is required You must be aware of the following change
327. to another end station by transmitting a signalling call setup request across the network This request is routed across the ATM network to the destination end station If the destination agrees to accept the connection a SVC is set up across the ATM network between the two end stations Virtual Circuits and Virtual Paths In ATM networks data is multiplexed on physical links using virtual circuits and virtual paths A virtual circuit is a channel of communication that allows data transfer between two ATM devices A virtual path is used to group virtual circuits within the same transmission medium so that they can be switched together Virtual circuits are identified by an unique Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI Virtual paths are identified by an unique Virtual Path Identifier VPI Figure C 1 shows how virtual circuits are bundled together within a virtual path Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 301 Appendix F Routing and Signalling Concepts Figure F 1 Virtual circuits in a virtual path Virtual Path Physical Link Virtual Circuits Virtual Ports To support terminating virtual paths the M770 ATM Switch uses virtual ports Virtual ports are typically used for Virtual Port Muxing or tunnelling through public networks A physical port contains several virtual ports and each virtual port can be considered a port in its own right When a physical port initializes a default root virtual port is created Furt
328. ty ro add lt read only community name gt Delete the read only community name To delete an element of the read only community names list use the snmp community ro delete command The element is specified by its number Command M15 155s8 gt snmp community ro delete lt entry number gt 172 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 12 Managing SNMP Show the list of read only community names To list all the read only community names use the snmp community ro show command Command M15 155s8 gt snmp community ro show Example M15 155s8 gt snmp community ro show Output Read Only community names 1 public 2 ronl 3 moty 3 gidi 4 nancy 5 andrew Done Set the read write community name To add a specified name to the list of read write community names use the snmp community rw add command Command M15 155s8 gt snmp community rw add lt read write community name gt Delete the read write community name To delete an element of the read write community names list use the snmp community rw delete command The element is specified by its number Command M15 155s8 gt snmp community rw delete lt read number gt Show the list of read write community names To list all the read write community names use the snmp community rw show command Command M15 155s8 gt snmp community rw show Example M15 155s8 gt snmp community rw show Output Read Write community names 1 public
329. uence Response from 192 32 220 5 seq 0 delay 5 ms Response from 192 32 220 5 seq 1 delay 2 ms Response from 192 32 220 5 seq 2 delay 2 ms Response from 192 32 220 5 seq 3 delay 1 ms Response from 192 32 220 5 seq 4 delay 1 ms Ping of 192 32 220 5 Packets sent 5 Packets received 5 Note The command will continue to PING To interrupt it press CTRL C Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 35 Chapter 4 Managing Miscellaneous Commands Managing the IP Cache This section explains how to view the IP and route ARP cache of the M770 ATM Switch and how to delete entries in the ARP cache Listing the contents of the Avaya M770 ATM Switch s IP ARP cache When listing the contents of the M770 ATM Switch s IP ARP cache the destination IP and MAC addresses are shown Also displayed is whether or not the ARP process has completed for each destination IP address in the IP ARP cache An entry in the cache becomes aged out 30 minutes from the last time it was used To display the contents of the M770 ATM Switch s IP ARP cache use the ip arpcache show command Command M15 155s8 gt ip arpcache show Output IP ARP cache entries 192 32 220 5 00 00 F6 1A 3C 62 complete 196 32 220 4 00 00 F6 09 18 59 complete 196 32 220 8 00 00 F6 09 44 3F complete 196 32 220 19 incomplete Deleting an entry from the Avaya M770 ATM Switch s IP ARP cache When you delete an entry from a M770 ATM Switch IP ARP cache
330. ulation The Signaling Security feature provides a handy utility for checking the vport s security configuration by simulating call setups Command M15 155s8 gt gt vport sig sigsecurity filter simulate lt vport gt lt incoming outgoing gt lt srcnsap gt lt dstnsap gt Example M15 155s8 gt M15 155Fs9 gt vport sig sigsecurity filter simulate 9 1 0 incoming 39 03 00 00 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 AA BB CC DD EE FF 00 39 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 00 11 22 33 AA AA AA AA AA 00 Parameters lt vport gt The filter s vport lt incoming The filter s direction applicable to incoming or outgoing gt outgoing calls lt srcnsap gt the simulated call setup source ATM address lt dstnsap gt the simulated call setup destination ATM address Output Simulated call setup rejected Matching filter info summary Filter s priority 6 Filter s template name block r d Filter s template src mask 39 03 00 00 00 Filter s template dst mask Filter s template action deny 256 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 20 Signaling Security Access Control Commands Signaling Security Event Log and Traps The Signaling Security feature keeps track of access control violation attempts Every time a call setup is being rejected due to access control violation an event is logged Up to 100 most recent events are logged i e if the log is full and a call is being rejected an event will be logged and the oldest event
331. ule that advertises the switch as willing to become a PGL Peer Group Leader If it is elected as PGL the next higher level node the LGN Logical Group Node resides in the PDC module Therefore commands that are applicable only PGL or LGN can be performed only on the PDC Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 123 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing PNNI Global Topology Information General topology information To show the global topology information use the following command Command M15 155s2 gt route pnni topology general Output Global PNNI topology information Horizontal Links Nodes Reachable Addresses Ptses Not Not Routable Routable Reachable Reachable Internal Exterior 4 4 2 0 4 0 9 3 22 The output of this command provides tabular general information about the entire PNNI domain number of horizontal links nodes and reachable addresses and the number of PTSEs in the local database It distinguishes between horizontal links that are routable and those that are not routable A horizontal link is a bi directional connection between two adjacent PNNI nodes The information about a
332. use 01 02 03 04 05 06 10 11 80 81 82 83 If you enter the name of the ELAN that the LES is hosting then more details regarding the specified LES is displayed Command Example M15 155s8 gt lane les show lt elan name gt M15 155s8 gt lane les show default Information for Emulated LAN default LES address 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 6F 07 80 E0 00 00 6F 07 80 E0 01 BUS address 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 6F 07 80 E0 00 00 6F 07 80 E0 02 Type Ethernet Maximum frame size 1516 bytes LES registration mode Auto distributed Num Peer LESs 3 The LES is actively running the elan Num Clients 3 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 201 Chapter 15 Managing the LES BUS The lane les show lt elan name gt command displays the information described in Table 15 1 Table 15 1 Output from the lane les show command Field Description Information The name of the ELAN the LES is hosting Type The type of ELAN This can be either Token Ring or Ethernet Maximum frame size The maximum frame size the ELAN can support LES address The ATM address of the LES BUS address The ATM address of the BUS LES registration The registration mode of the LES mode The LES is actively Number of clients hosted by this LES running the ELAN 202 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 15 Managing the LES BUS Viewing LECs using a specific LES To li
333. use the vport set sigvpcibase command Command M15 155s8 gt vport set sigvpcibase lt vport id gt O vpi Example M15 155s8 gt vport set sigvpcibase 8 1 2 vpi Parameters lt vport The virtual port in the form lt slot gt lt port gt virtual port number gt id gt lt 0 vpi gt Selects the signalling VPCI base that will be used for the virtual port To interoperate with another M770 ATM Switch set it to O This is the default setting Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 71 Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Setting the signalling VPC VPI range On a root virtual port which may have several VPIs associated with it there is an option of signalling virtual paths connections Therefore the user should identify the range of VPIs that are associated with Signaled Virtual Paths SVPs and the rest are associated with Permanent Virtual Paths PVPs Note Before setting up PVPs or preparing the virtual port for SVPs the module hardware has to be configured to accept Virtual Paths connection This is done using the command hardware vpcvpirnage in which the user identifies the range of VPIs that are associated with VP switching For more information refer to Managing VPI range for VP switching on page 99 Note You must disable the virtual port before you can change or reset any virtual port parameters For more information about how to disable a virtual port see Disabling a virtual port o
334. user is not expected to change any of these timers However if you need more information about these timers you may refer to the PNNI specification af pnni 0055 000 Annex E Architectural Variables The lt level gt parameter is optional if it is omitted timers of all levels will be displayed 160 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Set PNNI node timers to default values Use the following command to set the PNNI node timers to their default values Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config timers default lt index A11 99 gt lt level gt Parameters lt index gt the index of the timer to set all timers type 99 Output Note This request will set value for timers according to the index parameter Changes will take effect immediately Set PNNI node timers Use the following command to set PNNI node timers Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config timers set lt index gt lt value gt lt level gt Parameters lt index gt the index of the timer as appear in the show screen lt value gt the value that the selected timer will get lt level gt Internal level number 1 is the lowest physical node Examples route pnni config timers set 1151 Note This request will set value for timers according to the index parameter Changes will take effect immediately Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 161 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing 162 Avaya M770 A
335. uthorized managers that have been specified in the security tables will be able to manage the M770 ATM Switch using SNMP There is a limit on the number of concurrent NMS s that can manage a single M770 ATM Switch If SNMP security is enabled then a maximum of 15 NMS s can manage the M770 ATM Switch otherwise up to 20 NMS s can manage the switch Listing all authorized managers You can list all NMS s that are set up as authorized managers in the M770 ATM Switch For each NMS in the table the following information is displayed an index entry number for the NMS the address type for the NMS and the IP address for the NMS To display a list of authorized managers use the snmp secure allowed show command Command M15 155s8 gt snmp secure allowed show Output Secure mode is currently Disabled No entries specified in mstack secure allowed table Setting up an authorized manager entry You can add up to 15 authorized managers into the Secure Allowed Table Only these authorized managers will be able to access this M770 ATM Switch To add an authorized manager entry use the snmp secure allowed add command Command M15 155s8 gt snmp secure allowed add lt index gt lt ipaddress gt Example M15 155s8 gt snmp secure allowed add 3 172 16 1 152 Parameters lt index gt The index number for the entry into the table The index value must be an integer in the range 1 to 15 lt ipaddress gt The IP address for the NMS that is t
336. vaya M770 2 ATM Switch 2 vpi vci vpi vci 0 Endstation 2 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 303 Appendix F Routing and Signalling Concepts All setup requests travel on reserved channel 0 5 VPI 0 VCI 5 on root virtual port 0 but the ATM switch will assign an incoming and outgoing VPI and VCI ona particular port for the connection through the switch Therefore an ATM virtual circuit is a sequence of switch VPI VCI translations The value of the VPI and VCI within a particular ATM cell header will change as the ATM cell is switched through the ATM network In a single switch configuration a cell s VPI and VCI are translated only once but in a multiple switch environment a cell s VPI and VCI may be translated many times VPI and VCI values are assigned symmetrically that is the same values are reserved in both directions across a link This means that all virtual circuits are inherently bi directional This does not imply that SVC traffic must be sent in both directions it can be either bi directional or uni directional With point to multipoint virtual circuits data is only sent from the root source to the leaves destination parties Note On a given link VPI VCI identifiers are assigned in both directions of a circuit However if a circuit is uni directional one of these will not be used Note A cell s VPI and VCI are of local significance only They identify the cell as being associa
337. vaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Master Agent and Sub Agent The M770 ATM Switch is a fully distributed ATM switch Each module has its own switching and CPU power In order to present the switch as a single and united entity one module is automatically elected as a Master Agent while the other modules are Sub Agents The Master Agent status is shown by the Network Management Agent NMA LED The Master Agent is the module hosting the Management LEC with all its functionality IP address and switch wide information The Master Agent is also a regular module with all the functionality of a Sub Agent such as controlling the physical ports virtual ports and download The Master and Sub Agents have slightly different CLI options For example the Master Agent has the ip command and the access command which will enable you to access a Sub Agent from the Master Agent A simple way to find out whether you are currently communicating with a Master Agent is to type help at the command line and check whether there is an access command option All the information configured to the Master Agent IP ATM Prefix is backed up by all the Sub Agents so if the Master Agent is removed another module will be elected and all previous configuration settings will be kept Related Documents e Installation Guide of each module e Avaya M770 ATM Switch Manager application within the CajunView software suite
338. vel scope 56 e nodeID e ATM Address e Peer group ID for the physical node e The nodeID of the Peer Group Leader PGL of this peer group if it exists The next level in the hierarchy the Level 2 output displays the following e Level scope 48 e nodeID e ATM address Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 125 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing e Peer group ID of this logical node e Peer Group Leader if it exists In this example there is no PGL and therefore there are no additional peer groups in the hierarchy Global topology links Use the following command to display the global topology links Command Output M15 155s8 gt route pnni topology link lt level gt Node Id 38 a0 39 84 0f 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 20 00 00 00 6f 00 00 20400 Port 11 03 00 lt Port 08 07 00 lt Node Id 38 a0 39 84 0f 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 20 00 00 00 6 00 00 21 00 This represents the fact that 2 Horizontal Links PTSEs for 2 routable uni directional links exist in the node topology database The link is identified by the node ID and the port number of its ends If the link does not exist an X will be displayed on the vertical line If the optional lt level gt parameter is used only the horizontal links of that level shall be displayed 126 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Global Topology Nodes Use the following command to
339. wer up 0 0 0 is displayed Type The type of the VCL e p2p indicates it is a VCL of a Point to Point PVC e p2mpRoot indicates it s the root VCL of a Point to Multipoint PVC e p2mpLeaf indicates it s a leaf or a branch of a Point to Multipoint PVC 108 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 8 Permanent Virtual Connections PVCs and PVPs Managing PVP Connections Managing PVP Connections In some network configurations there may be a need to configure a Permanent Virtual Path PVP which is sometimes called Tunneling The PVP or the Tunnel is created to cross as many ATM switches as needed so the remote ends would see each other as if they are adjacent This is done by creating Virtual Ports on the remote switches using a specified VPI and this VPI is switches through out the ATM network Vport A 1 PVP X 1 X 4 PVP Y 4 Y 5 PVP Z5 Z 2 Vport B 2 Switch A Switch B The above example shows a direct connection between switches A and B Two vports were created A 1 vport on switch A using VPI 1 and B 2 vport on switch B using VPI 2 The Virtual Path Connection VPC between the two switches is constructed using 3 PVPs in switches X Y and Z X 1 X 4 Y 4 Y 5 and Z 5 Z 2 respectively In this example a letter A B X Y Z represents a switch port The number after the decimal is the VPI that is used Note that if there is no other vport between
340. will be assumed and an existing UBR traffic descriptor will be used If no such traffic descriptor exists one will be automatically set up for UBR traffic If any other type of traffic is required you must first set up the traffic descriptors in the usual way using the command td setup on all required modules If one of the specified VCLs already exists this VCL s traffic descriptors will be used in preference to any other VCLs specified by the user If both VCLs already exist their traffic descriptors must be compatible for the command to succeed To create a PMP PVC connection use the pvc setup pmp command Command M15 155s8 gt pvc setup pmp lt vcilindex gt lt vci2index gt lt vciNindex gt lt trunkId gt lt fwd td gt Examplel Setting up a PMP PVC between 2 ports on the same module M15 155s8 gt pvc setup pmp 2 15 0 801 2 15 0 802 2 200 3 Example2 Adding a branch to the same PMP call same trunk ID ona different module On module 2 M15 155s2 gt pvc setup pmp 2 15 0 803 9 2 0 803 9 2 0 804 2 200 3 On module 9 M15 155s9 gt pvc setup pmp 2 15 0 803 9 2 0 803 9 2 0 804 2 200 3 Parameters lt vcilindex gt The first VCL for the PVC connection in the format lt slot port number vpi vci gt lt vci2index gt The branch VCLs until the Nth branch for the PMP PVC ae connection in the format lt slot port vpi vci gt lt vcNindex gt lt trunkId gt The identifier of the PMP call but be the same on bot
341. will be removed Note Access control violation events are not saved in a non volatile memory Signaling Security Traps Management The switch can either send or not send SNMP traps to the NMS in case access control violation attempt occurs The SNMP trap contains information about the violation attempt Enabling Disabling Signaling Security related SNMP traps Command M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity traps enable Command M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity traps disable Displaying event logs Command M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity event show Output vport 9 13 0 direction outgoing srcensap 39 02 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 f6 00 01 3c 82 dstnsap 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0d 87 00 2c 00 40 0d 87 00 2c 82 filter priority 255 template Base ruletime 08 42 02 01 Jun 2000 GMT vport 9 1 0 direction incoming srcnsap 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0d 87 00 2c 00 40 0d 64 03 ea 81 dstnsap 39 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0d 87 00 4e 86 filter priority 10 template block 1 time 00 00 49 01 Jan 1970 GMT Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 257 Chapter 20 Signaling Security Access Control Commands Clearing the event log Command M15 155s8 gt vport sig sigsecurity event clear 258 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 21 Command Line Interface Scripts This chapter describes how to create and to run Command Line Interface CLI scripts
342. wing command to set PNNI node level When setting the lowest node s level it takes affect only after next reboot Setting all other node s level requires that the administrative status of that node would be down For more information about the admin status refer to route pnni config admin command Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config level set lt level 1 5 gt lt level 1 104 gt Parameters lt level 1 5 Internal level 1 is the lowest physical node lt level 1 Level scope has network wide significance 104 gt Setting PNNI Node Level to the Default Value The following command sets the PNNI node level to its default according to the given level Default values of the different internal levels appear in table Table 10 2 Table 10 2 Default Level Scope to PNNI Internal Levels Internal Level Level Scope Decimal Level Scope Hex 1 physical 56 38 2 48 30 3 40 28 4 32 20 5 24 18 Note The level scope of a node appears as the first byte of its node ID and the first byte of its peer group ID In addition the 104 lt level gt rightmost bits of the peer group ID are set to zero Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 149 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing PNNI Node ID Showing PNNI node ID Use the following command to display the PNNI node ID of this node Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config node_id show lt levvel gt Output Node id Level 1 C
343. witch It opens a telnet session to the module located in slot lt slot_number gt If lt slot_number gt is not entered all modules in the switch will be listed To return to the Master Agent use the exit command Command 15 155s8 gt access lt slot_no gt Output List of modules found in the switch 15 155F in slot 13 Master Agent 15 155F in slot 14 15 155s8 gt access 13 Welcome to the M770 ATM Switch command line interface 15 155s13 gt exit 15 155s8 gt 28 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 4 Managing Miscellaneous Commands Switch Summary Information The summary info command displays system information for the current ATM switching module Command M15 155s8 gt summary info Output System Information Module Type Serial Number C S Version Slot number Upper Backplane Boot ROM Version Boot Loader Version SW Version Build Time MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask IP Gateway Address LEC State LEC ELAN Name LEC LES Address M15 155F 15 atm ports OC 3 MMF 0000000 0 0 6 Master Agent Single Domain 1 12 2 0 18 2 0 18 Sun Dec 26 21 13 21 IST 1999 00 40 0D 87 00 0D 149 49 34 121 299 2599 259940 149 49 34 5 OPERATIONAL default 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Current ATM prefix 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 0D Current Node Id 38 A0 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 0D 00 00 00 00 00 00
344. witch was elected Peer Group Leader As a result when the user uses the route pnni config show command on a sub agent module some configuration parameters would be unknown to the sub agent module Those parameters would appear as dashed line The parameters for the Logical Levels are e Operational status of a level e Node ATM address All above configuration variables are explained in subsequent chapters PNNI Administrative Status Each PNNI node has an administrative admin status This parameter indicates whether this node has to be administratively up or down The physical node on the 1st level admin status is always up The admin status of a higher level node logical node is determined by the user It shall be up if the user wants the logical node to be active Note The admin status of a logical node is important when you want the switch to become a Peer Group Leader and an Logical Group Node at the higher level In order to achieve that you ll have to set both the Leadership Priority of the node at the lower level to a value greater than 0 and the admin status of the next higher level to up Showing PNNI node admin status To show the admin status of a node use the following command Command 15 155s8 gt route pnni config admin show 1 Output Admin Status Level 1 Up 144 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing To show the admin status of all levels use the
345. witches A B to be together at level 56 Assign the 7 byte to be 1 mark the index 1 for byte seven used The prefix for switches A B is 39 00 00 00 00 01 01 The user says it is the lowest level for switch A B Assign the next byte 8 to the switches in the peer group Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 307 Appendix G Setting Address Prefixes to Match Hierarchical PNNI 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 The prefix of switch A 39 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 The prefix of switch B 39 00 00 00 00 01 01 02 The user selects switches C D to be together at level 56 Assign the seventh byte to be 2 1 is already used for byte 7 mark the index 2 for byte seven used The prefix for switches C D is 39 00 00 00 00 01 02 The user says it is the lowest level for switch C D Assign the next byte 8 to the switches in the peer group The prefix of switch C 39 00 00 00 00 01 02 01 The prefix of switch D 39 00 00 00 00 01 02 02 The user selects switches E F G to be together at level 56 Assign the seventh byte to be 3 1 and 2 are already used for byte 7 mark the index 3 for byte seven used The prefix for switches E F G is 39 00 00 00 00 00 03 The user says it is the lowest level for switch E F G Assign the next byte 8 to the switches in the peer group The prefix of switch E 39 00 00 00 00 00 03 01 The prefix of switch F 39 00 00 00 00 00 03 02 The prefix of
346. wn 3 pDown PNNI 1NetDown 4 pDown PNNI 1NetDown 5 pDown PNNI 1NetDown 6 pDown PNNI 1NetDown 7 pUp PNNI 1 Net Up 8 pUp PNNI User Up 9 pUp PNNI 1 User Up 10 pUp PNNI 1 User Up 11 pUp PNNI 1 User Up 12 pUp PNNI 1 User Up 1 pUp PNNI 1 User Up 1 NYY NNN ONN NNN CUAHAWNE fo 32 1023 Disabled 32 1000 Inactive 32 1000 Inactive 32 1000 Inactive 32 1000 Inactive 32 1023 Inactive 32 1023 Inactive 32 1023 Inactive 32 1023 Inactive 32 1023 Ready 32 1023 Inactive 32 1023 Inactive 32 1023 Inactive 32 1023 Inactive 32 1023 Inactive 32 1023 Inactive 32 65535 InterSwitch 32 65535 CStartSent 32 65535 CStartSent 32 65535 NoContact 32 65535 NoContact 32 65535 NoContact 32 65535 NoContact 32 65535 NoContact 32 65535 InterSwitch 32 65535 InterSwitch 0 32 65535 InterSwitch 1 32 65535 InterSwitch 2 32 65535 InterSwitch 3 32 65535 InterSwitch 4 32 65535 InterSwitch The vport show command displays the information described in Table 6 1 Note In the above Table indicates that the information was obtained from ILMI protocol Port 0 is the CPU port and Port 16 is the Backplane port 56 Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing Virtual Ports Table 6 1 Output from the vport show command Field Description Virtual Port Id The virtual port This is displayed in the format lt slot g
347. x Current Default Value Value Leadership priority 1 20 20 initTimerPeriod 2 15000 15000 overrideTimerPeriod 3 30000 30000 reElectionTimerPeriod 4 15000 15000 Set PNNI PGLE parameters to default values Use the following command to set the PNNI node PGLE parameters to their default values Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config pgle default lt level gt lt index gt Parameters lt level gt internal PNNI level number 1 is the physical node lt index gt the index of the timer This request will set value for PGLE parameter according to the index parameter Changes will take effect immediately Set PNNI PGLE Parameter Use the following command to set the PNNI node PGLE parameters Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni config pgle set lt level gt lt index gt lt value gt Parameters lt level gt internal PNNI level number 1 is the physical node lt index gt the index of the timer lt value gt the vlaue that the selected timer will receive This request will set value for PGLE parameter according to the index parameter Changes will take effect immediately Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 153 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing PNNI Restricted Transit Flag A PNNI node may be administered to be restricted transit This will restrict calls from going through this node but will not restrict calls to be set from to endstations connected to the node directly This feature may be used by network a
348. xamples Pnni alloc memory 65824 bytes 0 Switch alloc memory 14094808 bytes 84 Switch free memory 2682408 bytes 15 Switch total memory 16777216 bytes Note Switch alloc memory include the pnni alloc memory Field Description Pnni alloc The number of bytes that are allocated for PNNI In parenthesis memory is the percentage of the PNNI allocation from the entire switch memory Switch alloc Includes all memory including PNNI that is currently allocated memory Switch free The number of bytes and percentage of memory that is still free memory Switch total Include both the memory available in RAM and in SIMMs memory Local Peer Neighbors The following command displays inofmration regarding synchronization protocol with the neighbors to this module Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni local nbr lt level gt Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 133 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Examples Peer Nbr Remote Node Id 38 a0 39 84 0 80 01 bc 61 de 81 00 00 20 00 00 00 6 00 00 20 00 Nbr Active State Time full 1513 Total number of ports 1 Number of received DBS packets 2 Number of transmitted DBS packets 4 Number of received PTSPs 808 Number of transmitted PTSPs 341 Number of received PTSE requests 1 Number of transmitted PTSE requests 1 Number of received PTSE acks 334 Number of transmitted PTSE acks 729 Nbr Ports Local Remote Hub Flood
349. y to determine that the entire ELAN will be LUNI 2 0 capable if the LECS LUNI 2 0 was auto and if this LES was registered first it will actually determine that When a LUNI 1 0 client tries to register to this LES the LES will accept it However if the LES is not a LUNI 2 0 capable i e LUNI 1 0 only then when a LUNI 2 0 client tries to register it will be told to work in LUNI 1 0 mode Proprietary resilient standby LESes The M770 ATM Switch LECS supports a proprietary standby LESes This will enable resiliency of the LES BUS in case the module hosting the LES BUS fails You can configure up to 10 modules to host the same ELAN name for example default Only the first LES to contact the LECS will host the default ELAN All other LESes will provide standby support for the ELAN Should the original LES fail for any reason one of the standby LESes will become the main LES and host the default ELAN This ensures that the ELAN remains up and available to all LECs on the ELAN Note Avaya strongly recommends that you use distributed LES BUS services instead of resilient Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 185 Chapter 13 LANE Services Proprietary Distributed LANE Services The M770 ATM Switch LECS supports a proprietary system for a distributed LES BUS in advance of implementing LANE version 2 This will enable not only resiliency of the ELAN but will also increase the number of clients LECs
350. ya M770 ATM Switch and the features that this software release supports Note This User Guide describes only the ATM functionality of the Avaya M770 chassis e Information about the Avaya M770 chassis safety considerations architecture main chassis control panel M SPV M SPX M SPS supervisor modules power supplies and fans is available in the Avaya M770 User Guide e Detailed information about the 10M 100M 1Gigabit Ethernet M SPV M SPX M SPS supervisor and M MLS multilayer module can be found in their respective Installation Guides About the Avaya M770 ATM Switch The M770 ATM switch is a high performance distributed Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM switch that is designed for building and campus backbone applications high performance centralized servers and power user environments Its advanced architecture can support very high traffic loads with no data loss or breaks in communication The M770 ATM Switch also implements LAN Emulation LANE components LANE enables legacy LAN applications to use a transparent ATM transport medium In this way end stations on existing LANs can communicate with ATM end stations The M770 ATM Switch supports a range of option modules that enable you to customize the switch to fulfil applications that are appropriate to your networking requirements It is designed as a software upgradeable product Therefore you can expand the functionality of the switch by downloading new software A
351. ya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide AppendixC Creating PVCs This appendix describes the procedure for creating PVCs on Avaya M770 ATM Modules Creating P2P PVCs are virtual circuits that are set up through manual configuration rather than through UNI signaling between the ATM endpoints as is done for the switched virtual circuits SVCs There are three steps in creating a P2P PVC on the M770 ATM switch 1 Create the Traffic Descriptor TD that will be used for the PVC 2 Limit the Signaling SVC range on the vport 3 Create the P2P PVC The next three subsections explain how to setup a PVC on the M770 ATM switch In this example a P2P PVC will be setup on the M770 between ports 1 1 and 1 2 using VPI 0 VCI 115 The M770 ATM switch uses the following system to describe a VC The number 1 2 0 115 indicates that there is a VC on slot 1 port 2 using VPI 0 and VCI 115 Creating a Traffic Descriptor A Traffic Descriptor must be defined with the service class that will be used to transport the traffic and the bandwidth that is required The example below shows a cell rate of 4152 cells per second appropriate for a DS1 24 DS0s times 173 cps Command M770s1 gt td setup CBR lt td_id gt pcr0 1 lt pcr0 1 gt pcr0 lt pcr0 gt Example M770s1 gt td setup CBR 5 pcr0 1 4152 To determine which td_id is available type td show to display all defined Traffic Descriptors Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 289 Appe
352. ype The address type for each port it can be either Internal address or Exterior address Scope This field indicates the scope of advertisement of the address The scope value indicates up to which hierarchical level the address will be advertised The lower the value the wider the domain that gets the address Value of 0 indicates that the address will be advertised through out the entire PNNI domain The advertisement scope is mapped from the UNI scope For more details refer to the Static Routing chapter Port 0 on the local slot indicates the CPU Addresses registered on the CPU port indicates services that are registered on the local module for example the LECS address as appears in the above example PNNI Local Switch Information The following commands show information for the entire switch Local Switch links This command displays all PNNI uplinks that were advertised by any module in the switch Uplinks are advertised for Outside links links to other peer groups that their Hello protocol had reached the final state of commonOutside Command M15 155s8 gt route pnni local switch link Output Node Id 38 A0 39 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 16 00 Port 11 03 00 00 gt Avaya M770 ATM Switch User s Guide 137 Chapter 10 Managing PNNI Routing Port 11 03 00 00 Node Id 38 A0 39 04 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 0D 87 00 20 00 This represents the fact

Cajun M770 version 2.3 User`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents